UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Honours/Minor Degree Programs

Booklet

Part 2- Detailed Syllabus

(with effect from 2022-2023)

1
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI
Honours/Minor Degree Programs
(with effect from 2022-2023)
Sr. No Honours/Minor degree programs Page No.
1 Infrastructure Engineering 03
2 Smart Cities 20
3 Waterways Transport Engineering 38
4 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering 55
5 Green Technology and Sustainability Engineering 72
6 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations 91
7 Blockchain 108
8 Cyber Security 126
9 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality 147
10 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning 163
11 Data Science 178
12 Internet of Things (IoT) 194
13 Waste Technology 214
14 Electric Vehicles 226
15 Microgrid Technologies 240
16 Robotics 252
17 3D Printing 264
18 Industrial Automation 280

Note: Course code format used in the document

1. Course Code: HXXC-Z01: (example- HEVC-501)

H stands for Honours/ Minor course
XX : Abbrevation of Program code: eg. For Electric Vehcile- it is ‘EV’
C- Theory Course
Z for semester. For sem 5 -> 501

2. Skill Based Lab Code: HXXSBL-Z01: (example- HEVSBL-701)

H stands for Honours/ Minor course
XX : Abbrevation of Program code: eg. For Electric Vehcile- it is ‘EV’
SBL- Theory Course
Z for semester. For sem 7 -> 701

2
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

in
Infrastructure Engineering

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

3
 University of Mumbai
Infrastructure Engineering
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
&Se Course Title Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
m Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HIEC501:
TE Transportation 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Infrastructure
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HIEC601:
Sem. Energy and IT 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Infrastructure
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HIEC701:
BE Geographic
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Information
VII System
HXXSBL701: Lab-1
-- -- 04 -- -- -- 50 50 02
GIS
Total 04 - 04 100 -- 50 150 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HIEC801:
Sem. Infrastructural
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Planning and
Management
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

4
 Infrastructure Engineering: Semester-V
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
HIEC501 Transport Infrastructure 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. - - - 100

Rationale

Urban sprawl worldwide is causing tremendous pressure on transport infrastructure. Transportation

infrastructure is one of the most important factors for a country's progress. The complex network of
connections between coastal ports, inland ports, rails and air routes is the 'lifeline' of a nation and it forms a
foundation of economic development. Transportation is an important sector of the economy in its own right
and that has been proven by so many instances how transport infrastructure has added speed and efficiency
to a country's progress. India has a large and diverse transport sector with its own share of challenges and
students will be conversant with transport infrastructure, diverse Transportation needs and equipments after
completion of this course.

Objectives

1. To understand the fundamentals of infrastructure and different modes of transportation globally and
current state of affairs in India
2. To illustrate the types of modern highways, bridges and tunnels required for the transport infrastructure.
3. To identify the Mass Transit systems, for end to end transport and the structural systems required for the
same.
4. To design airport infrastructure mechanism
5. To classify water way infrastructure
6. To study all the important tools and equipments required for the efficient functioning of Transportation
infrastructure.

Module Contents Hours

Introduction to Infrastructure: Definition of infrastructure, Need of infrastructure, 07
different forms of infrastructure, physical and social infrastructure, role of
1 infrastructure in the development of a nation, Transportation scenario globally and in
India; Overview of various transport systems in India-rail, road, air, waterways. Major
organizations and players in the field of transport infrastructure
2 Modern Highways: Roads, Planning concepts, Uninterrupted traffic systems, Signal 10
free intersections, Freeway, Expressway, Service roads, bye pass, Turnpike.

5
 Bridges and Tunnels: Classification based on Structural Materials like Steel, RCC, Pre-
stressed concrete or Composite. Bridge types based on structural behaviour such as
Beam bridge, Truss Bridge, Arch Bridge, Suspension& Cable stayed cantilever and
special purpose bridges.
Tunneling Methods: Types and purpose of tunnels; factors affecting choice of
excavation technique; Methods – soft ground tunneling, hard rock tunneling, shallow
tunneling, deep tunneling; Supports in Tunnels: Different types of supports in
tunneling and their applicability.
Mass Transit system: trains, ferries, buses, trams, Rapid mass transit systems such as
3 subways and surface light rail systems, Cable cars, Various types of guided transport, 07
tube, U-Bahn, metropolitan or underground, Metro rails, Structural components and
their selection criteria.
Airport Planning: Airport Master Plan, Airport Site Feature, Economic and Financial 08
feasibility, Zoning around airports, design considerations for Apron, Runway, Taxiway,
4 Hangar.
Air traffic control: radar, satellite navigation, One way, Two-way radio
communication. ATC assistance during Departure, En-Route, Descent, Approach and
Landing.
Waterways transportation: History of water transportation, policies related to water 09
transportation in India. Status of river, canals and ocean transportation in India.
Modes of water transport - pontoons, amphibians, hovercrafts, boats, ships, water
5 taxi. Advantages and disadvantages of water transportation.
Ports harbours and docks: Historical development of Port, Docks and Harbour. Port
building facilities, Classification of harbours, Requirement of Harbour, Jetty, Harbour
components, characteristics of good harbour and principles of harbour planning
Modern surveying tools - Drones, satellite survey, GIS software, GPS system, Total 11
station, Electronic Distance Measurement (EDM) Instruments
Modern Equipment- Dumper trucks, dozers, vibratory rollers, graders, tunneling
6 equipments, lifting equipments (Cranes), sand washing equipments, earth movers,
different excavators, wheel tractor scraper, trenchers, loaders, pile boring and pile
driving machine, concrete mixers. concrete batching/mixing plant, concrete pumps,
slip forms, concrete vibrator, hot mix plant

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course work, students will be able to,

1. Understand the fundamentals of infrastructure and different modes of transportation
2. Illustrate the types of modern highways, bridges and tunnels along with tunnelling methods required
for the transport infrastructure.

3. Identify the mass transit system in transport infrastructure

4. Design different components of airport infrastructure along with it’s economical and financial
feasibility
5. Classify different modes of water transportation and evaluate the principles of harbour planning
6. Study different modern surveying tools and modern equipment required for transport
infrastructure

6
Theory Examination:-

1. The question paper will comprise six questions; each carrying 20 marks.
2. The first question will be compulsory that will have short questions having weightage of 4-5 marks
covering the entire syllabus.

3. The remaining five questions will be based on all the modules. For this, the module shall be divided
proportionately further, and the weightage of the marks shall be judiciously awarded in proportion to
the importance of the sub-module and contents thereof.
4. There can be an internal choice in various sub-questions/ questions in order to accommodate the
questions on all the topics/ sub-topics.
5. The students will have to attempt any three questions out of remaining five questions.

6. A total of four questions need to be attempted.

Text Books:-

1. A Sustainable Vision for Urban India, Jain A K, Publisher: Kalpaz Publications

2. Highway Engineering, C. E. G. Justo and S. K. Khanna, Nem Chand & Bros; 10th Edition 2015 (1 January
2001)
3. Railway Engineering, M. M. Agarwal and Satish Chandra, Oxford University Press.
4. Design of Bridges, N. Krishna raju, Oxford and IBH Publishing
5. Airport Engineering: Planning And Design by Saxena S C , CBS Publication
6. Airport planning and design, S.K. Khanna, S. S Jain, M.G Arora , Nem Chand Brothers; 6th edition (January
1, 1999)
7. Inland Water Transport in India by R.P. Misra published by Prasaranga, University of Mysore in 1972.
8. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Dr. S.P Bindra, Dhanpatrai Publications, India
9. Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering: R. Srinivasan, Charotar Publication, India
10. Remote sensing and Geographical Information System, By A. M. Chandra and S. K. Ghosh, Narosa
Publishing House.
11. Advanced Surveying -Total Station, GIS and Remote Sensing by Satheesh Gopi, R. Sathikumar and N.
Madhu, Pearson publication
12. Surveying Vol. 2 by S. K. Duggal, McGraw Hill Publication

Recommended Books:-
1. Introduction to Infrastructure: An Introduction to Civil and Environmental Engineering, Michael R Penn
2. Remote Sensing & GIS,2/E—Bhatta– Oxford University Press
3. Modern Construction Equipment and Methods by Frank Harris
4. Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods (McGraw-Hill Series In Civil Engineering) by Robert L
Peurifoy ), Clifford J. Schexnayder, AviadShapira
5. Driving Horizontal Workings and Tunnel, by Pokorovski, Mir Publishers, 1980.
6. Harbour, Dock and Tunneling Engineering by R. Srinivasan Published by Charotar Publication

7
 Infrastructure Engineering: Semester-VI
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
HIEC601 Energy and IT Infrastructure 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
The power infrastructure consists of generation, transmission, and distribution systems that are essential to all
other infrastructures and every aspect of the economy. In India, various sources of energy are used to
generate power. These include coal, natural gas, hydro, nuclear, and renewable (includes solar, wind, small hydro
and biomass). Telecommunications infrastructure is a physical medium through which all Internet traffic flows.
This includes telephone wires, cables and mobile technology such as fifth-generation (5G) mobile networks. The
IT infrastructure consists of all elements that support the management and usability of data and information.
These include the physical hardware and facilities (including data centers), data storage and retrieval, network
systems, legacy interfaces, and software to support the business goals of an enterprise.

Objectives

1. Evaluate energy infrastructure and hydroelectric power plant.

2. Classify the tidal, wind and solar energy and its operation
3. Explain nuclear energy infrastructure, policies and regulations for establishing nuclear power
plant and issues related to radioactive waste
4. Design criterions for telecommunication tower
5. Describe the fundamental elements of IT infrastructure
6. Design criterions for development of smart grid networks

Module Contents Hours

Introduction to energy infrastructure: Types of electrical generation; generation
1 system architecture; power plant planning and design.
04
Hydroelectric infrastructure: Site selection; classification; hydrographs; storage and
pondage; essential elements; selection of turbines, environmental impact assessment.
Tidal energy infrastructure: Fundamentals of tide; wave theory, loading and energy;
operating principle - oscillating device; turbine characteristics; devices; moorings and
2 anchors; foundations. 06
Wind energy infrastructure: Offshore and onshore wind; properties of wind; wind
resource assessment; wind turbine blades; wind turbines in grid; wind projects.

8
 Solar energy infrastructure: Basics of solar PV, fundamentals of the design of solar
energy fields; concentrated solar power plant; solar water heating systems
Nuclear energy infrastructure: Policy and regulations; economics and financing of
3 nuclear power plants; nuclear technology selection and project implementation; fuel 10
supply, radioactive waste and management; issues; environmental impact
Telecommunication – Definition, use, functions, and components, site surveys- raw
4 land tower site survey and boundary survey, classification of telecommunication
13
towers, Telecommunication signals, Design of towers – configuration, tower erection,
transmission lines construction, operation and maintenance of distribution systems.
IT infrastructure – components of IT infrastructure, Internet and world wide web,
5 design, planning, and implementation of networks and servers, storage management , 12
Backup / Restore Methodology, Remote Access, Control, Administration.
Smart grid, transmission and distribution: Grid resilience; environmental
6 performance; operational efficiencies; network architecture; transmission systems;
07
wide area monitoring, protection and control, transmission and distribution
architecture; micro grids; vulnerability; peak load shifting and grid storage.

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course work, students will have ability to

1. Explain generation of hydroelectric power and its impact on environment
2. Classify and design infrastructure for non conventional energy sources
3. Describe the policies and regulations for nuclear power plant, infrastructural requirement and its
environmental impact assessment
4. Evaluate the components and functions of telecommunication
5. Summarize the fundamental elements of IT infrastructure such as networks and servers, storage
and remote access
6. Design and develop smart grid networks for transmission and distribution of the energy

Theory Examination:-

1. The question paper will comprise six questions; each carrying 20 marks.
2. The first question will be compulsory that will have short questions having weightage of 4-5 marks
covering the entire syllabus.

3. The remaining five questions will be based on all the modules. For this, the module shall be divided
proportionately further, and the weightage of the marks shall be judiciously awarded in proportion to
the importance of the sub-module and contents thereof.
4. There can be an internal choice in various sub-questions/ questions in order to accommodate the
questions on all the topics/ sub-topics.
5. The students will have to attempt any three questions out of remaining five questions.

6. A total of four questions need to be attempted.

9
Text Books:-

1. Textbook of Renewable Energy (Wood head Publishing India in Energy) ,by S.C. Bhatia , R.K. Gupta
2. P. Jain, Wind Energy Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
3. Nuclear Power in India by N. Sharma, B. Banerjee, Rupa Publication 2008
4. Environmental Issues for 21st Century by S. P. Dasgupta, Mittal Publication.
5. Steve Morris, Up the Tower: The complete Guide to Tower Construction, Champion Radio Products Brian
W. Smith, Communication Structures, Thomas Telford publications
6. ICT in Urban services, Compendium of global good practices, National Institute of Urban affairs,
http://pearl.niua.org/sites/default/files/books/GPGL1_ICT.pdf
7. Fundamentals of telecommunication- https://www.net.t-labs.tuberlin.
de/teaching/computer_networking/documents/telecomm_fundamentals.pdf

Recommended Books:-
1. Hydroelectric Energy, Renewable Energy and the Environment By Bikash Pandey, Ajoy Karki, ISBN
9781439811672 CRC Press
2. Tidal Energy Systems, 1st Edition, Design, Optimization and Control, Vikas Khare Cheshta Khare Savita
Nema Prashant Bareda, Elsevier
3. E book on Energy Law in India by Mohammad Naseem, Saman Naseem, 2017, publisher Wolters Kluwer
4. Graham, S. and Marvin, S. Planning Cybercities Integrating Telecommunications into Urban Planning, The
town planning review, 70(1), Liverpool University Press
5. S. Borlase (2013) Smart Grid Infrastructure, Technology, and Solutions, CRC Press. ISBN 9781439829103.
6. L.F. Drbal, P.G. Boston, K.L. Westra, R.B. Erickson (1996) Power Plant Engineering, Kluwer Academic
Publishers. ISBN 9781461380474.
7. D. Greaves, G. Iglesias (2018) Wave and Tidal Energy, John Wiley & Sons Ltd. ISBN 9781119014454.
8. S. A. Kalogirou (2009) Solar Energy Engineering Processes and Systems, Elsevier. ISBN 9780123745019.
9. Basic Infrastructure for a Nuclear Power Project (2006) Technical Report, CI#128 IAEA. ISBN 9201085060.
10. Kiessling,F., Nefzger,P., Nolasco,J.F., Kaintzyk,U., (2003), Overhead Power Lines Planning Design
Construction, 4th Edition, Springer
11. Ganguli,S.K., Kohli,V., (2016), Power Cable Technology, CRC Press

10
 Infrastructure Engineering: Semester-VII
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
HIEC701 Geographical Information Systems 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. - - - 100

Rationale

Geographic information system (GIS) is a computer system for capturing, storing, checking, and displaying data
related to positions on Earth's surface. By relating seemingly unrelated data, GIS can help individuals and
organizations better understand spatial patterns and relationships. IS technology is a crucial part of spatial
data infra-structure. Many different types of information can be compared and contrasted using GIS. The system
can include data about people, such as population, income, or education level. It can include information about
the landscape, such as the location of streams, different kinds of vegetation, and different kinds of soil. It can
include information about the sites of factories, farms, and schools, or storm drains, roads, and electric power
lines. Use of Geographic’s Information system in all infrastructures will enhance the social, economic,
development of India in all aspects.

Objectives

1. To understand the fundamentals of GIS, basics tools, and its applications in all branches of Civil and
infrastructure Engineering.
2. To Illustrate the variousComponent of GIS, co-ordinate systems for creations of vector data and raster
dataset by using various GIS tools.

3. To understand Basic geodata base system for Creation of various types of maps.

4. To create various thematic maps by using the vector Data set as well as raster data set.

5. To analyze spatial Data for solving real word problems.

6. To apply GIS output data for solving real life problems.

Module Contents Hours

1 Introduction to Geographic Information System

03
GIS: History, Development of GIS, Objective of GIS, Advantages of GIS.
Introduction to Maps: Definition, Scale, Types of Maps, elements of Map, Projection
2 Coordinate Systems: Geographic, rectangular and Polar – Transformation, types and
09
application.
GIS: What is GIS, components of GIS, its applications, open source softwares.
11
 DBMS: -Database Management system – function – types – advantages, Introduction to
Toposheet. Various open data sources.
3 GIS Data Model: Spatial Data Types- , Vector data, Raster data, TIN (Triangulated
10
reregulated network) data model, comparison of Vector &raster data, Non spatial data
(attributes) & its types. Preprocessing of spatial data set.
GIS input data:
Vector Data: -Sources for GIS Data Shape files, Vector Data Input – Georeferencing, Map
digitization and editing, and Topology – Topological Relationship.
4 Raster Data Input – Digital Elevation Mode (DEM)- Introduction to DEM, types of Dem, 12
Uses of Dem & different types of resolution, Introduction to satellite images, image
classification, Quality assessment of freely available Digital Elevation Model, Raster File
Formats, Vector File Formats – Raster to Vector and Vector to Raster Conversion.
GIS Data Analysis: Introduction to GIS data Analysis – Data selection, reclassification,
5 overlaying analysis, Buffer Analysis, Spatial Analysis (Dem Analysis,) Surface Analysis,
12
Network Analysis , proximity Analysis, Vector & Raster Analysis Methods. Error in GIS and
key elements of maps.
GIS Output Design and Presentation
6 Introduction - Spatial and non-spatial data presentation - Map layout – Charts, graphs
06
and multimedia output, elements of spatial data quality, Meta data and introduction to
web GIS.

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course work, students will be able to,

1. Explain GIS applications in various fields
2. Illustrate the types of maps, their characteristics and different co-ordinate system, Components of
GIS& Familiar with new GIS software.
3. Compare the basics of Data Base Management system for GIS - vector data set, raster data set &
Produce an error free GIS database for civil engineering applications.
4. Create & design basic database like creation of shape files, vector data set, raster data set & Produce
an error free GIS database for civil engineering applications
5. Analyze GIS Data which includes creating buffers, Clipping Features, raster data analysis, vector Data
Analysis and Dissolve Features.
6. Application of spatial data output along with quality assessment for applications in Civil & Infrastructure
Engg.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

Weight age of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1) Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2) Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
12
3) Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
will be from any module other than module 3) .
4) The students will have to attempt any three questions out of remaining five questions
5) Total Four questions need to be attempted.

Text Books:-
1. Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System, By A.M. Chandra and S.K. Ghosh, Narosa Publication
House.

2. Remote Sensing: Principles and Applications by B C Panda.

3. Geographic Information System by Jatin Pandey .
4. Remote Sensing and GIs by Basudeb Bhatta, Oxford University.

Recommended Books:-
1. Jonathan Campbell and Michael Shin, Essentials of Geographic Information Systems, 2011, Saylor
Foundation, ISBN: 9781453321966.
2. Michael N. DeMeres, Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems, 4th Edition, 2009, Wiley, ISBN:
9780470129067
3. NPTEL GIS web course.

13
 Infrastructure Engineering: Semester-VII
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
HIESBL701 Geographic Information System – Lab 2

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 4 - - 2 - 2

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
50 - 50 100

Objectives

1. To acquire basic knowledge of Geographic Information System Lab practices and applying it for solving
real life problem in Civil & Infrastructure Engineering.
2. To illustrate basic GIS-terms which are connected to data processing by means of exercises
3. To prepare basic geo data for Spatial and non spatial Analysis.
4. To apply Google earth in Geographic information system for preparation of various shapes files,
preparation of vector data set.
5. To analyze basic geodata base by using various tools.
6. To convert GIS output into various thematic maps for solving various real life problems in Civil –
infrastructure Engineering.

List of Experiments

Module Contents Hours

Getting started with GIS software (QGIS, ArcGIS) & data collection from various free 4
1
available sources.
Georeferenceing and projection of toposheet, Digitization of map/ Toposheet. 4
2
Creation of thematic maps, Base Map preparation, Data Conversion – Vector to Raster, 4
3
Raster to Vector.
Google earth integrations in GIS. 4
4
Vector analysis and Raster analysis, adding attribute data – quarries on attribute data, 4
5
Map composition.
Developing Digital Elevation Model, its application & analysis. 4
6
A case study of GIS applications. 4
7

Contribution to Outcomes

Learner will be able to…

1. Apply the installation of GIS software’s and various tools.

2. Explain various Database structure like vector data, raster data set.
3. Prepare and convert vector data set into raster data set.
14
 4. Interpret Google earth with GIS.
5. Perform various types of Analysis on raster data, vector data.
6. Transform GIS output by preparation of various thematic maps.

GIS Software’s: Arc GIS 10.3, QGis.

Assessment

Term Work Including

Laboratory work : 25 Marks
Case Study/Report/Tutorial: 20 Marks
Attendance: 05 Marks

End Semester Oral Examination

Oral examination will be based on the entire syllabus.

Text Books:-
1. Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System, By A.M. Chandra and S.K. Ghosh, Narosa
Publication House.

2. Remote Sensing: Principles and Applications by B C Panda.

3. Geographic Information System,by JatinPandey .
4. Remote Sensing and GIs by Basudeb Bhatta, Oxford University.

Recommended Books:-
1. Jonathan Campbell and Michael Shin, Essentials of Geographic Information Systems, 2011, Saylor
Foundation, ISBN: 9781453321966.
2. Michael N. DeMeres, Fundamentals of Geographic Information Systems, 4th Edition, 2009, Wiley, ISBN:
9780470129067
3. NPTEL GIS web course.

15
 Infrastructure Engineering: Semester-VIII
Subject Code Subject Name Credits
HIEC801 Infrastructural planning and management 4

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
Infrastructure is the resources required for a society and its economy to function. Infrastructure
Planning primarily relates to new infrastructure creation but also phasing out of deficient and
outdated infrastructure when it is cost-effective.
Economic infrastructure is an internal facility of a country that make business activity possible, Such as
communication, transportation and distribution networks, financial institutions and markets, and energy supply
systems. Economic infrastructure definitely ensures the mobility of labour and capital within/from the economy.
It results in the overall growth of towns and cities. Infrastructures provide for a lot of employment generation and
employment opportunities. They also play a crucial role in national defense activities.

Objectives

1. To understand the infrastructural scenario in India and opportunities and challenges to be faced in road
development.
2. To understand the Infrastructure economics, finance and social environmental risk in infrastructure
3. To Realizing the real-world risks and challenges in managing infrastructure.
4. To identify the needs in urban infrastructure development and recycling technologies
5. To Understand the impact of infrastructural projects on environment
6. To analyse success and failure of measure infrastructural projects in India

Module Contents Hours

Introduction-
1 Infrastructure scenario in India, transportation, power and telecom sectors, urban and
06
rural infrastructure in India, road infrastructure development in India, rural roads
development in India-opportunities and challenges
Infrastructure economics and finance, project structuring and risk allocation in project
2 finance, Public-Private Partnership (PPP) for infrastructure- case studies, risk
08
management in infrastructure projects, term sheet development economic and social
e4nvironmental risk in infrastructure,
3 Project Governance, public sector governance, strategies for governing against
10
infr6astructure project turbulence, the governance model, data–base management,

16
 actor mapping and social network analysis, fair process and negotiations, design
thinking, life cycle and benefit cost analysis
Innovative infrastructure financing, urban infrastructure needs in India and funding
options, new and innovative materials for long lasting road infrastructure, green
4 highways –recycling technology, durable road infrastructure –options and recent 10
developments, polycentric governance and incomplete design, successful project
delivery strategies.
Environmental impact assessment: Tools, impact on air ,water, soil & Noise, Role of
5 Biodiversity impact Assessment, Identification ,Prediction &Evaluation of Impacts on 10
Biodiversity, Techniques of Biodiversity impact assessment, E I A Report Preparation
6 Case Studies: Case studies for 1)BOT 2)Dams 3)Mass Transit System 4)Government
08
Funded Projects

Contribution to Outcomes

Students will have the ability to

1. Explain Indian Infrastructural framework and future challenges.
2. Analyze the infrastructure projects based on various risks.
3. Develop critical thinking on a variety of novel solutions or fixes which aids in execution infrastructure
projects better.
4. Design innovative methods for long lasting infrastructure and understand the successful project delivery
strategies.
5. Analyze the effect of infrastructural projects on environment.
6. Apply the design methodologies to the real world case studies

Theory Examination:-

1. The question paper will comprise six questions; each carrying 20 marks.
2. The first question will be compulsory that will have short questions having weightage of 4-5 marks covering
the entire syllabus.
3. The remaining five questions will be based on all the modules. For this, the module shall be divided
proportionately further, and the weightage of the marks shall be judiciously awarded in proportion to the
importance of the sub-module and contents thereof.
4. There can be an internal choice in various sub-questions/ questions in order to accommodate the questions
on all the topics/ sub-topics.
5. The students will have to attempt any three questions out of remaining five questions.
6. A total of four questions need to be attempted.

Text Books:-

1. Infrastructure Planning and Management (2018) by Prof. Ashwin Mahalingam NPTEL.

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/105/106/105106188/
2. Projects planning, Analysis Selection, Implementation and Review, Prasanna Chandra Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi, 2005
3. Vasant Desai, “Project Management”, Himalaya Publishing, 1st Edition, 2010
4. Arbitration”, Jubilee Publications, 2nd Edition., 1996 Engineering Contracts and B. J. Vasavada, “

17
5. Construction Management & PWD Accounts --- D Lal, S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2012
6. Fundamentals of Engineering Economics—Pravin Kumar, Wiley, India

Recommended Books:-

1. Goodman AS, Hastak M (2006). Infrastructure planning handbook: planning, engineering, and economics.
New York: ASCE Press.
2. Miller R, Lessard DR (2001). The strategic management of large engineering projects: Shaping institutions,
risks, and governance. MIT press.
3. J. Parkin and D. Sharma, Infrastructure planning, Thomas Telford, London, 1999.
4. Construction project scheduling and control ----Mubarak, Wiley India
5. Construction Management: Planning and finance-- Cormican D. Construction press, London, Feb 2002.

18
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

in
Smart Cities

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

19
 University of Mumbai
Smart Cities
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Examination Scheme and Marks Scheme
Year & Course Title
Sem Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
Theory Pract Assess- Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HSCC501:
Smart City Planning 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
TE
Sem and Development
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04

Total Credits = 04

TE HSCC601:
Sem Smart City-Project 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Management
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HSCC701:
BE Smart Urban 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem VII Infrastructures
HSCSBL701: Lab-1:
Smart City-Project -- -- 02 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Management
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HSCC801: Smart
Sem Management of
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Smart Urban
Infrastructures
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

20
 Smart Cities: Semester V
Course Code Course Name Credits
HSCC501 Smart City Planning and Development 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
Today, more than 54% of the world’s total population lives in urban areas. It is projected that urbanization
will continue in the coming years, raising the urban population to 6.0 billion people by 2045. The significant
increase in urban population will put awesome load on urban infrastructure which results in increasing the
demand for energy, mobility, water, and other urban services in cities. So, cities have to become smarter in
provision of urban services. Also due to the global awareness about negative environmental impacts of
pollution, cities are feeling more pressure to improve their environmental performance, while improving
their level of services. Increasing demand for sustainable, inclusive, reliable and efficient urban service puts
our urban infrastructures under a huge pressure. But digitalization provides a powerful tool to address these
issues and create a paradigm shift in our concept of cities. Due to this novel nature of smart cities, it is
important that policymakers, urban managers and other relevant actors be prepared to understand and
address the challenges that the transition will bring about. This course will provide the basic principles that
to consider for a successful transition into a smart city.

Objectives
1. Enable students in understanding the concepts, discourses and practices of “Smart Cities”
across the Globe.
2. To develop competence in planning projects at the city level to ensure sustainability of
environment and human beings.
3. Apply smart technologies across the spectrum of infrastructure and governance.
4. Develop overall city strategy to become contemporary and competitive.
5. Enable students to understand city centric capital formation and finance, risk and feasibility to
ensure the economic health of the city.
6. Develop overall smart cities and villages.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
1 Introduction to Smart Cities- 09

21
 Definition and concept of smart city, Introduction to City planning,
1.1
Introduction to Development Control Rules, Building Bye Laws
1.2 Conventional Vs. Smart city, Understanding Smart City
1.3 Various approaches to smart city, Pan city concept
1.4 Challenges of Urbanization, Smart City Characteristics
Smart City Standards-
2.1 Smart City Planning and Development, Dimensions of Smart Cities
2.2 Government of India initiatives “100 Smart Cities” Policy and Mission
2 2.3 Global experience of smart cities 09
2.4 Smart cities –Global standards
2.5 Smart cities-Performance benchmarks
2.6 Smart cities-Practice codes
Important sectors of smart city
3.1 Various sectors in smart city, Smart building and home device
Smart water, Smart Transportation, Smart Health, Smart Energy, smart
3 3.2 09
public service
3.3 Cyber security, Safety and privacy, Concept of smart community
3.4 Concept of Digitalization, brief information about the various tools used
for digitalization such as- ICT, IoT, Sensors, Artificial Intelligence
Governance of Smart Cities-E-Governance
Introduction to smart E-Governance, Smart E-Governance for Citizen
4.1
services
4 4.2 Smart E-Governance for Industries and Commerce 09
4.3 Smart E-Governance within Government
4.4 Envisaging Future Smart E-Governance
4.5 Models for smart Governance
4.6 Regulatory Guidelines and Standards for E-Governance
Smart Citizen Services
5.1 Smart leadership and strategy; Stakeholder’s engagement
5.2 Smart healthcare
5 Smart education, skill development centers, incubation/ Trade 08
5.3
facilitation centers
5.4 Safety and security of citizens particularly women, children and the
elderly people
Green Building in Smart Cities and Smart Villages-
Sustainability, smart housing, Green buildings, Rating system of Green
6.1
Building
6 6.2 Energy efficient buildings, Energy Saving System in buildings 08
Introduction to Rural Planning and Development, Understanding
6.3
Concept of Smart Village, Issues of Smart Village
Smart Village Performance Benchmark, Smart Village Policy and Mission,
6.4
Planning and Management of Smart Village, Financing Smart Village

22
 Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Conceptualize cities as socio-technical systems

2. Evaluate the main impacts of information and communication technologies on urban
infrastructures and services.
3. Describe the main steps and considerations of the smart city transition.
4. Compare the main managerial and governance challenges of developing and managing a
smart city.
5. Apply such concepts and tools in the case of smart water and smart housing systems.
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Reference Books:
1. “Smart Cities Unbundled” by, Sameer Sharma, Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
2. “Introduction to Smart Cities” by P.P. Anil Kumar, Pearson Publications
3. “Smart Cities & Urban Development in India “by N. Mani, New Century Publications
4. “Smart City” by Arun Firodia, Vishwakarma Publications.
5. “The Smart City Transformations: The Revolution of the 21st Century” by Amitabh Satyam & Igor
Calzada, Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
6. “Financing Cities in India: Municipal Reforms, Fiscal Accountability and Urban Infrastructure” by,
Prasanna K. Mohanty, SAGE publications India pvt. Ltd.
7. “Transforming Our Cities: Facing Up To India's Growing Challenge: Postcards of Change”, by Isher
Judge Ahluwalia,Harper Collins publications
8. "Urban Systems Design Creating Sustainable Smart Cities in the Internet of Things Era”, by Yoshiki
Yamagata, Perry P. J. Yang, Elsevier publications
9. “Internet of Things in Smart Technologies for Sustainable Urban Development” by G. R. Kanaga
chidambaresan, R. Maheswar V. Manikandan, K. Ramakrishnan by Springer Publications
10. “Smart Cities: Introducing Digital Innovation to Cities” by Oliver Gassmann, Jonas Böhm, Maximilian
Palmié, Emerald Publications.

23
 Honours in Smart Cities: Semester VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HSCC601 Smart City-Project Management 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
Smart City projects involve great technical complexity, and require a wide diversity of skills to control and
monitor them. Project Management would be an integral part for smart infrastructure and cities. Like other
complex infrastructure projects; smart city projects are subjected to risk and uncertainties leading to huge time
and cost overrun. Managers are faced with the problem of putting together and directing large temporary
organizations subjected to constrained resources, limited time, and environmental uncertainty. Project
management plays an important role in developing the Smart Cities. It has grown in response to the need for a
managerial approach that deals with the problems and opportunities of modern society. It provides the technical
and managerial competency, communication and decision making necessary to meet the challenges of complex
activities. Application of modern project management tools would ensure more collaboration, communication
flow and much flawless implementation of Smart City projects. Modern project management concepts of
application of Integrated Project Delivery (IPD) and Building Information Modeling (BIM) would reduce the co-
ordination problems and ensure much higher probability of successful completion of the projects within
stipulated time and cost frame

Objectives

1. This course is designed to give exposure to project management tools and techniques applicable for
planning, controlling and monitoring of Smart Infrastructure and Cities.
2. This course would also enable to develop insight for managing project risks, uncertainties and
complexities of smart city projects.
3. To provide overview on sound disaster risk management practices for preparing towards “Safe Cities”.
To educate and sensitize students, government officers, planners, policy makers, academician,
researchers and others on process of disaster management in smart cities.
4. To educate participants on various tools and methods that can be adopted for hazard identification,
vulnerability analysis and disaster risk reduction measures.
5. To stimulate thought process to address hazard risks and vulnerabilities of distinct groups within the
city to make more resilient communities.
6. To stimulate process of critically analyzing risks to various urban sectors like Health, Transport,
Communication, Housing, Services, Infrastructure etc to come up with strategy to reduce risks
Researchers and Academicians.
24
 Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Name of Module 1: Philosophy and Concepts of Project Management in smart cities-
1.1 Philosophy and Concepts of Project Management-Phases
1 1.2 Philosophy and Concepts of Project Management- Stages of Project- 08
1.3 Philosophy and Concepts of Project Management-Approval Status
1.4 Philosophy and Concepts of Project Management-Work Break down Structure
Name of Module 2: Project Organization Structure-
2.1 Project Organization Structure- Planning
2.2 Project Organization Structure- Scheduling
2 2.3 Project Organization Structure-Controlling 08
2.4 Project Organization Structure-CPM
2.5 Project Organization Structure-The PERT Model
2.6 Project Management using BIM
Name of Module 3: Project Cost Analysis
3.1 Project Cost Analysis
3 3.2 Updating a Project 09
3.3 Resource Allocation and Leveling
3.4 Line of Balance Technique
Name of Module 4: Smart City Project Management with Case Studies -
4.1 Smart Project Planning
4.2 Smart Project Scheduling
4 4.3 Smart Project Monitoring 09
4.4 Smart Project Controlling
4.5 Project Risk Management
4.6 Case Studies on Smart Cities
Name of Module 5: Safety, Security and Disaster Management for Smart Citizen-
5.1 Safety, Security and Disaster Management for Smart Citizen
5 5.2 Disaster Risk Reduction (DRR) Overview 09
5.3 Smart Cities and Disaster Management
5.4 DRR Framework for Smart Cities
Name of Module 6: Thematic Analysis and Resilience Strategy for Smart Cities-
6 09
6.1 Thematic Analysis, Infrastructure Data/Digital Services

25
 6.2 Data Management and Analytics
6.3 Resilience Strategy for Smart Cities
6.4 Stakeholder Capacity Building, Self-Assessment at project and city level

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Explain role of project management in developing the Smart Cities.

2. Evaluate the risk and uncertainties throughout all the phases of Smart City projects.
3. Compare application of modern project management tools for flawless implementation of smart
city projects.
4. Evaluate the managerial approach that deals with the problems and opportunities challenges of
modern society of developing and managing a smart city.
5. Apply such concepts and tools for smart infrastructure and cities.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part
3
(b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only four questions need to be solved.

Reference Books:
1. Principles of Sustainable Project Management” by Mohamed Salama, Goodfellow Publishers
2. “Smart Cities Unbundled” by Sameer Sharma , Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
3. “Introduction to Smart Cities” by P.P. Anilkumar, Pearson Publications
4. “Smart Cities & Urban Development in India” by N. Mani, New Century Publications
5. “Smart City” by Arun Firodia,Vishwakarma Publications
6. “The Smart City Transformations: The Revolution of the 21st Century” by Amitabh Satyam & Igor Calzada,
Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
7. “Financing Cities in India: Municipal Reforms, Fiscal Accountability and Urban Infrastructure” by,
Prasanna K. Mohanty, SAGE publications India pvt. Ltd.
8. “Transforming Our Cities: Facing Up To India's Growing Challenge: Postcards of Change”, by Isher Judge
Ahluwalia, Harper Collins publications
9. Smart City Tech Planning Handbook by Wade Sarver
10. https://www.projectsmart.co.uk/project-management-ebooks.php

26
 Smart Cities: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HSCC701 Smart Urban Infrastructures 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - 4 - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - 100

Rationale

The smart city infrastructure is the introductory step for establishing the overall smart city framework and
architecture. The scope of these cities is mainly limited to construct a technology park converting the industrial
real estate to state-of-the-art information technology using the evolution in the telecom and IP networks including
insignificant asset management automation system. Urbanization is not only associated with economic
development but over the time it started aspiring people to better quality of life. Cities are seen as solutions for
boosting economy, generating employment, creating skills, providing better health services and many more
things. However, the state of urban service delivery in India’s cities and towns is far poorer than is desirable for
India’s current income levels. Considering that the Indian economy has been one of the fastest growing economies
in the world for some time, and aspirations and standards are raising, the current state of service delivery is simply
unacceptable. Moreover, a successful city cannot operate efficiently in isolation from its environment. It must
balance social, economic and environmental needs. Smart Cities focus on their most pressing needs and on the
greatest opportunities to improve lives. They tap a range of approaches – digital and information technologies,
urban planning best practices, public private partnerships, and policy change to make a difference.

Objectives
1. To study application of Solar Energy for Smart Cities-Conventional vs. Smart City
2. To prepare the qualified resource persons for the upcoming specialization in solid waste management
practices after the mission period of SBM i.e., after 2020.
3. To learn from the challenges and limitations faced in e-governance projects in Citizen Services delivery,
industries and commerce and intra-government systems for efficiency and transparency.
4. To develop ability to conceptualize, design, implement and manage the new era smart e-governance
projects.
5. An understanding of the urban water supply and sanitation systems and linkages with urban forms.
6. Understanding the fundamentals of large project financing-Financial markets for smart city project finance
such as syndicated bank loans, capital markets, private equity fund, multilateral institutions, joint ventures,
public-private-partnership (PPP)
7. Understanding the projects and their business risks.
8. Understanding the documentation used to structure individual large project financings.

27
 Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Conceptualization of Smart Energy System for Smart city:
Application of Solar Energy for Smart Cities, Conventional vs. Smart City, Green
1.1 approach to meet Energy demand, Energy scenarios of conventional cities,
Energy Efficient Building
Meeting energy demand through direct and indirect solar resources, Efficiency of
1 1.2 indirect solar resources and its utility, Structure of Smart Grid, Indian Perspective, 08
Advantage and limitation
Renewable in Smart grid Structural concept, Specific applications, Perspective in
1.3
Smart Cities
Application of Solar in mobility, Matching demand and supply of energy in typical
1.4
Smart city through Green mobility
Smart Water Management in Smart Cities-
2.1 Introduction to water Bye-Laws
2.2 Details of Water Supply system, various stages in implementing the system
2 2.3 Planning Stage: Conversion of existing maps to GIS 10
2.4 Assessing earlier population forecast, Demand estimation
2.5 Validation of ground elevations
2.6 Design Stage: Hydraulic model of distribution system
Solid Waste Management in Smart Cities
Introduction to an effective urban Solid Waste Management (SWM) with 5Rs,
3.1 MSW Characteristics and Quantities, MSW Rules 2016, Swachh Bharat Mission
and Smart Cities Program
Disposal of Municipal Solid Waste: Landfill, Biochemical Processes and
3.2 Composting, Energy Recovery from Municipal Solid Waste, case study of any
3 Smart Cities in the Country 09
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste Management - Overview, Regulation,
Beneficial Reuse of C&D Waste Materials, E-Waste Management Issues &
3.3
Challenges and Status in India, E-Waste Management Rules 2016 and
Management
Critical examinations of SBM endeavor with special emphasis on clean city
3.4 rankings along with case study on solid waste management
Smart Transportation in Smart Cities-
4.1 Introduction of “Smart Transport”
Application of traffic engineering to smart cities: Level of service, Traffic system
4.2
management, reduction of conflicts, signal design
4 Smart pavement materials: plastic pavement, porous pavement, electric 08
4.3
generating roads (Piezo electric roads) etc.
Introduction to Urban Transportation system planning: Trip Generation,
4.4
distribution
4.5 Modal split and traffic assignment

28
 4.6 Highway economics
Smart sanitation and storm water drainage system for Smart city-
Crisis of Sanitation- India, Key Sanitation policy issues and goals, Benchmarks for
5.1
Smart Sewerage and Sanitation, steps required to achieve these benchmarks
Need of sewer model, Assessment of sewerage system at Planning and Design
5.2
stage for transforming into smart sanitation
5 09
Sludge Management, Wastewater Reuse and Recycling. Need of Storm water
5.3 drainage system, Storm water Planning, Challenges in Sustainable Storm water
Planning

5.4 Trends and issues in storm water system Storm water management to for
sustainable water management in Indian smart cities
Smart Funding for Smart Cities-
Financing Smart Cities Development-Types of sources for sustainable smart city
funding: GOI seed capital grant of Rs 500 crore to each smart city, Leveraging this
6.1 grant for funding from open sources, Business Risk Assessment, Public Private
Partnership PPP concept and Modes of Smart City funding-BOOT, BOT, BOO,
DBFOT etc.
PPP Request for Qualification (RFQ) and Criteria as per Planning Commission
6 6.2 guidelines (Case Study), PPP request for Proposal (RFP) along with Concession 08
agreement terms and conditions as per Planning Commission Guidelines
Debt funding, Consortium of financiers, Guarantees and mortgage, Joint venture,
6.3 Municipal Bonds, Documentation of debt funding, Equity Funding through Initial
Public Offer
Private equity funding and risk factors in IPO, Procedure of IPO funding, Other
6.4 funding sources like Viability gap funding, Special subsidy for the project, Merger
and Acquisition, Long term Lease, Financing etc.

Contribution to Outcome
Conceptualize on completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Smart Energy System required for Smart city.

2. Explain the effective urban Solid Waste Management practices, MSW rules.
3. Evaluate the importance of best sanitation practices, storm water management and its linkage for the smart
city transition.
4. Describe the evolution of e-governance and smart public services to be provided for developing and managing
a smart city.
5. Evaluate application of traffic engineering to smart cities

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)
End Semester Examination 80 Marks

29
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
will be from any module other than module 3).
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Assessment:
 Term Work
Including Laboratory Work and neatly written project report of the work done.
 Laboratory Work : 50 Marks
 End Semester Oral Examination : 50 Marks
Recommended Books:
1. “Water, Wastewater, and Stormwater Infrastructure Management”, by Neil S. Grigg, CRC Press Taylor
and Francis Group
2. “Smart Cities Unbundled” by Sameer Sharma, Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
3. “Introduction to Smart Cities” by P.P. Anilkumar, Pearson Publications
4. “Smart Cities & Urban Development in India” by N. Mani, New Century Publications
5. “Smart City” by Arun Firodia, Vishwakarma Publications
6. “Municipal Stormwater Management” by Debo, Thomas, Reese, Andrew, Lewis Publishers
7. “State of the Capital: Creating a Truly Smart City”, by K.S.Mehra,Rupa Publications India
8. Security in Smart Cities: Models, Applications, and Challenges”, by Aboul Ella Hassanien Mohamed
Elhoseny , Syed Hassan Ahmed, Amit Kumar Singh Published by Springer
9. “Transportation and Power Grid in Smart Cities: Communication Networks and Services” by Melike Erol-
Kantarci , Hussein T. Mouftah, Mubashir Husain Rehmani , Wiley Publications
10. Cities and Mobility & Transportation: Towards the next generation of Urban Mobility by Pascual Berrone,
Joan EnricRicart Costa , Ana Duch T-Figueras, IESE CITIES IN MOTION: International.

30
 Smart Cities: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
Lab 1: HSCSBL701 Smart City-Project Management 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 - - 02 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment Duration Total
End Sem Term
of End Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Work
Exam
- - - - - 50 - 50 100

Rationale Rationale
Smart City projects involve great technical complexity. It requires a widespread diversity of skills to control and
monitor them. For any smart infrastructure project management would be an integral part. Like other complex
infrastructure projects; smart city projects are subjected to risk and uncertainties leading to huge time and
cost overrun. Project managers are faced with many problems that are putting together subjected to
constrained resources, finance, time, and environmental uncertainty. Therefore, project management plays an
important role in the development of the Smart Cities. It provides the technical and managerial competency,
communication and decision making necessary to meet the challenges of complex activities. It has grown in
response to the need for a managerial approach that deals with the problems and opportunities of modern
society. A successful city operates efficiently only when it balances social, economic and environmental needs.
Smart Cities focus on their most demanding needs to improve lives. They tap various approaches like digital
and information technologies, urban planning best practices, public private partnerships, capacity building,
policy change to achieve the success.

Course Objective:

1. To acquire knowledge on various components of Smart Cities.

2. To study ongoing projects and their business risks

3. To understand documentation, financings, capacity building used to structure individual large project

4. To study urban water supply, sanitation, solid waste management, transportation & application of
Solar Energy for Smart Cities

List of Experiments (Conduct three practical out of six practical’s mentioned below)
Lab
Module Detailed Content Session /
Hours.

31
 Preparing a report on Project Management-Phases-Stages of project -Work
1 Break down Structure of Smart city in India (Ongoing Smart City Project-Case 08
study).
08
Preparing a report of Project Cost Analysis-Resource Allocation and Leveling,
2
Line of Balance Technique (Ongoing Smart City Case Study).

Preparing a report on Smart Energy System for Smart city (Ongoing Smart City- 08
3
Case Study).
08
Preparing a report on Smart Water Management in Smart Cities (Ongoing
4
Smart City-Case Study).

Preparing a report on Solid Waste Management in Smart Cities (Ongoing Smart 08

5
City-Case Study).
Preparing a report on Smart Transportation in Smart Cities (Ongoing Smart 08
6 City-Case Study).

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course, learner will be able to:

1. Compare various stages of project of smart city.
2. Evaluate the effective urban Solid Waste Management practices, MSW rules.
3. Compare the importance smart water management, best sanitation practices, storm water
management and its linkage for the smart city transition.
4. Prepare application of traffic engineering to smart cities

Assessment:
 End Semester Oral Examination

Oral exam will be based on experiments performed, site visit and theory syllabus.

Recommended Books:
1. Manual on Water Supply and Treatment, (latest Ed.): Ministry of Urban Development, New Delhi
2. Manual on Wastewater Treatment 3rd Ed. Pub: CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban Development, Govt. of
India, New Delhi,
3. Municipal Solid Waste Management Manual, (Part1,2,3) Ministry of Urban Development, CPHEEO,
2016
4. Refer various websites of municipal corporations of the cities selected under the smart city mission to
study success story,
5. Refer following official government websites
 http://cpheeo.gov.in
 https://moef.gov.in/en/

32
 Smart Cities: Semester VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HSCC801 Smart Management of Smart Urban Infrastructures 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
The introduction of Smart urban technologies into legacy infrastructures has resulted in numerous challenges
and opportunities for contemporary cities and will continue to do so. Over the past few years, advances in the
Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) have significantly challenged the traditionally stable
landscape of urban infrastructure service provision. This has resulted in increasing interest from both
technology vendors and public authorities in the transition of cities towards so-called “Smart Cities”. Although
such “Smart technologies” can provide immense opportunities for citizens and service providers alike, the ICTs
often act as disruptive innovators of urban infrastructure service provision.

Objectives

1. Enable students to develop competence in planning of projects at the city level to ensure sustainability
of environment and humans

2. Enable students to apply smart technologies across the spectrum of infrastructure and governance

3. Enable students to develop overall city strategy to become contemporary and competitive

4. Enable students to understand city centric capital formation and finance, risk and feasibility to ensure
the economic health of the city

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Management of Smart Urban Infrastructures
1 Issues and Challenges in Construction and Maintenance of Infrastructure, 08
1.1 Information Technology and Systems for Successful Infrastructure
Management

33
 Innovative Design and Maintenance of Infrastructure Facilities, Infrastructure
1.2
Modeling and Life Cycle Analysis Techniques
Capacity Building and Improving the Governments Role in Infrastructure
1.3
Implementation
An Integrated Framework for Successful Infrastructure Planning and
1.4
Management, Infrastructure Management Systems and Future Directions
Management of Smart water, Wastewater System-
Overview of Urban Water Supply, Rainwater Harvesting, Dual water supply
2.1
system, water recycling
2.2 Building blocks of 24x7 water supply system,
2.3 Performance indicator and Benchmark for water supply services
2 10
Smart metering, Leakage management & NRW reduction for achieving 24x7
2.4
water supply
Smart monitoring through SCADA system for various components of water
2.5
and sewerage system
2.6 Redressal of complaints on real time basis, Current Practices in Wastewater
Recycling
Management of Smart Urban Energy Systems
3.1 Meaning of ‘Smart Energy Management
3.2 Smart Energy Management – Water, Transport
3 08
3.3 Smart Energy Management-Waste Management and Public Services etc
3.4 Challenges and Implementation Barriers for Smart Energy Management, Way
forward for achieving integrated Smart Energy Management
Management of Smart Solid Waste System-
4.1 The environmental impact of waste management and its relationship on the
sustainable development and smart city development
4.2 Management of Solid Waste using IoT
management issues in source reduction, recycling, material recovery and
4.3
4 transformation of waste through composting 10
Implementation of solid waste management options -collection system,
4.4
energy recovery and landfill disposal.
Biomedical waste management, Economy and financial aspects of solid waste
4.5
management.
Case Studies of Smart cities having successful solid waste Management
4.6
program
Name of Module 5: Management of Smart Urban Transportation Systems
5.1 Introduction of “Smart Transport”, Smart Automobile and Sustainable fuels
5 Smart infrastructure-Intelligent Transport systems (ITS), GIS, RS, GPS, 08
5.2
Navigation and Identification Systems
5.3 Electronic fee payment technology (E-ticketing), Traffic Safety Management

34
 5.4 Human and Environmental Impacts, Safety and Sustainability, Case Study:
BRTS or Smart Parking with economics and costing, Mobility Services, Smart
Mobility
Case Study Towards Smart Cities: Part I & II
Towards Smart Cities: Part I: (0 4 hours)
The transition of legacy cities to Smart Cities is not a spontaneous process. To
get the transition process right, and to the benefit of citizens, cities have to
6.1 adopt effective management and governance approaches to successfully deal
with numerous complexities of this process. This Module will help to
understand the most important factors in the transition phase of legacy cities
to smart cities and their managerial implications
Towards Smart Cities: Part II: (04 hours)
Management of Smart Cities calls for different approaches from conventional
urban management approaches, Role of city government in the network of
6 08
actors who play an important role in management of clean, safe, healthy living
conditions. Modern, efficient infrastructure that enables and promotes high-
quality work opportunities and high-quality living, Efficient and sustainable
6.2 use of resources, The city challenges such as city master plans, long term
urban plans, city mobility plans, city strategic plans for renewable energy,
water sources, waste management, pricing on water, power, tax assessment
and frequent revisions, appropriation of resources, water harvesting and
recycling, public participatory approach, citizen participation, citizen audit,
capacity building in key disciplines, effective urban governance, adoption of
ICT facilities, in due respect to local and regional culture, social aspects, safety
and security based on economical vibrancy-Smart Cities-Internet of Things
(IoT) and Artificial Intelligence (AI).

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Explain how to make the best of these smart technologies in your cities’ legacy infrastructures.
2. Learn about state-of-the-art strategies for effectively managing the transition from legacy infrastructures
to smart urban systems.
3. Evaluate Life Cycle Analysis Techniques and sustainable development of Infrastructure.
4. Describe principles for the management of Smart urban infrastructures as well as the applications of
these principles in the various sectors.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.

35
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part
(b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Integrated Solid Waste management, George Tchobanoglous, Hilary Theisen and Samuel A Vigil Tata
McGraw Hill
2. “Smart Cities Unbundled” by Sameer Sharma, Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
3. “Introduction to Smart Cities” by P.P. Anilkumar, Pearson Publications
4. “Smart Cities & Urban Development in India”by N. Mani, New Century Publications
5. “Smart City” by Arun Firodia, Vishwakarma Publications
6. “The Smart City Transformations: The Revolution of the 21st Century” by Amitabh Satyam & Igor
Calzada, Bloomsbury Publishing India Pvt. Ltd.
7. “Financing Cities in India: Municipal Reforms, Fiscal Accountability and Urban Infrastructure” by,
Prasanna K. Mohanty, SAGE publications India pvt. Ltd.
8. “Transforming Our Cities: Facing Up To India's Growing Challenge: Postcards of Change”, by Isher
Judge Ahluwalia, Harper Collins publications
9. “Urban Systems Design Creating Sustainable Smart Cities in the Internet of Things Era”, by Yoshiki
Yamagata, Perry P. J. Yang, Elsevier publications
10. “Internet of Things in Smart Technologies for Sustainable Urban Development” by G. R. Kanaga
chidambaresan, R. Maheswar V. Manikandan, K. Ramakrishnan by Springer Publications
11. “Smart Cities: Introducing Digital Innovation to Cities” by Oliver Gassmann, Jonas Bohm, Maximilian
Palmie, emerald Publications

36
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Waterways Transportation Engineering

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

37
 University of Mumbai
Waterways Transportation Engineering
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& and Course Internal End
Term Oral/
Sem Title Theory Seminar/Tutorial Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Work Pract
ment Exam
HWTC501:
TE Waterways 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem and Ports
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE
Sem. HWTC601:
VI Design of Ports and 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Harbour structures

Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04

Total Credits = 04

HWTC701:
BE Port and Harbour 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Operations and
VII Services
HWTSBL701: Lab-1
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HWTC801:
Sem. Construction and 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Management of
Port and Harbour
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

38
 Waterways Transportation Engineering : Semester V
Course Code Course Name Credits
HWTC501 Waterways and Ports 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Total
Duration of Term
Sem Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average End Sem Exam Work
Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
Waterways are critically important to the transportation of people and goods throughout the world.
The complex network of connections between coastal ports, inland ports, rail, air, and truck routes
forms a foundation of material economic wealth worldwide. This subject introduces the basic
elements related to waterway engineering.

Objectives

 To understand the historical development of waterways at a national and global level and also the
significance of ports and harbours as a mode of transport.
 To understand the present status and different surveys required for the planning of Ports and
Harbours.
 To understand the policies related to water transportation in India.
 To understand the natural phenomenon affecting waterways and its elements.
 To understand the coastal protection works and coastal Regulations to be adopted
 To study and understand all the important facilities required at the port for the efficient planning of
port.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Contents Hours
General: Comparison of different modes of transportation. Types, Characteristics, advantages
1 and disadvantages of water transportation. History of water transportation at world level and 04
at national level. Case studies of countries with excellent water transportation facilities.
Historical development and Harbour planning: Development and policies related to water
2 transportation in India. Status of river, canal and ocean transportation in India. Classification 12
of harbours, Requirement of Harbour. Harbour components, ship characteristics,
39
 characteristics of good harbour and principles of harbour planning, size of harbour, site
selection criteria and layout of harbours. Surveys to be carried out for harbour planning
Marine surveys, Topographic survey of marine area. Hydro graphic surveys, Tide Surveys.
Port development and planning: Port building facilities. Differences between Port, Docks and
Harbour. Requirement of a good port, Port development in India, Major ports in India.
Maritime policies, Port authorities, bodies and associations. Port modernization and new port
3 development (Sagarmala project). Connectivity enhancement Port-linked 10
industrialization and Coastal community development and development of river information
services. Environment Impact Statement (EIS). Approvals and mitigation .Case studies of
various available Ports in India and abroad.
Natural Phenomena: Wind, waves, tide formation and currents phenomena, their generation
characteristics and effects on marine structures. Wind strength, water waves, origin of water
waves, effect of wind duration, and bottom friction and water depth on water waves. Wave
4 12
form and generation. Velocity, height and length of waves. Diffraction, breaking and reflection
of waves, wave action on vertical walls, piles. Beach protection, literal drift, silting, erosion
and littoral drift.
Coastal Structures: Piers, Break waters, Wharves, Jetties, Quays, Spring Fenders, Dolphins and
5 06
Floating Landing Stage Types, Objective, principal function and suitability.
Harbour Terminal facilities and Navigational Aids:
Port building facilities, Transit sheds, Warehouses, Cargo handling facility, Services for
6 08
shipping terminals, Inland port facilities planning, purpose and general description. Necessity
of navigation aids and their types, Requirement of signals, Fixed and floating navigation aid.

Contribution to Outcomes

After completion of the course work, the students are expected to

1. Develop a strong fundamentals related to waterways transportation Engineering.

2. Understand the present status and different surveys required for the planning of Ports
and Harbours.
3. The students shall be in a commanding position to plan and execute hydrographic surveys
required at various stages of planning, construction and execution of Port and harbours.
Also understand the policies related to water transportation in India.
4. The student will also be able to understand the role and effect of natural phenomenon
such as wind and waves on the waterways.
5. Understand the coastal protection works and coastal Regulations to be adopted.
6. The student is expected to get full knowledge related to all the modern techniques and
various important methods for effective management of port facilities.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks)

40
 Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and
second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in
Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks)

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module
3
3 then part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:-
1. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Dr. S.P Bindra, Dhanpatrai Publications, India
2. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Hasmukh P. Oza, Gautam H. Oza, Charotar Publication, India
3. Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering: R. Srinivasan, Charotar Publication, India
4. Alonzo Def. Quinn, Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structure, McGraw – Hill Book
Company, New York.
5. PeraBrunn, “Port Engineering”, 1 st Edition, Gulf Publishing Company, 2000.
6. Leslie A.Bryan, “Principles of Water Transportation”, University of Chicago Press

41
 Waterways Transportation Engineering : Semester VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HWTC601 Design of Ports and Harbour structures 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - - - 100

Rationale

In the subject of Transportation Engineering, study of Harbour, Dock and Port Engineering is essential. This course
is designed to give the basic understanding of ports and harbour structures. The course will also cover wide areas
such as vessel types, types of harbours, design of entrance channel, turning circle, breakwaters, berthing
structures etc. A key feature of this course is to introduce the international practice and technologies in fields of
coastal, ports and harbour including the codal requirements for designing the various components of port and
harbour structures.

Objectives

1. To make the students understand the basic principles of design of port and harbour structures.
2. To cover the design aspects of areas such as vessel types, types of harbours, design of entrance channel,
turning circle, breakwaters, berthing structures etc.
3. To understand the importance of load consideration and will enable the students to calculate the different
loads in designing the various components.
4. To introduce the international practices and construction technologies in order to design the foundation
and fenders of ports and harbour.
5. To appreciate the design principles and codal requirements for designing a breakwater with the help of
model studies.
6. To enable the students in understanding the concept, types and differences of docks and locks in order to
navigate safely.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Content Hours
1 Introduction: Ports and harbours – an infrastructure layer between two transport
08
media. Introduction to navigation channel, entrance channel and turning circle.

42
 Design issues: Sea port layout with regards to - wave action- siltation - navigability,
berthing facilities.-Vessel type and size
2 Wind rose and wave rose as per IS 4651, Operational and design wave as per return
08
period, seismic, sidescan and bathymetry charts
3 Load consideration and calculations: Environmental Loads: Wind, Currents, Waves.
Mooring Loads: Mooring Lines Arrangement, Mooring Line Materials, Mooring
Forces.
Loads From Cargo Handling and Hauling Equipment and Uniform Distributed Loads. 12
Design Load Assumptions, Uniform Distributed Cargo Loads and Miscellaneous Live
Loads, Rubber Tire and Crawler Track Mounted Equipment, Rail-Mounted Cargo,
Fixed-Base Equipment, Ship Impact.
4 Foundation Design: Vertical Loads on Piles or Piers Due to Changes in Water Level
Ice Load of Thermal Origin, Other Ice-Induced Loads
10
design methodology for pier , girder, slab, foundations and fenders - codes and
standards
5 Design of breakwater and physical model studies on stability. Introduction to effect
06
of breakwater on shoreline, dredging and disposal
6 Docks and Locks: Tidal basin, wet docks-purpose, design consideration, operation of
08
lock gates and passage, repair docks - graving docks, floating docks
Total 52

Contribution to Outcomes

After successful completion of the course the students shall be able to

1. Understand the different terminologies and components of port and harbour and will enable the
students to understand the design issues.
2. Embrace the concept and principle behind load consideration and will eable the students to
determine the different loads as well.
3. Design the foundation of different structures of ports and harbour and explore the codal
requirements while designing.
4. Understand the concept of breakwater and will enable the students to design a breakwater.
5. Discuss the various international practices and modern construction technologies introduced in
ports and harbour in order to design the foundation and fenders.
6. Understand the purpose of docks and locks with the major differences between them.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks)

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second
test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks)

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.

43
 2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
3
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

References:

1. Port Design - Guidelines and recommendations by C. A. Thoresen, Tapir Publications.

2. Design of Marine Facilities for the Berthing, Mooring and Repair of Vessels by J. W. Gaythwaite, Van
Nostrand.
3. Handbook of Offshore Engineering by S.K. Chakrabarti, Elseviers, 2005.
4. Agerschou, H., Lundgren, H., Sorensen, T., Ernst, T., Korsgaard, J., Schmidt, L.R. and Chi, W.K., (1983).
“Planning and Design of Ports and Marine Terminals”, A Wiley-Interscience Publication.
5. Per brun (1983). “Port Engineering” Gulf Publishing Co.
6. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Bindra, S. P.; Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi.
7. Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering: Shrinivas, R.; Charotar Publishing House, Anand
8. Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structures: Quinn, A. D., Tata Mc-Graw Hill India Publishing
House

Additional Reading
IS-4651 Indian standard Code of practice for planning and design of ports and harbour, Bureau of Indian
Standards, New Delhi.

44
 Waterways Transportation Engineering : Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HWTC701 Port and Harbour Operations and Services 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hrs. - - - 100

Rationale

Today 80% of the world's cargo is being transported by waterways. The boom in e-commerce has led to the
thinning of borders between countries and goods being exchanged seamlessly. Thus, ports have become the
bedrock of todays' global economy and India is no exception. Thus it’s imperative for students to understand
how seaport operates and apply the best practices along with the latest industrial developments. This course
is designed in line with the contemporary developments. The syllabus covers global port management
practices at the regulatory, commercial, technological, operational and financial levels. The shipping industry
has myriad complexities and the syllabus provides students wide-ranging and up-to-date understanding
required to thrive in today’s highly competitive and evolving environment.

Objectives
1. To study History of Ports, its evolution, Governance and Ownership structure.
2. To Understand different types of logistic integration, Port operations and services.
3. To study planning of vessel movements and improvement of Port capacity.
4. To study the different types of International agreements which are the tools for growth in Indian ports.
5. To study and analyze traffic forecasting in order to plan the port operations effectively.
6. To study port authorities and regulatory framework

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction

1.1 The History of Ports: Ports history, Planning, and Development.

1 1.2 08
Port Ownership, Structure, and Organization. Port Governance and Structural Type.

1.3 Port Workforce: Productivity, Growth, and Empowerment Strategies. Measuring

Productivity, Throughput, and Growth.
Connecting Hub port Gateways to the Inland Infrastructure
45
 2.1 Logistics Integration of Port Activities: The Five Stages of Integration for the
Maritime Industry.
2 2.2 Strategic Location and Market Accessibility for Existing and Emerging Seaports. 08

2.3 Ports’ Success Factors. Supply Chain Opportunities, Competition, and Conflict
Prevention
Port Operations
Terminal Operators; Property Leasing Opportunities. Port Management Services
3.1 and Operations. The Harbourmaster’s Department and Functions, Terminal
Manager, Vessels’ Planning.
The Four Stages of Port Management and Operations: Leasing Opportunities,
3.2 Marine Terminal Operator (MTO) Agreements and Leasing Opportunities and MTO
case studies
3 14
3.3 Charter Party Types, Charter Party Clauses and Areas of Dispute, The Port and
Charter Party Terms
The Components of Shipbuilding, Intellectual Property Rights, The History of
3.4 Shipbuilding , Reasons for Shipyards Losing Market Share, Contemporary
Shipbuilding Trends, Shipbuilding and Oil Market Analysis, Global Market Analysis.
Liner Services, Tramp Trade, and Offshore Support Agents. Agency Selection and
3.5 Practices, Port Agency Responsibilities. General Agency Duties, for Tramp, Liner, and
Logistics Services.
International Trade and Port capacity
4.1 The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade. The World Trade Organization. Ports’
Growth and the Global Trade Agreements Matrix.
4 06
4.2 Traffic Forecasting, Ports and the Principles of Derived Demand, Shipping, Ports, and
the Ripple Effect. Optimum Size and Economies of Scale
4.3 Port Capacity Utilization, Capacity Management, Capacity Planning and Ports’
Technology and Innovation.
Strategic Planning
5.1 Strategic Planning, Development, and Management: Corporate Objectives and
factors considered in planning, developing and management
5 5.2 Port Pricing Strategies: Tariff Changing and Competitiveness. Port Pricing. Pricing 08
Systems and Price-Setting Considerations.
5.3 KPIs: Measuring Financial and Operational Performance.
5.4 Port Equipment and Berth Facilities: Operations and Maintenance, Port Cargo
Handling Equipment (CHE). Performance Management and the Human Factor
Port Regulations and Future of Ports
ISM: International Safety Management
6.1 ISPS: International Ship and Port Facility Security Code
OHSAS and OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration
VGP: Vessel General Permit by the US Environmental Protection Agency
6 08
ISO 14001: Environmental Management System
6.2 HAZMAT: Hazardous Materials;
HAZWOPER: Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response
BWM: Ballast Water Management
6.3 Incident Investigation and Root Cause Analysis; Inspections, Surveys, and Audits;
Global and National Regulatory Compliance for Ships

46
 6.4 Port Development Strategy: Elements of Long-Term Strategic Planning, Strategic
Port Planning and Tactical Port Planning, Port Planning and the Factors of Production
6.5 Forecasting the Market: Port Management and Forecasting Areas. The Risk Element
in Forecasting, Forecasting Methods and Tools

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Port operations and planning
2. Port capacity Planning and Forecasting
3. Understand the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) for strategic planning and
management in port operations
4. Understand the different types of International agreements which are the
tools for growth in Indian ports
5. Understand the regulatory framework involved in running a port.
6. Understand the traffic forecasting in order to plan the port operations
effectively

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second
test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.

3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:

1 Maria G. Burns , “Port Management and Operations ”1st Edition,2015

2 Muir Wood, A.M., and Fleming. C.A., “Coastal Hydraulics Sea and Inland Port Structures”, 1st
Edition, Hallstead Press, 2002.
3 Ozha&Ozha, “Dock and Harbour Engineering”, 1 st Edition, Charotar Books, Anand., 1990

Reference Books:
1 S. Seetharaman, “Construction Engineering and Management”, 4 thEdition ,Umesh
publications, New Delhi, 1999.
2 Richand L. Silister, “Coastal Engineering Volume I & II, Elsevier Publishers, 2000.
3 PeraBrunn, “Port Engineering”, 1 st Edition, Gulf Publishing Company

47
 Waterways Transportation Engineering : Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
Lab 1: HWTSBL701 Port and Harbour Operations and Services 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 Per Week - - 02 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem
End Sem Term Work Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam
Exam
- - - - - 50 - 50 100

Rationale
This subject is designed to give the basic understanding of ports and harbour structures. The course will also
cover wide areas such as design of entrance channel, turning circle, breakwaters, berthing structures etc.
Thus it’s imperative for students to understand how seaport planned, designed, operates and apply the best
practices along with the latest industrial developments. The course equips students with necessary field
exposure and makes them aware of complex administration and structural reforms and acquaints them with
necessary precautions and precision of this profession.

Course Objectives

 To study and understand all the important facilities required at the port for the efficient
planning.
 To make the students to understand design and analysis of port and harbour structures using
conventional approach as well as software.
 To understand the importance of load consideration and will enable the students to calculate
the different loads in designing the various components.
 To study and analyse traffic forecasting in order to plan the port operations effectively
 To understand organizational behavior and management techniques for management of port.
 To study human resource management skills required at port.

List of Experiments( Any Six)

Exp.No. Detailed Content Lab Session / Hr.
1 The visit of any harbour and port to understand the various structures, its
02
construction and operations-Report
2 Effect of earth quake and Tsunami on port structures - Case studies 02
3 IT System and Port Planning 02

48
 4 Design of Jetties using STAAD Pro and Midas 02
5 Design of Jetties using Sacs 02
6 Design of breakwater using STAAD Pro and Midas 02
7 Design of breakwater using Sacs 02
8 Planning and Designing of Storage, warehouse using STAAD Pro or any other
02
designing software’s.
9 Planning of placing the components of Port and estimating its capacity. 02
10 Current Issues in Port Management: Report on Case Study 02
11 Marine Structure, Navigation Aids 02
12 Docks and Repair Facilities, Port Facilities 02
13 Dredging, Coastal Protection 02

Contribution to Outcomes

 Develop a strong fundamental related to waterways transportation Engineering. Understand

the different terminologies and components of port and harbour and will enable the students
to understand the design issues.
 Understand the concept and principle behind load consideration and will enable the students to
determine the different loads as well.

 Understand the concept of design the foundation and breakwater of different structures of ports and
harbour and explore the codal and software requirements while designing.

 Understand the Port operations, planning and process of Dredging

 Understand skill required for effective organizational behavior, project management and port
management skills.

Term work

Shall consist of Assignment, design report, case study and Site visit report related to this course. Distribution
of marks for Term Work shall be as follows:
Assignment : 15 marks
Case study and design report: 15 marks
Site visit : 15 marks
Attendance: 05 Marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted to: 75%-
80%: 03 Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.
End Semester Oral Examination

The oral examination shall be based upon the entire theory and laboratory syllabus.

Reference Books:

1. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Dr. S.P Bindra, Dhanpatrai Publications, India
2. Docks and Harbour Engineering: Hasmukh P. Oza, Gautam H. Oza, Charotar Publication, India.
49
3. Port Design - Guidelines and recommendations by C. A. Thoresen, Tapir Publications.
4. Design of Marine Facilities for the Berthing, Mooring and Repair of Vessels by J. W. Gaythwaite, Van
Nostrand.
5. Handbook of Offshore Engineering by S.K. Chakrabarti, Elseviers, 2005.
6. Maria G. Burns, “Port Management and Operations ”1st Edition,2015
7. Detnorskeveritas, Rules for the Design, Construction and Inspection of Fixed Offshore Structures
8. R. Srinivasan and S. C. Rangwala, Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering, 1995, Charotar Pub.House,
Anand
9. SCI/SCOPUS Indexed Refereed International Journals (For Case Studies) 2 Relevant Indian Standard
Specifications Codes, BIS Publications, New Delhi. 3 Departmental Laboratory Manual
10. Standard Geotechnical Engineering Handbook
11. NPTEL Video lectures on Practical.

50
 Waterways Transportation Engineering : Semester VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HWTC801 Construction and Management of Port and Harbour 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
This is a course which deals with various construction equipment and processes of various structures involved
in the port and shipping business as well as teaching capable administration strategies for the same. The course
equips students with necessary field exposure and makes them aware of complex administration and structural
reforms and acquaints them with necessary precautions and precision of this profession.

Objectives

1. To study the various construction equipment and process of Port and harbor
structures.
2. To study the construction and maintenances of Fishing Harbor.
3. To understand the process of Dredging
4. To understand organizational behavior and management techniques for management
of port.
5. To study human resource management skills required at port.
6. To understand health, safety, security and environment concerns related to port
activities.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Marine and offshore construction equipment: Basic motions of Barges, crane
barges, Offshore derrick barges, semisubmersible barges, Jack-up construction
1 10
barges, launch barges, pipe laying barges, floating concrete plant. Pile driving
equipment.
2. Fishing Harbour Construction 12

51
 Fishing Harbour and Fish landing centres – Types, Various components of fishing
Harbour and landing centre. Land side and water side facilities and structures of
fishing Harbour. Small and medium fishing Harbour, Deep sea fishing Harbour,
Environmental auditing for fishing Harbour. Dredging and breakwater
construction. Layout and construction of Jetties, quays and slipways. Use of
different construction materials for shore based and seaside structures. Fishing
Harbour maintenance and waste disposal, Water treatment plant in fishing
Harbour. Status of fishing Harbours in India.
Dredging General ,Classification of dredging works, Types of dredgers, Uses of
3 06
dredged material ,Execution of dredging work
Introduction to Port management: Organizational behavior: Definition, diversity
in workplace, Ethics and ethical behavior in organizations.
Project Management: Principles of management, Project definition, Project
manager skills, Stages of project, Scheduling, Contract Strategy, selection and
4 08
appointment of contractors, project implementation and execution, closure of
project.
Port and terminal operations, types of ports and terminals, terminal ownership,
port and cargo movements, competition and other challenges facing the industry
Port Labour, People Management and Port master planning:
Historic and current port labour environment, effective management of staff on
ports, Labour reforms and social issues, employment framework and employee
relations.

5 08
Introduction to post master planning, land parcelisation, development phasing
strategy, developing 30 year masterplan.
Terminal Ownership: Impact of port ownership, Privatization benefits and
concerns, BOT, BOOT and BOO, Concession agreement, Tariff setting, role of port
regulators.
Health, Safety, Security and the Environment (HSSE) in Ports:
Importance of HSSE culture, HSSE concepts, HSS on Ports, safety and security
indicators, regulations related to HSSE.
6 Risk awareness and risk management, system approach to port safety and 08
security.
Environment management: Introduction, Environment impact, Environment
regulations and governance.

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand the various methods and equipment for the construction of Port and harbor
structures
2 Understand the construction and maintenances of Fishing Harbor.
3 Understand the process of Dredging.

52
 4 Understand skill required for effective organizational behavior, project management and port
management skills.
5 Carry out human resource management in accordance to labour laws and to develop master plan
for port.
6 Understand the importance of health, safety, security and environment concerns at port and to
suggest measure.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second
test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
3
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 S. Seetharaman, “Construction Engineering and Management”, 4th Edition , Umesh publications,
New Delhi, 1999.
2 Detnorskeveritas, Rules for the Design, Construction and Inspection of Fixed Offshore
Structures.
3 R. Srinivasan and S. C. Rangwala, Harbour, Dock and Tunnel Engineering, 1995,
Charotar Pub.House, Anand
4 Alonzo Def. Quinn, Design and Construction of Ports and Marine Structure, McGraw – Hill Book
Company, New York
5 Construction project management by KK Chitkara, Tata McGraw Hill (2010)

53
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Professional Practices in Structural Engineering

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

54
 University of Mumbai
Professional Practices in Structural Engineering
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Course Code Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Year
and Course Title Internal End
&Sem Term Oral/
Theory Seminar/Tutorial Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Work Pract
ment Exam
HPSC501:
TE Concrete
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Consultant
V Practices
Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HPSC601:
Sem Formwork 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Design Practices
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HPSC701:
BE Structural
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Consultant
VII practices – I
HPSSBL701:
Structural
04 -- 50 50 100 02
Consultant
Practices (SBL)
Total 04 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 04+02=06

BE HPSC801:
Sem Structural
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Consultant
practices – II
04 -- 100 -- -- 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

55
 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering: Semester V

Course Code Course Name Credits

HPSC501 Concrete Consultant Practices 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
Basic concept of concrete technology is essential for civil engineering students to execute the civil engineering
projects as per the standard laid down time to time. The concrete technology is the backbone of infrastructure
of civil engineering field. The students must know various concreting operations and testing operations during
and after construction. It is expected to know the properties of materials, especially concrete and to maintain
quality in construction projects. The civil engineering students ought to know the selection of materials, its
mix proportioning, mixing, placing, compacting, curing and finishing.

Objectives
1 To study the properties of fresh and hardened concrete.
2 To study the properties such as workability and durability.
To acquaint the practical knowledge by experimental processes of various materials required for
3
concrete.
4 To understand the Mix design by different methods.
5 To understand ordering and handling of RMC.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction to concrete making materials
Cement
1.1
1 Physical properties of cement as per IS Codes, types of cements and their uses. 09
Aggregates
1.2 Properties of coarse and fine aggregates and their influence on properties of
concrete, properties of crushed aggregates.
2 Special cementitious materials 07
56
 2.1 GGBS: properties, advantages and disadvantages, uses
2.2 Silica fume: properties, advantages and disadvantages, uses
Admixture
Plasticizers, Super-plasticizers, Retarders, Accelerators, Mineral admixtures
2.3 and
other admixtures, test on admixtures, chemistry and compatibility with
concrete.
Concrete and its properties
3.1 Grades of concrete, Manufacturing of concrete, importance of w/c ratio.
Properties of fresh concrete- workability and factors affecting it, consistency,
3.2
3 cohesiveness, bleeding, segregation. 13
Properties of hardened concrete- Compressive, Tensile and Flexural strength,
3.3
Modulus of Elasticity, Shrinkage and Creep.
Durability- Factors affecting durability, Relation between durability and
3.4
permeability
Concrete Mix Design
4.1 Design of concrete mixes by IS code method
4.2 Design of concrete mixes by ACI method
4 10
4.3 Design of concrete mixes by Road Note 4 method
Design of high strength concrete mixes, design of light weight aggregate
4.4 concrete mixes, design of fly-ash cement concrete mixes, design of high-
density concrete mixes.
Testing of Concrete
Non-Destructive testing of concrete
5 5.1 Rebound Hammer test, ultrasonic pulse velocity test, load test, carbonation 07
test, 1⁄2 cell potentiometer test, core test and relevant provisions of I.S. codes.
Durability
5.2
Permeability test, Rapid chloride penetration test.
Ready mix concrete
Advantages of RMC, components of RMC plant, distribution and transport,
6.1
6 handling and placing, mix design of RMC. 06
6.2 Distribution and transport, handling and placing, mix design of RMC.
6.3 Handling Quality Complaints

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Identify the properties of ingredients of concrete.
2 Know the properties of wet concrete, hardened concrete.
3 Understand the Mix design by different methods for different grades of concrete.
4 Perform various test on concrete.
5 Understand the concept of durability and cracking in concrete.

57
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
3
will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Concrete Technology: A. R. Shanthakumar, Oxford University Press.
2 Concrete mix proportioning-guidelines (IS 10262:2009).
3 Method making, curing and determining compressive strength of accelerated-cured concrete test
specimens as per IS: 9013-2004.
4 Tentative Guidelines for cement concrete mix design for pavements (IRC: 44-1976): Indian Road Congress,
New Delhi.
5 Properties of concrete: Neville, Isaac Pitman, London.

Reference Books:
1 Concrete Technology Theory and Practice: Shetty M.S., S. Chand.
2 Relevant I.S. codes: Bureau of Indian standard.
3 Concrete Technology: D.F. Orchardi, Wiley, 1962.
4 Chemistry of Cement and Concrete: F.M. Lue, Edward Arnold, 3rd Edition, 1970.
5 Concrete Technology: Neville A.M. & Brooks. J. J., ELBS-Longman.
6 Concrete Technology: Gambhir M.L., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

58
 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering: Semester VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HPSC601 Formwork Design Practices 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Practi. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
Course focuses on importance of Formwork design in RCC construction apart from concreting and bar bending
work. It deals with the changing scenario towards formwork designing as a career option in Construction
Industry. The course helps the students to know the market outlook as well as the requirements of formwork
design by knowing all the technical as well as field considerations while designing formwork for various
components of building. It gives the exposer to students regarding cost benefits and time saving along with
advanced technologies and new formwork material in construction industry.

Objectives
1 To know the different types of formwork and importance of formwork in RCC Construction
2 To study the market outlook and requirements of system formwork in construction industry.
3 To design a formwork for walls, columns, beams and slabs considering all the live loads, concrete
pressures, wind loads, concreting methods and do the necessary checks.
4 To understand the formwork selection criteria for various tunnel construction methods, bridge
construction methods and high-rise construction.
5 To plan and estimate the material and man power required for Formwork.
6 To know the various advancements in formwork design in construction market.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction to Formwork
1 Various Activities and Equipment involved in concrete construction- 08
1.1 Concrete, Reinforcement, Batching Plant, Boom Placer, Concrete Pumps,
Buckets, Crane, Formwork (Shuttering/Centering), Scaffolding, etc.

59
 Introduction of Formwork, Types of Formwork, Importance of Formwork in
1.2
RCC Structure
Conventional Formwork and Scaffolding- Advantages and Disadvantages in
1.3
view of ongoing approach and site requirements
System Formwork and Scaffolding, Time-Cost Distribution in RCC
1.4
Construction with respect to Formwork, Reinforcement and Concreting.
System Formwork
Importance of System Formwork- Construction Market Outlook, Market
2.1 Growth Drivers (Increasing Urbanization, Housing Shortage, Economic
Development),
Factors driving demand for System Formwork and Scaffolding, Key
2.2 Challenges at construction sites, Requirements and Solutions against
2 09
Challenges- Design and Planning, Equipment usage time, etc.
Design and Planning- Project Planning Sequence- Current and Correct
2.3
Practice, Any TWO Case Studies.
2.4 Equipment usage time- Crane Availability, Boom Placer, labour, etc.
Parameters considered in High Rise Buildings- Comparison between System
2.5
Formwork and Conventional Formwork
Formwork Design- Walls, Columns & Slabs
Introduction to Formwork Design- Factors related to Concreting, Concrete
3.1 Placing method influence pressure of Concrete - Crane Bucket Concreting,
Boom Placer Concreting
Loads on formwork and lateral pressure of concrete, Calculation of design
3.2 pressure based on type of concrete, method of concreting, grade of
concrete, type of structure and rate of concreting
3 3.3 Concrete Pressure Calculation- Column and Wall Formwork 14
Design of formwork for slab (less than 4 m height)- Design Loads for slabs
3.4
and beams formwork
Design of formwork Material for walls & Columns (Vertical application) -
3.5 Sheathing Member (Plywood), Secondary Member, Primary Member, Tie
System; Check against various forces and bending.
Design of Slab Formwork Material- Primary, Secondary and Prop Members;
3.6
Checks against failures.
Planning & Estimation of Formwork for Residential & Commercial Buildings,
3.7
Column Formwork Sets, Cycle time- Slabs and Beams
Formwork for High Rise Constructions, Tunnels and Bridges
Design Concept for Climbing system- Define, Types, CB 240 and SCS 250
4.1
system, Anchoring System
Study of IS: 875(Part3): Wind Loads on Buildings and Structures, Wind Force
4.2
for Formwork design- High Rise Construction and Slab height more than 4 m
4 Design of Formwork system for any typical floor plan with self-climbing 12
4.3
system for walls, columns, beams and slabs
4.4 Overview of Tunnel Construction Methods & Formwork selection
4.5 Overview Bridge Construction Methods & Formwork Selection
4.6 Overview of High-Rise Construction & Formwork Selection

60
 Economics and Maintenance of Formwork
5.1 Factors affecting supply and demand of Formwork
5 05
5.2 Manpower Management required for formwork
5.3 Maintenance of Formwork & its Stacking.
Advancement & Scope of Formwork Design
6.1 Advance formwork technology Available in the market
6 04
6.2 Advanced Material used as a Formwork
6.3 Formwork field as career option

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Understand the different types of formwork and its importance in various RCC construction activities.
2 Understand various aspects of system formwork over conventional formwork. Also, understand the
market outlook and various parameters need to be considered in design of formwork
3 Design a formwork for walls, columns, beams and slabs considering all the live loads, concrete pressures,
wind loads in a view of different concreting methods and do the necessary checks
4 Understand the formwork selection criteria for various tunnel construction methods, bridge construction
methods and high-rise construction.
5 Plan and estimate the material and man power required for Formwork.
6 Know the advance formwork technologies and advanced material available in the market.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
3
will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1 Formwork for concrete structures: Robert L. Peurifoy and Garold D. Oberlender, The McGraw hill
publishing company.
2 Concrete Formwork Systems: Awad S. Hanna, Marcel Dekker.

61
3 Design and Construction of Formwork for Concrete Structures: Albert Edward Wynn, Cement and
Concrete Assn.
4 Concrete Formwork: Leonard Koel, Amer Technical Pub.

Reference Books:
1 IS: 875(Part3): Wind Loads on Buildings and Structures
2 Formwork for concrete structures: Dr. Kumar Neeraj Jha, The McGraw Hill Education India
3 Modern Practices in Formwork for Civil Engineering Construction Work: Dr. Janardan Jha, Prof. S. K. Sinha.

62
 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HPSC701 Structural Consultant Practice-1 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
Course is equipped with the basic knowledge about structural designs and various other consultants and venders
related with the structural consultant which combines together to carry out the design of any structural project.
This will make students to understand the hierarchy of the work which has to carry out the structural consultant
and structural engineer with other agencies and consultants and also it will highlight the brief information
regarding structural quantity estimation and tenders.

Objectives
1 To understand types of various structures, importance of structural consultant and role of structural
engineer
2 To understand the scope, responsivities and activities of structural engineer
3 To study the schematic designs, documentation and certification in structural design.
4 To understand the roles of client, architect, another consultant with structural consultant.
5 To understand relation of structural consultant with different agencies and vendors.
6 To study structural quantity estimation and tender preparation and also documentation.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction
Types of Structures, functionality, various forms of structures, usage driven
1.1
requirements, notable structures in the world, country, state, city.
1 09
Information on team of consultants required for the comprehensive design of
1.2 structures. Responsibilities of various consultants’ team members – legal,
professional, ethical and moral

63
 Place of a structural engineer in the matrix of the overall project, Set up of a
1.3 structural designer’s office, Various personnel working in a structural designer’s
office
Role of Structural Consultant
Scope of a structural consultant, Tasks and deliverables for a structural
2.1
2 consultant 07
2.2 Activities that a structural engineer has to carry out
2.3 Legal responsibilities of a structural engineer

Introduction to: Concept, Schematic, Tender, Design Development, Detail Design

3.1
of various structural designs
3 Construction Stage Documentation, Construction Administration, Completion 09
3.2
Stage Documentation, Certification
Bye laws pertaining to structural engineers in MCGM rule book, HRC, liaison,
3.3
NBC, DCR etc.
3.4 Licensing requirements for a structural engineer
Teaming up with other consultants, contractors and vendors – Nature of
communication transactions – Part 1
Client – Brief and scope defined by Client’s representative
4.1 Architects – Design and Liaison,
4 Surveyor, Geotechnical Engineer, Wind Engineer 11
Façade Engineer, Interior Architect, Landscape architect, Steel Fabrication
4.2
contractor’s detailers
Water proofing Consultant/vendor, Fire proofing Consultant/Vendor, Concrete
4.3
technologists, concrete manufacturers
Teaming up with other consultants, contractors and vendors – Nature of
communication transactions – Part 2
Agencies: Material Testing Agency, Rebaring Agency, Anchoring Agency, Post
5.1
Tensioning Agency, Ground Anchoring Agency, Piling Agency.
5 Vendors: Steel suppliers/manufacturers, Alternate material suppliers/ 08
5.2 manufacturers/ vendors, Bearings/isolators suppliers/manufacturers / vendors,
Electrical Engineers, Mechanical Engineers
Other vendor and agencies: Plumbing/Drainage Engineers, Traffic Consultants /
5.3 Parking system vendor / parking requirements, Vertical Transportation
Consultants, Pre-Engineered Building Agencies Contractors in general
Structural Quantity Estimation and Tender
Structural Quantity Estimation: Structural Specifications, Structural Bill of
6.1 Quantities, General material consumption ratios, Actual sample workout
problem.
6 Tender Stage: Preparation of Tender Drawings, Bill of Quantities, Specifications, 08
6.2
Special Notes, Consultant’s estimate, Disclaimers
Construction Documentation and Construction Administration
6.3 Delivery of drawings and other documents to site for execution.

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

64
 1 Understand types of various structures, importance of structural consultant and role of structural
engineer.
2 Understand the various scope, responsivities and activities of structural engineer has in structural
consultant.
3 Study and understand the schematic designs, documentation and certification in structural design
4 Understand the roles and nature of client, architect, other consultant with structural consultant
and also safety measures at site.
5 Understand the nature of communication transactions of structural consultant with different
agencies and vendors.
6 Study the structural quantity estimation and tender preparation and also documentation works
required to the structural consultant.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then
3
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Fundamentals of Reinforced Concrete: Sinha& Roy, S. Chand and Co. Ltd.
2. Estimating, Costing, Specifications and Valuation: Chakraborty, M., Kolkata.
3. Relevant Indian Standard Specifications, BIS Publications
4. Professional Construction Management: Barrie D.S. & Paulson B C, McGraw Hill
5. The cost management toolbox; A Managers guide to controlling costs and boosting profits- Oliver, Lianabel
(Tata McGraw Hill).

65
 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HPSSBL701 Structural Consultant Practice-Lab 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
-- -- 04 -- -- 02 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam End Sem Exam Work

-- -- -- -- -- 50 -- 50 100

Course Objectives
1 To understand types of various structures, importance of structural consultant and role of structural
engineer
2 To understand the scope, responsibilities and activities of structural engineer
3 To study the schematic designs, documentation and certification in structural design.
4 To understand the roles of client, architect, another consultant with structural consultant.
5 To understand relation of structural consultant with different agencies and vendors.
6 To study structural quantity estimation and tender preparation and also documentation.

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1. Understand types of various structures, importance of structural consultant and role of
structural engineer.
2. Understand the various scope, responsibilities and activities of structural engineer has in
structural consultant.
3. Study and understand the schematic designs, documentation and certification in structural
design
4. Understand the roles and nature of client, architect, and other consultant with structural
consultant and also safety measures at site.
5. Understand the nature of communication transactions of structural consultant with
different agencies and vendors.
6. Study the structural quantity estimation and tender preparation and also documentation
works required to the structural consultant.

66
 List of Tutorials and Assignments
Lab
Week
Detailed Content Session
(Activity)
/ Hr.
Study of different types of structures based on its utility, roles and responsibilities
1 02/04
of various consultants.

2 Study of Legal responsibilities, scope and activities for structural consultant 02/04

Preparation of tender, documentations and detailed design of various structural

3 02/04
components of any one structure
Design of single bay double storey building structure using softwares like
4 03/06
ETAB/STAAD and SAFE

Application of different IS codes for the selection of parameters (like loading,

5 02/04
design, materials, etc) for different types of structural systems

Structural quantity estimation which includes bill of quantities, general material

6 02/04
consumption ratios, consultant’s estimate

Assessment:
 End Semester Oral Examination
Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus

Reference Books:
1. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures: Dayaratnam, P; Oxford and IBH.
2. Illustrated Reinforced Concrete Design: Dr. V. L. Shah and Dr. S. R. Karve, Structure
Publications, Pune
3. Relevant IS codes, BIS Publication, New Delhi
4. Project Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting, and Implementation: Prasanna Chandra (Tata
McGraw Hill).
5. Construction Engineering and Management: S. Seetharaman, Umesh Publications, Delhi.

67
 Professional Practices in Structural Engineering: Semester VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HPSC801 Structural Consultant Practice-II 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 3 Hrs. -- -- -- 100

Rationale
This course is capable of different parameters with the designs and drawing of various structures and the roles
of different structural consultant. The course will give ideas regarding the software applications in the structural
engineering works which ease the design and drawing stage difficulties. It also provides students the brief
knowledge about different tests required from various agencies, consultants and venders.

Objectives
1
To understand different structures, material required for construction and various interpretations
2 To study the various IS codes, loadings and framing structure systems.
3 To understand and prepare the cost comparison report and hand calculation techniques.
4 To study and run different software used in structural consultant.
5 To understand reinforcement details, drawings and various design audit
6 To conduct different tests and to form stagewise and final certifications for the designs.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction
Concept and Schematic Stages
1.1
Definition of a given structure – identifying the structural system
1 Material of construction – Appropriate selection based on functional 09
1.2 requirement, space constraints, aesthetics, special demands from
client/architect/function
Data and drawing reading and its interpretation as received from all
1.3
collaborating agencies
2 Introduction to IS codes 07

68
 Introduction to IS 456, IS 800, IS 1786,
2.1
Loading parameters – as per architectural drawings and usage requirements
2.2 Introduction to IS 875, IS 875-Part 3, IS 1893
Various types of framing, structural systems – gravity and lateral, codal
2.3
interpretations, parameter selection – comparative studies
Cost Comparison and Report
Comparative costing of components: Flooring, Column grids, Types of columns,
3.1 Lateral Systems, Foundation systems and Soil retention structures – retaining
walls, shoring systems etc
3 12
3.2 Formation of Design Basis Report, Preliminary Analysis Tools – Introduction
3.3 Preparation of Concept and Schematic Drawings. Contents of these drawings.
Hand Calculation techniques, Sofwares available, tips for usage of software
3.4
Introduction to Etabs/ Staad
Softwares to carry out structural designs
Hands on ETABS / STAAD / SAFE modelling for sample simple structures for
4.1 understanding of the working of the software only, its various facilities, capacity
4 and limitations. Meaning of various parameter definitions 10
Design Development / Working Stage, Incorporation of other consultants’
4.2
requirements, Preparation of DD stage drawings
4.3 Running final ETABS model, Running final SAFE mode
Reinforcement details
Reinforcement calculations, Feeding data to structural draughtsman
5.1
Preparation of GFC / working reinforcement drawings – contents
5 Notes on reinforcement drawings, Typical details, Standard formats of 06
5.2
reinforcement drawings
Special requirements of detailing – Introduction to SP34 and IS 13920
5.3
Drawing and design audit
Tests and Certifications
List of submittals expected from contractors/vendors/agencies for structural
6.1
engineer’s approval
Site visit records / reports / approvals / comments / suggestions,
6 Changes in design / drawings / details as per site situations, 08
6.2
Monitoring safety / stability on the site during construction,
Retrofitting / repairs / modifications etc. if necessary
Stage wise Certification, Monitoring quantities as construction progresses as in
6.3
built drawings, Final certification

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:
1 Explain different concepts and schematic stages of structures, material required for construction and
various interpretations.
2 Demonstrate use of the various IS codes, loadings parameters and different framing structure
systems.
69
 3 Prepare the cost comparison report and hand calculation techniques.
4 Prepare and run sample models in different software such as ETABS, STAAD, SAFE used in structural
consultant.
5 Explain reinforcement details from samples, preparation of drawings and various design audit.
6 Conduct different tests according to list wise submittals and to form stage wise and final
certifications for the designs.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part
3
(b) will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures: Dayaratnam, P; Oxford and IBH.
2. Illustrated Reinforced Concrete Design: Dr. V. L. Shah and Dr. S. R. Karve, Structure Publications, Pune
3. Relevant IS codes, BIS Publication, New Delhi
4. Project Preparation, Appraisal, Budgeting, and Implementation: Prasanna Chandra (Tata McGraw Hill).
5. Construction Engineering and Management: S. Seetharaman, Umesh Publications, Delhi.

70
71
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In

Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

72
 University of Mumbai
Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& and Course Internal End
Term Oral/
Sem Title Theory Seminar/Tutorial Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Work Pract
ment Exam
HGSC501:
TE Green 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Technologies
V and Practices
Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HGSC601:
Sem. Green Building
VI and 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Infrastructure
Engineering
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HGSC701:
BE Fundamentals
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. of Sustainable
VII Engineering
HGSSBL601:
Lab-1
Green Building
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
and
Infrastructure
Engineering
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HGSC801:
Sem. Sustainable Built 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Environment
Engineering
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

73
 Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering: Semester V
Course Code Course Name Credits
HGSC501 Green Technologies and Practices 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
Technology is application of knowledge to practical requirements. Green technologies encompass various
aspects of technology which help us reduce the human impact on the environment and create ways of
sustainable development. Social equitability, economic feasibility and sustainability are the key parameters for
green technology. Today, the environment is racing towards the tipping point at which we would have done
permanent irreversible damages to the planet earth. Our current actions are pulling the world towards an
ecological landslide which if happens would make destruction simply inevitable. Green technologies are an
approach towards savings earth and are necessary. Green technologies are our way out of destruction.

Objectives
1. To acquire knowledge on the concept of green technologies
2. To understand the principles of Green Chemistry in the Energy efficient technologies.
3. To analyze the methods of reducing CO2 levels in atmosphere for Cleaner Production Project
Development and Implementation
4. To evaluate the methods of Pollution Prevention and Cleaner Production Awareness Plan.
5. To analyze the application of Energy Efficacy.
6. To apply the knowledge of Green Fuels during implementation.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction to Green Technology
Definition- Importance – Historical evolution – advantages and
1.1
disadvantages of green technologies.
1 1.2 Factors affecting green technologies. 07

1.3 Role of Industry, Government and Institutions-Industrial Ecology.

1.4 Role of industrial ecology in green technology.
2 Green Chemistry 08

74
 2.1 Principles of Green Chemistry, Green chemistry metrics-atom economy.
2.2 E factor, reaction mass efficiency.
2.3 Waste: Sources of waste, different types of waste.
2.4 Chemical, physical and biochemical methods of waste minimization.
2.5 Clean development mechanism: reuse, recovery & recycle.
2.6 Raw material substitution: Wealth from waste, case studies.
Cleaner Production Project Development and Implementation
3.1 Overview of CP Assessment Steps and Skills, Process Flow Diagram.
Material Balance, CP Option Generation: Technical and Environmental
3 3.2 09
Feasibility analysis.
3.3 Economic valuation of alternatives: Total Cost Analysis – CP Financing.
3.4 Preparing a Program Plan: Measuring Progress-ISO 14000.
Pollution Prevention and Cleaner Production Awareness Plan
4.1 Waste audit: Environmental Statement.
4.2 Carbon credit, Carbon trading, Carbon footprint.
4 4.3 Carbon sequestration. 10
4.4 Life Cycle Assessment- Elements of LCA.
4.5 Life Cycle Costing.
4.6 Eco Labeling.
Energy Efficacy
Availability and need of conventional energy resources: major
5.1
environmental problems related to the conventional energy resources.
5 5.2 Future possibilities of energy need and availability. 08
Non-conventional energy sources: Solar Energy-solar energy conversion
5.3
technologies and devices.
5.4 Solar Energy: principles, working and application.
Green Fuels
Definition-benefits and challenges: comparison of green fuels with
6.1 conventional fossil fuels with reference to environmental, economical and
social impacts- public policies and market driven initiatives.
6 Biomass energy: Concept of biomass energy utilization, types of biomass 10
6.2
energy, conversion processes.
Wind Energy, energy conversion technologies, their principles, equipment
6.3
and suitability in Indian context.
6.4 Tidal and geothermal energy.

Contribution to Outcome
On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

75
 1. Enlist different concepts of green technologies in a project.
2. Describe the principles of Green Chemistry in the Energy efficient technologies.
3. Select the best method for the carbon credits of various activities for Cleaner
Production Project Development and Implementation.
4. Evaluate the importance of life cycle assessment for Pollution Prevention and
Cleaner Production Awareness Plan.
5. To apply the problems related to Pollution Prevention and Cleaner Production
Awareness Plan.
6. To choose the green fuels based on their benefits for sustainable development.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based
on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will
be from any module other than module 3).
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Pollution Prevention: Fundamentals and Practice’ by Paul L Bishop (2000), McGraw Hill International.
2. ‘Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook –Towards Cleaner Production’ by World Bank Group
(1998), World Bank and UNEP, Washington D.C.
3. ‘Cleaner Production Audit’ by Prasad Modak, C.Visvanathan and Mandar Parasnis (1995), Environmental
System Reviews, No.38, Asian Institute of Technology, Bangkok
4. ‘Handbook of Organic Waste Conversion’ by Bewik M.W.M.
5. ‘Solar Energy’ by Sukhatme S.P.

Reference Books:
1. ‘Energy, The Solar Hydrogen Alternative’ by Bokris J.O.
2. ‘Non-conventional Energy Sources’ by Rai G.D.
3. ‘Waste Energy Utilization Technology’ by Kiang Y. H.
4. Wind, Tidal, Geothermal, Biomass and Non–conventional energy Green fuel by G.D.Rai.

76
 Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering : Semester VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HGSC601 Green Building and Infrastructure Engineering 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
This course incorporating sustainable design/thinking as a new civil engineering course and experiences from the
pilot offering. Important areas are outlined to aid all engineers in understanding sustainability in context with
traditional engineering principles. Green-building rating systems are used to introduce the concepts of sustainability
in buildings and infrastructure, highlighted by presentations from green-building professionals. By providing a better
understanding of sustainability through education, civil engineers can provide proactive solutions to a growing global
infrastructure.

Objectives

1. To acquire knowledge on various aspects of green building concepts.

2. To acquire knowledge on Indian Green Building Council.

3. To understand to green building design.

4. To apply knowledge on material conservation handling of non-process waste.

5. To analyze green building assessment systems national as well international.

6. To evaluate various terminologies Embodied Energy, Life Cycle Assessment, Environmental Impact
Assessment, Energy Audit and Energy Management.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Green Building Concepts

1 1.1 What is Green Building, Why to go for Green Building, Benefits of Green Buildings- 07
Green Building Materials and Equipment in India, What are key Requisites for
1.2
Constructing a Green Building?

77
 Principles of green building – Selection of site and Orientation of the building –
1.3
usage of low energy materials – effective cooling and heating systems-
1.4 Effective electrical systems – effective water conservation systems-
Green Building Practices in India
Practices Indian Green Building Council, Green Building Moment in India, Benefits
2.1
Experienced in Green Buildings-
Launch of Green Building Rating Systems, Residential Sector, Market
2.2
Transformation-
2 09
2.3 Green Building Opportunities And Benefits: Opportunities of Green Building-
2.4 Green Building Features, Material and Resources, Water Efficiency
2.5 Optimum Energy Efficiency-
2.6 Typical Energy Saving Approach in Buildings-
Introduction to Green Building Design
3.1 Green Building Design Introduction, Reduction in Energy Demand-

3 3.2 Onsite Sources and Sinks, Maximize System Efficiency- 09

Steps to Reduce Energy Demand and Use Onsite Sources and Sinks, Use of
3.3
Renewable Energy Sources.
3.4 Eco-friendly captive power generation for factory, Building requirement-
Material Conservation and Occupational Health
Material Conservation Handling of non -process waste, waste reduction during
4.1
construction-
Materials with recycled content, local materials, material reuse, certified wood,
4.2
Rapidly renewable building materials and furniture-
4 Indoor Environment Quality And Occupational Health: Air conditioning, Indoor air 09
4.3
quality, Sick building syndrome, Tobacco smoke control-
4.4 Minimum fresh air requirements avoid use of asbestos in the building-
4.5 Improved fresh air ventilation, Measure of IAQ-
4.6 Reasons for poor IAQ, Measures to achieve Acceptable IAQ levels-
Green building Rating Systems
Green building assessments system studying e.g. LEED US (Leadership in Energy and
5.1
Environmental Design)-
Living Building Challenge, Green Globes (Green Building Initiative) (US), Green
5 5.2 09
Globes (ECD-Canada; LEED-Canada, Built Green CANADA
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method)
5.3
(UK)-
LEED India (Indian GBC); IGBC Green modules; TERI-GRIHA (Green Rating for
5.4
Integrated Habitat Assessment) (India) Rating modules-
Embodied Energy, Life Cycle Assessment, Environmental Impact Assessment, Energy
6 Audit and Energy Management 09
6.1 Introduction to the Concept: “Life Cycle assessment of materials”-

78
 EIA: Introduction to EIA. Process of EIA and its application through a case study,
6.2 EIA as a strategic tool for sustainable development-Social Impact Assessment of
Infrastructure projects-
Embodied energy of various construction materials-Energy Management with
6.3
respect to buildings-
Clean Development Mechanism, Kyoto Protocol, Energy Conservation Building
6.4
Code-

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Explain the concepts of green building.
2. Learn practices Indian Green Building Council and GRIHA.
3. Use the green building design in the projects.
4. Learn material conservation handling of non -process waste.
5. Learn green building assessment systems national as well international.
6. Study various terminologies Embodied Energy, Life Cycle Assessment,
Environmental Impact Assessment, Energy Audit and Energy Management.
Internal Assessment
20 Marks
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test
based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
3
will be from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.
Recommended Books:
1. Manual of Tropical housing and climate by Koenisberger
2. Climate responsive architecture by Arvind Krishnan
3. Manual of solar passive architecture - by Nayak J.K. R. Hazra J. Prajapati.
4. Energy Efficient Buildings in India by Milli Mujumdar
5. Solar Energy in Architecture and Urban Planning by Herzog Thomas
6. Sustainable Building Design Manual-Volume I and II –TERI Publication
7. Green building codes and standards
8. International Green Construction Code
9. Complete Guide to Green Buildings by Trish riley
10. Standard for the design for High Performance Green Buildings by Kent Peterson, 2009

Reference Books:

79
1. Green Building Hand Book by Tom woolley and Sam kimings, 2009.
2. Green Building Materials by Ross Spiegel and Dru Meadows
3. Publications from - CBRI, SERC, BMTPC
4. Shahane, V. S, “Planning and Designing Building”, Poona, Allies Book Stall, 2004.
5. Michael Bauer, Peter Mösle and Michael Schwarz “Green Building – Guidebook for Sustainable
Architecture” Springer, 2010.
6. Tom Woolley, Sam Kimmins, Paul Harrison and Rob Harrison “Green Building Handbook” Volume I, Spon
Press, 2001.

80
 Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering : Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HGSC701 Fundamentals of Sustainable Engineering 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
This course contains content that address sustainability issues and innovations of relevance to the discipline area.
Sustainability content (principles and theory) is well integrated into the course. The course outline specifically
addresses the sustainability content.
Objectives

1. To acquire knowledge and awareness among students on issues in areas of sustainability.

2. To understand the role of engineering Environmental Pollution and Environmental legislations in India.
3. To understand the International Environmental Management Standards.
4. To apply a clear understanding of the role and impact of various aspects of engineering and engineering
decisions on environmental, societal, and economic problems.
5. To analyze the Sustainable Engineering.
6. To evaluate the Sustainable Assessment Systems.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Introduction to Sustainability
Sustainability-Introduction, Historical Evolution-Goals of Sustainable Development-
1.1
Principles of Sustainability-Sustainability-need and concept, challenges.

1 1.2 Social, Environmental and Economic sustainability concepts 08

Sustainable development, Nexus between Technology and Sustainable development,
1.3
Challenges for Sustainable Development.
Multilateral environmental agreements and Protocols-Clean Development Mechanism
1.4
(CDM)
2 Environmental Pollution and Environmental legislations in India 09

81
 Regional and Local Environmental Issues-Air Pollution, Sources- Effects-Preventative
2.1
Measures of Air Pollution; Water pollution- Land Pollution
Sustainable wastewater treatment, Solid waste - sources, impacts of solid waste, Zero
2.2
waste concepts, 3 R concept-
2.3 Environmental legislations in India-Water Act, Air (Pollution & Prevention) Act
2.4 Environmental Protection Act and Climate Change Act
2.5 Forest Act, Animal Protection Act, Factory Act, Labour Act
2.6 SEZ Notifications, CRZ Notifications etc
International Environmental Management Standards
International Environment Acts and Protocols, Global, Regional and Local environmental
3.1 issues, Natural resources and their pollution, Carbon credits, Carbon Trading, Carbon Foot
Print
3 ISO 14000, ISO 14001, Life Cycle Analysis, Environmental Impact Assessment studies, 09
3.2
Sustainable habitat
Global environmental issues-Resource degradation, Climate change, Global warming,
3.3
Ozone layer depletion
Sustainable materials-Conventional and renewable material sources, sustainable
3.4 development, Sustainable urbanization, Industrial Ecology
Basic concepts of sustainable habitat and Energy sources
4.1 Basic concepts of sustainable habitat, Sustainable materials for building construction
4.2 Material selection for sustainable design
Conventional and non-conventional energy sources-Solar energy, Fuel cells, Wind energy,
4 4.3 Small hydro plants, bio-fuels, Energy derived from oceans, Geothermal energy-Methods for 09
increasing energy efficiency of buildings
Embodied energy of various construction materials-Energy Management with respect to
4.4
buildings
4.5 Clean Development Mechanism
4.6 Kyoto Protocol, and Energy Conservation Building Code
Sustainable Engineering-
5.1 Sustainable Urbanization- Sustainable cities-
Sustainable transport-Industrialization and poverty reduction-Social and technological
5 5.2 08
change-
Industrial Processes: Material selection, Pollution Prevention, Industrial Ecology, Industrial
5.3
symbiosis
5.4 Bio-mimicking
Sustainable Assessment Systems
Studying few Green/Sustainable building assessments systems
6.1
e.g. Living Building Challenge, Green Globes (Green Building Initiative) (US)
6 09
6.2 LEED India and GRIHA Sustainability Assessment Techniques-
Green Globes (ECD–Canada, International Initiative for a Sustainable Built Environment:
6.3
iiSBTool

82
 6.4 SBModel 15
Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. To explain issues in areas of sustainability.
2. To summarize the role of engineering Environmental Pollution and Environmental legislations in India.
3. To interpret the International Environmental Management Standards.
4. To relate a clear understanding of the role and impact of various aspects of engineering and engineering decisions
on environmental, societal, and economic problems.-
5. To connect the Sustainable Engineering
6. To develop the Sustainable Assessment Systems.

Internal Assessment 20 Marks

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on
remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be
3
from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:

1. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies, Prentice Hall.
2. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and development, Cengage
learning
3. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London, 1998
4. Twidell, J. W. and Weir, A. D., Renewable Energy Resources, English Lang.
5. Prohit, S. S., Green Technology - An approach for sustainable environment, Agrobios publication uage Book Society
(ELBS).

Reference Books:
1. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006
2. ECBC Code 2016, Bureau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi Bureau of Energy Efficiency Publications-Rating System,
TERI Publications - GRIHA Rating System
3. Ni bin Chang, Systems Analysis for Sustainable Engineering: Theory and Applications, McGraw-Hill Professional.

83
 Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering : Semester-VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
Lab 1: HGSSBL601 Green Building and Infrastructure Engineering 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 Per Week - - 02 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment Duration of Total
End Sem
End Sem Term Work Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam
Exam
- - - - - 50 - 50 100

Course Objective:

1. To acquire knowledge on various aspects of green building concepts.

2. To acquire knowledge on Indian Green Building Council.

3. To understand green building design.

4. To analyze green building assessment systems national as well international.

5. To apply knowledge on material conservation handling of non-process waste.

6. To evaluate various terminologies of Embodied Energy, Life Cycle Assessment, Environmental Impact Assessment,
Energy Audit and Energy Management

List of Experiments (Conduct six practicals out of nine mentioned below)

Lab Session
Module Detailed Content
/ Hr.
1 To study sustainable planning aspects for urban housing (Literature based). 04
2 To study the benefits given by Municipal Corporations to Green Buildings (Literature based). 04
To prepare detailed plan for a hypothetical site indicating utility of solar path, wind direction,
3 04
rainfall intensity etc., to make it sustainable (Literature based)
4 To prepare a report on energy efficient buildings in India (Case Study based). 04
5 To compare the benefits under different green building rating systems (Literature based) 04
6 To study: Innovative Materials Developed by CBRI, SERC (Literature based). 04
To study, analyze present scenario of organic waste collection and management of any of the
7 04
premise; preferably hotels (Case Study based)
8 To prepare a report on carbon credit, carbon Trading and Carbon footprint (Literature based). 04

84
 To study: Environmental Audit of any existing building and prepare a report (Case Study
9 04
based).

Course Outcomes
At the end of the course, learner will be able to:
1. Understand the concepts of green building.
2. Learn practices of Indian Green Building Council and GRIHA
3. Design a sustainable green building
4. Assessed green building systems nationally as well internationally.
5. Learn material conservation handling of non-process waste.
6. Study various terminologies of Embodied Energy, Life Cycle Assessment, Environmental Impact Assessment, Energy
Audit and Energy Management.
Assessment:
Term work:
Shall consist of Assignment, design report, case study and Site visit report related to this course. Distribution of marks for
Term Work shall be as follows:
Assignment: 15 marks
Case study/Literature report: 15 marks
Site visit: 15 marks
Attendance: 05 marks
Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted to: 75%- 80%: 03
Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks; 91% onwards: 05 Marks.
End Semester Oral Examination:
Oral examination shall be based upon the entire theory, site visit and laboratory syllabus.

Recommended Books:
1. ‘Handbook of Organic Waste Conversion’ by Bewik M.W.M.
2. Green Building Hand Book by Tom woolley and Sam kimings, 2009.
3. Energy Efficient Buildings in India by Milli Mujumdar
4. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., ‘Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies’, Prentice Hall.
5. ‘Solar Energy’ by Sukhatme S.P.
6. ‘Waste Energy Utilization Technology’ by Kiang Y. H.
Reference Books:
1. Handbook on Green Practices published by Indian Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air-conditioning Engineers,
2009.
2. Manual of Tropical housing and climate by Koenisberger
3. Climate responsive architecture by Arvind Krishnan
4. Manual of solar passive architecture - by Nayak J.K. R. Hazra J. Prajapati.
5. Green Building Materials by Ross Spiegel and Dru Meadows Publications from - CBRI, SERC, BMTPC
6. Solar Energy in Architecture and Urban Planning by Herzog Thomas
7. Sustainable Building Design Manual-Volume I and II –TERI Publication
8. Green building codes and standards
9. International Green Construction Code
10. Complete Guide to Green Buildings by Trish riley
11. Standard for the design for High Performance Green Buildings by Kent Peterson, 2009
85
12. Shahane, V. S, “Planning and Designing Building”, Poona, Allies Book Stall, 2004.
13. Michael Bauer, Peter Mösle and Michael Schwarz “Green Building – Guidebook for Sustainable Architecture”
Springer, 2010.
14. Tom Woolley, Sam Kimmins, P. Harrison and R. Harrison “Green Building Handbook” Volume-I, Spon Press, 2001.

86
 Green Technology and Sustainable Engineering : Semester VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HGSC801 Sustainable Built Environment Engineering 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Term Total
Pract. Oral
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Sem Exam Work

20 20 20 80 03 Hours - - - 100

Rationale
Education for sustainability is an important part of the journey to live and work in a sustainable manner. Curricula
changes to incorporate sustainability education in the built environment disciplines is not a new phenomenon. Often,
curricula changes are made from the perspective of the discipline and the individual learning the course.

Objectives
1. To Understand Sustainable Development
2. To apply knowledge for Understanding Ecosystems
3. To evaluate Environmental Sustainability.
4. To create Socio-economic Sustainability.
5. To create Urban Planning and Environment.
6. To analyze the Built in Environment.
Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Hours
Sustainable Development
Definitions and principles of Sustainable Development - History and emergence of the
1.1
concept of Sustainable Development.
1 1.2 Environment and Development linkages- Globalization and environment. 08

1.3 Millennium Development Goals- Status (global and Indian)-

1.4 Impacts on approach to development policy and practice in India, future directions.
Understanding Ecosystems
Understanding Ecosystems-biodiversity hotspots, Understanding Critical
2 2.1 Perspectives on Environment and Development-Environmental Policy and Law, 09
Landscape Ecology and human development.
Introduction to Policy, Institutions and Governance-Urbanization-Conservation of
2.2
natural resources and livelihood security.

87
 Environment- Evaluation and Impact Assessment Frameworks-Knowledge of
2.3 ecosystem dynamics, ecosystem-livelihood linkages, Environmental vulnerabilities
and adaptations.
Resilience towards climate change and disasters-Environment-development-poverty
2.4
linkages, issues of access and justice.
Understanding of field techniques and skills to assess ecological processes-Skills to
2.5
engage with local communities, undertake impact assessments.
2.6 Experiential learning of conservation and development issues.
Environmental Sustainability
3.1 Land, Water and Food production
3 3.2 Moving towards sustainability: Energy powering 09

3.3 Sustainable Development - Financing the environment

3.4 Sustainable Development- Development of Environmental Protection Mechanism
Socio-economic Sustainability
4.1 Empowerment of Women, Children, Youth, Indigenous People
4.2 Non-Governmental Organizations, Local Authorities, Business and Industry
4 4.3 Sustainability Performance indicators and Assessment mechanism 09
4.4 Hurdles to sustainability- Constraints and barriers for sustainable development
4.5 Operational guidelines-Interconnected prerequisites for sustainable development
4.6 Science and Technology for sustainable development
Urban Planning and Environment
5.1 Environment and Resources
5 5.2 Sustainability Assessment- Future Scenarios 08
5.3 Form of Urban Region- Managing the change
5.4 Integrated Planning-Sustainable Development
The Built in Environment
6.1 Urban Form

6 6.2 Land Use-Compact Development 09

6.3 Principles of street design-complete streets
Transport Integrated Urban land use Planning- Guidelines for Environmentally
6.4
sound Transportation

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Describe the concept and socio-economic policies of Sustainable Development.

2. Identify the strategies for implementing eco development programs.
3. Identify different approaches for resource conservation and management.
88
 4. Suggest action plans for implementation of sustainable development.
5. Explain Urban Planning and Environment.
6. Explain the built in environment.
Internal Assessment 20 Marks
Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests - First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on
remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination 80 Marks

Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1 Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be
3
from any module other than module 3).
4 Only Four questions need to be solved.

Recommended Books:
1. Allen, D. T. and Shonnard, D. R., Sustainability Engineering: Concepts, Design and Case Studies, Prentice Hall.
2. Mackenthun, K.M., Basic Concepts in Environmental Management, Lewis Publication, London, 1998
3. ECBC Code 2016, Bureau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi Bureau of Energy Efficiency Publications-Rating System,
TERI Publications - GRIHA Rating System
4. Ni bin Chang, Systems Analysis for Sustainable Engineering: Theory and Applications, McGraw-Hill Professional.
5. Prohit, S. S., Green Technology - An approach for sustainable environment, Agrobios publication uage Book Society
(ELBS).
6. Ganesha Somayaji and Sakarama Somayaji, "Environmental Concerns and Sustainable development: Some
perspectives from India", Editors:, publisher TERI Press, ISBN 8179932249.
7. Kirkby. J, O'Keefe P. and Timberlake, "Sustainable development" Earth Scan Publication, London, 1996.

Reference Books:
1. Bradley. A.S; Adebayo, A.O., Maria, P. Engineering applications in sustainable design and development, Cengage
learning
2. Environment Impact Assessment Guidelines, Notification of Government of India, 2006
3. Twidell, J. W. and Weir, A. D., Renewable Energy Resources, English Lang
4. Gilg A W and Yarwood R, "Rural Change and Sustainability - Agriculture, the Environment and Communities", CABI
Edited by S J Essex, September2005.
5. James H. Weaver, Michael T. Rock, Kenneth Kustere, "Achieving Broad-Based Sustainable Development:
Governance, Environment, and Growth with Equity", Kumarian Press, West Hartford, CT. Publication Year, 1997.
6. Kerry Turner. R, "Sustainable Environmental Management", Principles and Practice Publisher: Belhaven Press, ISBN:
1852930039.
7. Munier N, "Introduction to Sustainability", Springer2005.

89
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Infrastructure Policies & Regulations

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

90
 University of Mumbai
Honours in Infrastructure Policies & Regulations
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& Course Title Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
Sem Theory Pract. Assess- Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HIPC 501:
TE Environmental
04 -- -- 20 80 - -- 100 04
Sem Policies &
V Regulations
Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HIPC 601:
Sem. Land Policies & 04 -- -- 20 80 - -- 100 04
VI Regulations
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HIPC 701:
BE Infrastructure 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Finance &
VII Business Policies
HIPSBL 701: Lab-1
Infrastructure -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Finance &
Business Policies
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HIPC 801:
Arbitration & 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem.
VIII Conciliation
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V, VI, VII & VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

91
 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations : Semester-V
Course Code Course Name Credits
HIPC 501 Environmental Policies & Regulations 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. - - - 100

Rationale
Environmental law describes a network of regulations and customary laws that address the effects of human activity on the
natural environment. These laws are also referred to as environmental and natural resource laws and centre on the idea of
environmental pollution. Environmental law is necessary to combat issues related to the environment and conservation of
natural resources. Environmental law addresses a wide variety of different areas like reducing air pollution and maintaining
air quality, Water Quality, Waste management, Sustainability of resources. This course covers the laws related to sustainable
development and protections of environment under general laws. It also emphasizes the laws regarding hazardous and solid
waste management, water, air and noise pollution and its prevention. It explores the compliance and enforcement of
international environmental law.
Objectives
1. To understand and explain the significance of sustainable development and laws regarding protection of
environment.

2. To study the laws related to environment (protection) act, 1986.

3. To emphasize the salient features of water act and describe the laws related to water pollution.

4. To study the salient features of air pollution act and understand the laws related to air and noise pollution.

5. To study the laws regarding hazardous and solid waste management.

6. To understand the International Environment Laws and policies.

Detailed Syllabus

Module Course Modules / Contents Hours

Sustainable Development and Protection of environment under General Laws 10
1
Introduction, Sustainable development, Precautionary principle, the polluter pays principle, the
public trust doctrine, eco-development, sustainable development and the Indian judiciary,
Environment protection under the law of Torts, Environment protection under the Indian Penal
Code:1860, Environment protection under the criminal procedure code:1973, Constitutional
provisions and environment protection in India.
2 The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 8

92
 Introduction, Aims and objectives, Scope and commencement of the act, Salient features of the
act, definitions, general powers of the central government, prevention, control and abatement
of environmental pollution, offences and penalties, miscellaneous provisions.
3 Water Pollution 9
Introduction, aims and objectives, Salient features of the water pollution act, constitution of
central and state boards and their powers and functions, appeals and revisions, offences and
penalties, prevention and control of water pollution, miscellaneous provisions.
4 Air pollution and Noise Pollution 10
Introduction, Aims and objectives, Salient features of the air pollution act, constitution of central
and state boards and their powers and functions, appeals and revisions, offences and penalties,
miscellaneous provisions, Noise Pollution regulation and control rule 2000, legislative and non-
legislative measures, control of noise pollution.
5 Hazardous and Solid Waste Management 8
Introduction, ozone depleting substances (Regulation and control rule 2000), Hazardous and
other waste (Management and transboundary movement) Rules 2016, Construction and
demolition waste management Rule 2016, Solid waste management Rule 2016, Wetland
(Conservation and management) Rule 2017.
6 International Environment Law 7

An introduction to international law, Sources and basic principles of international law,

development of international laws, nature and scope, establishment of environment institutions
like UNEP, World charter for nature 1982, Relationship between international laws and domestic
laws: Compliance and enforcement.
Total 52

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Illustrate the significance of sustainable development and protection of environment under general laws.
2. Explain and implement the laws related to environment (protection) act, 1986.
3. Summarize the salient features of water act and identify the laws related to water pollution.
4. Understand the salient features of air pollution act and classify the laws related to air and noise pollution.
5. Analyze and appraise the laws regarding hazardous and solid waste management.
6. Explore and justify the importance of International Environment Laws and policies.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I)
End Semester Examination (80 Marks):
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lectures hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.

93
 2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be
from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Term Work:
The term work shall comprise the neatly written assignments. The assignments shall be given covering the entire syllabus
in such a way that the students would attempt at least four questions on each sub-modules and contents thereof further.
Apart from this, the students shall conduct at least one case study and shall prepare a detailed report on case study
mentioned. This report shall also form a part of the term work.
Distribution of the Term Work Marks:
The marks of term work shall be judiciously awarded for various components depending upon its quality. The final
certification and acceptance of the term-work warrants the satisfactory and the appropriate completion of the
assignments; and the minimum passing marks to be obtained by the students. The following weightage of marks shall
be given for different components of the term work:

 Assignments : 10 Marks
 Case studies : 10 Marks
 Attendance : 05 Marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted to. 75%- 80%; 03
Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks 91% onwards: 05 Marks
Recommended Books:
1. Divan S. and Rosencranz A. (2005) Environmental Law and Policy, 2nd ed., New Delhi.

2. Leelakrishnan P. (2008) Environmental Law in India, 3rd ed., Lexis Nexis, India.

3. Shastri S. C. (2012) Environmental Law, Eastern Book Company, 4th ed., Lucknow.

4. Gurdip Singh (2016)Environmental Law in India, 2nd ed.

5. Dr. Paramjit Jaswal, Dr. Nishtha Jaswal and Vibhuti Jaswal (2021) Environmental Law, Allahabad Law Agency, 5th ed.,
Allahabad.

Reference Books:
1. Alaxander kiss and Diana Shelton (2007) Guide to International Environmental Laws, Martinus Nijhoff Publisher,
USA.

2. Philippe Sands and Jacqueline Peel, Principles of International EnvironmentalLaw (4th ed., 2018).

3. Shibani Ghosh ed., Indian Environmental Law: Key Concepts and Principles(2019).

4. Geetanjoy Sahu, Environmental Jurisprudence and the Supreme Court:Litigation, Interpretation, Implementation
(2014).

5. Stuart Bell & Donald Mc Gillivray, Environmental Law (7th ed., 2008).

_______________________*****______________________

94
 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations : Semester-VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HIPC 601 Land Policies & Regulations 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End Sem Duration of End Sem Total
TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. -- - - 100

Rationale
Land law is important in relation with the Infrastructure Engineering students. This will familiarize the students with
the acts and codes that are applicable as per actual conditions in the field. The course deals with the overall knowledge
of the central and state acts and rules. Land law is the form of law that deals with the rights to use, alienate, or exclude
others from land. In many jurisdictions, these kinds of property are referred to as real estate or real property, as distinct
from personal property. Land use agreements, including renting, are an important intersection of property and
contract law. Civil and Infrastructural Engineers need to have a working knowledge of the land laws that affect their
work and that will enable them to comply with local, state & national regulations; understand the boundaries of their
personal and professional liability; negotiate contracts; protect their intellectual property; develop a relationship with
a law firm that understands the engineering business.
Objectives
1. To understand and explain the registration act and coastal regulations zones.
2. To provide knowledge of the urban land act & the land acquisition act.
3. To understand Maharashtra stamp act & the development control regulations.
4. To understand the MHADA and MahaRERA act.
5. To study Maharashtra Regional Town Planning Act.
6. To study the Maharashtra Land Revenue Code.
Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Module / Contents Periods

A CENTRAL LEGISLATION

1 The Registration Act, 1908 & The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 – Coastal Regulation 08
Zones (CRZ)
The Registration Act, 1908: Introduction, definitions, documents, time limit for registration
1.1
and effects of non-registrations of documents.
The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 – Coastal Regulation Zones (CRZ): Areas covered,
1.2
prohibited and regulated activities and classification of CRZ.
2 The Urban Land (Celling and Regulation) Act, 1976 & The Land Acquisition Act, 1894 09
The Urban Land (Celling and Regulation) Act, 1976: Introduction and repeal, definitions,
2.1
celling limits on vacant lands and power to exempt and retention of excess vacant land

95
 The Land Acquisition Act, 1894: General, introduction and definitions, acquisition of land,
2.2 reference to the court, miscellaneous provisions and case law.
Land Records documents i.e. 7x12 abstract, 8A, Ferfar, property card, Gut book. CTS Plan
B STATE LEGISLATION
3 Maharashtra Stamp Act, 1958 & The Development Control Regulations (DCR), 1991 07
Maharashtra Stamp Act, 1958: Constitutional provisions, objects & summary of the act,
3.1 payment of stamp duty, adjudication of stamp duty, impounding of instruments,
admissibility of instrument and prosecution for stamp law offences.
The Development Control Regulations (DCR), 1991: Floor Space Index (FSI), transfer of
3.2
development rights (TDR), heritage buildings and precincts.
4 The Maharashtra Housing & Area Development Act (MHADA), 1976 & Maharashtra's Real 14
Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 (MahaRERA)
The Maharashtra Housing & Area Development Act (MHADA), 1976: Definitions, powers
4.1 & duties of the Mumbai repairs and reconstruction board, levy and collection of cess,
structural repairs, acquisition of cessed properties for cooperative societies.
Maharashtra's Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 (MahaRERA):
Introduction, regulatory framework, registration of real estate project and registration of
4.2 real estate agents, functions and duties of promoter, rights and duties of allottees, the real
estate regulatory authority, central advisory council, offences, penalties and adjudication,
FAQ’s.
5 Maharashtra Regional Town Planning (MRTP) Act, 1966
5.1 Introductory & definitions, control of development, unauthorized development and 04
acquisition of land.
6 Maharashtra Land Revenue Code, 1966
Introduction, use of land, removal & regularisation of encroachments, grant of sanad,
6.1
record of rights, rights in unoccupied land, appeals, revision and review
10
Special provisions for land revenue in Bombay city: general, assessment and collection of
6.2 land revenue, Bombay city survey & boundary marks, government lands and foreshore,
transfer of lands.
Total 52

Contribution to Outcome

After the completion of the course the student should be able to:
1. Understand the functionality of the registration act and coastal regulations zones as per central regulations of India.

2. Analyse and integrate functionality of the urban land act & the land acquisition act in India.

3. Explain Maharashtra Stamp Act & the development control regulations.

4. Understand the MHADA and MahaRERA act.

5. Understand Maharashtra Regional Town Planning Act.

6. Familiarise with the Maharashtra Land Revenue Code.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

96
 First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40% but
excluding contents covered in Test I)
End Semester Examination (80 Marks):
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be
from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Term Work:
The term work shall comprise the neatly written assignments. The assignments shall be given covering the entire syllabus
in such a way that the students would attempt at least four questions on each sub-modules and contents thereof further.
Apart from this, the students shall conduct at least one case study and shall prepare a detailed report on case study
mentioned. This report shall also form a part of the term work.

Distribution of the Term Work Marks:

The marks of term work shall be judiciously awarded for various components depending upon its quality. The final
certification and acceptance of the term-work warrants the satisfactory and the appropriate completion of the
assignments; and the minimum passing marks to be obtained by the students. The following weightage of marks shall be
given for different components of the term work.
 Assignments : 10 Marks
 Case study : 10 Marks
 Attendance : 05 Marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted to. 75%- 80%; 03
Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks 91% onwards: 05 Marks

Recommended & Reference Books:

1. MahaRERA Act, The Real Estate (Regulation and Development) Act, 2016 and Rule 2017 - Y. M. Agarwala, Adv. A. B.
Shah; Aarti & Company's Publications

2. Land Law – Prof. H.D. Pithawalla; C. Jamndas & Co.

3. Maharashtra Land Laws by D N Mathur, Central Law Publications

4. Land Laws in Maharashtra by Sunil Dighe, Snow White Pub. P Ltd

5. Land Laws by Abhay Shah; Aarti & Company's Publications

6. Land Law (Law and Real Estate Laws) by Krishan Keshav; Singhal’s Publications

7. Land Laws (Including Land Acquisition and Rent Laws) by Kanwal D.P. Singh; Satyam Law International

_______________________*****______________________

97
 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations : Semester-VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HIPC 701 Infrastructure Finance & Business Policies 04

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04
Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral
Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average Sem Exam
Exam
20 20 20 80 3 hrs. -- - - 100

Rationale
Looking at India's exponential growth with the infrastructure space teeming with activity and the government as well as
the private sector heavily investing in the creation of better infrastructure both in terms of its business and with an eye
on its longevity, this course will prove to be a holy grail for students considering the aspects of business law. The course
will provide an overview of the underlying legal framework for doing business in India including Constitutional Acts,
Companies Act and other relevant statutes. The course will familiarize students with the sector specific legislation, the
constitutional, general legal context, regulatory law, where it exists. The course intends to enable each student to have
knowledge of fundamental tools of legal research and application of the same in development of the infrastructure sector.
Objectives
1. To highlight the business environment, forms of business, scale of business and emerging trends in business.
2. To describe about the general legal environment and framework in India.
3. To provide an overview of Indian Constitutional Acts, Companies Act and other relevant statutes.
4. To define & interpret the financing of infrastructure and growth of PPP (Public Private Partnership) in various sectors
of Infrastructural development.
5. To understand preconstruction and post construction processes involved in infrastructural projects/contracts.

6. To examine the details of Project Financing in Infrastructure Contracts.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Hours
1 Business Environment 8
Types of Business Environment, Forms of Business Organization, Concept and Features in
relation to following business models- Sole Proprietorship; Partnership, Company; Statutory
Bodies and Corporations; HUF and Family Business. Scales of Business, Micro, Small and Medium
Enterprises; Large Scale Enterprises and Public Enterprises; MNC’s Emerging Trends in Business,
Concepts, Advantages and Limitations-Franchising, Aggregators, Business Process Outsourcing
(BPO)& Knowledge Process Outsourcing (KPO); E-Commerce, Digital Economy.
2 Legal Environment of Business in India 10
Introduction to Bills, Laws/Acts, Rules, Regulations, and associated legal reasoning and
procedures, Introduction to Constitution and Constitutional Law. Stakeholders including legal
98
 system covering judicial, quasi-judicial authorities & Constitutional Authorities etc. and other
Advisory Boards/entities. Outline the intent of Business Allocation of Rules of Government (e.g.
Departments in States and Ministries at the Centre)
3 Acts, Statutes and Regulation 10
Introduction to various Acts and their key provisions, such as Indian Companies Act- 2013,
Negotiable Instruments Act, Industrial Dispute Act, Minimum Wages Act, Special Relief Act,
Transfer of property act, Right to fair compensation & transparency in Land Acquisition,
Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013, Income Tax Act.
4 Infrastructure Contracts 8
Introduction and Features of Infrastructure contracts, Introduction to PPP in India, PPP Models
in India, Contracts in PPP model
Principles of contract-essential conditions, Void & voidable contract, capacity & consideration,
types & terms of contracts (in accordance with Indian Contract Act 1872); Performance and
discharge of contract; breaches of contracts and remedies; introduction to special contracts
such as contract of indemnity, guarantee, leasing agreement.
5 Infrastructure Project Contracts 8
Parties in Infrastructure Contracts, Bidding Process, Negotiation of Infrastructure Project
Management Contracts, Allotment of Contracts, Drafting EPC & Concession Agreements, Project
Appraisal, Compliances and Due Diligence.
6 Project Financing in Infrastructure Contracts 8
Introduction to project financing, Equity and corporate debt financing, Stages in Project
Financing, Regulatory Framework and Authorities, Borrowing from International financial
institutions, FDI in Infrastructure developments, Documentation in Project Financing,
Restructuring in project finance transactions, Case Studies on Infrastructure Project
Management
Total 52
Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Explain the concepts related to Business environment

2. Elaborate the general legal environment and framework in India

3. Understand the acts, statutes and their regulation involved in infrastructure projects

4. Apply models of infrastructure development on respective projects in PPP

5. Understand preconstruction and post construction processes involved in infrastructural projects/contracts.

6. Define and interpret the financing of Infrastructure Contracts.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination (80 Marks):

99
 Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lectures hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will be
from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.
Term Work:
The term work shall comprise the neatly written assignments. The assignments shall be given covering the entire syllabus
in such a way that the students would attempt at least four questions on each sub-modules and contents thereof further.
Apart from this, the students shall conduct at least one case study and shall prepare a detailed report on case study
mentioned. This report shall also form a part of the term work.

Distribution of the Term Work Marks:

The marks of term work shall be judiciously awarded for various components depending upon its quality. The final
certification and acceptance of the term-work warrants the satisfactory and the appropriate completion of the
assignments and presentations; and the minimum passing marks to be obtained by the students. The following
weightage of marks shall be given for different components of the term work.
 Assignments : 10 Marks
 Presentations : 10 Marks
 Attendance : 05 Marks
Recommended Books:
1. Satyanarayana, G. (2017). Infrastructure Development & the Role of Public-PrivatePartnership. 1st ed. New Delhi,
India: New Century Publications.

2. Piyush Joshi(2003), Law Relating to Infrastructure Projects, New Delhi: Butterworths.

3. N.D. Kapoor &DinkarPagare Business Laws and Management; Sultan Chand & Sons.

4. P. P. S. Gogna A Textbook of Business Law; Sultan Chand & Company, New Delhi.

5. Poonam Gandhi Business Studies; Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Limited, Delhi.

6. Willie Tan, (2007). Principles of Project and Infrastructure Finance, 1 edition. Routledge;

7. Hoffman, Scott L., (2007). The Law and Business of International Project Finance, 3rd Edition,London: Cambridge
University Press.

8. Vinter, Graham (2013) Project Finance, 4th Edition, London: Sweet and Maxwell.

9. Gajendra Haldea, (2011). Infrastructure at Crossroads: The Challenges of Governance, Oxford University Press; 1st
ed edition

10. Dewar, John (2015) International Project Finance: Law and Practice, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press

11. Mulla, D.F., The Indian Contract Act, 13th Ed., LexisNexis/Butterworths

12. Tripathi, S.C., Modern Company Law, 5th Ed., Central Law Publications

100
 13. I.P Massey (2008), Administrative Law, Lucknow: Eastern Book Company.

14. D D Basu (2009), The Constitutional Law of India, New Delhi: Lexis Nexis Butterworths.

Reference Books:
1. Sen & Mitra Commercial Law; The World Press Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.

2. Ian Wirthington & Chris Britton The Business Environment; Pearson Education Ltd., England.

3. Raymond W.Y. Kao Entrepreneurship and Enterprises Development

_______________________*****______________________

101
 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations : Semester-VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HIPSBL 701 Infrastructure Finance & Business Policies (Lab) 02

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 - - 02 - 02

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Test- Sem TW PR OR
Test-II Average Sem Exam
I Exam
- - - - - 50 - 50 100

Objectives

1. To study the business environment and emerging trends in business.

2. To learn the general legal environment followed for infrastructure projects in India.
3. To provide detail overview of land acquisition, rehabilitation and redevelopment of infrastructure.
4. To explain emerging sectoral growth of PPP (Public Private Partnership) in various sectors of infrastructural
development.
5. To develop contracts and agreements with various stakeholders related to infrastructure projects.
6. Examine the intricacies of Project Financing in Infrastructure Contracts.

Lab
Module Detailed Contents (Any Six)
Sessions/Hr
To prepare a case study report of Knowledge Process Outsourcing (KPO) related to
1 4
infrastructure-based company.
To prepare a case study report of Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) related to
2 4
infrastructure-based company.
3 To prepare a case study report based on legal environment of business in India. 4
To prepare a case study report based on land acquisition and rehabilitation (eg. Sardar
4 4
Sarovar).
To prepare a case study report of PPP in one of the sectors of Infrastructural
5 4
development.
Prepare a sample draft of EPC contracts enlisting all the necessary elements for
6 4
infrastructure project.
To prepare a case study report of business model applying key parameters in project
7 4
financing.
To prepare a case study report highlighting the important features of slum
8 4
rehabilitation (eg. SRA project).
To prepare a case study report based on mega redevelopment projects in India (eg.
9 4
BDD chawl).

Lab Outcomes
102
Learner will be able to…
1. Explain the business environment and emerging trends in business.
2. Elaborate the general legal environment followed for infrastructure projects in India.
3. Apply intricacies of land acquisition, rehabilitation and redevelopment of infrastructure.
4. Apply emerging techniques related to PPP (Public Private Partnership) in various sectors of infrastructural
development.
5. Build contracts and agreements with various stakeholders related to Infrastructure projects.
6. Define the intricacies of project financing in infrastructure contracts.

End Semester Oral Examinations:

Oral exam will be based on laboratory work performed (case study report).
Recommended Books:
1. Satyanarayana, G. (2017). Infrastructure Development & the Role of Public-Private Partnership. 1st ed. New Delhi,
India: New Century Publications.

2. Piyush Joshi(2003), Law Relating to Infrastructure Projects, New Delhi: Butterworths.

3. N. D. Kapoor & Dinkar Pagare Business Laws and Management; Sultan Chand & Sons.

4. P. P. S. Gogna A Textbook of Business Law; Sultan Chand & Company, New Delhi.

5. Poonam Gandhi Business Studies; Dhanpat Rai & Company Private Limited, Delhi.

6. Willie Tan, (2007). Principles of Project and Infrastructure Finance, 1 edition. Routledge;

7. Hoffman, Scott L., (2007). The Law and Business of International Project Finance, 3rd Edition, London: Cambridge
University Press.

8. Vinter, Graham (2013) Project Finance, 4th Edition, London: Sweet and Maxwell.

9. Gajendra Haldea, (2011). Infrastructure at Crossroads: The Challenges of Governance, Oxford University Press; 1st
ed edition

10. Dewar, John (2015) International Project Finance: Law and Practice, 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press

11. Mulla, D. F., The Indian Contract Act, 13th Ed., LexisNexis/Butterworths

12. Tripathi, S.C., Modern Company Law, 5th Ed., Central Law Publications

13. I. P. Massey (2008), Administrative Law, Lucknow: Eastern Book Company.

14. D. D. Basu (2009), The Constitutional Law of India, New Delhi: Lexis Nexis Butterworths

_______________________*****______________________

103
 Infrastructure Policies & Regulations : Semester-VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HIPC801 Arbitration & Conciliation

Contact Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
4 - - 4 - - 4

Theory Term Work/Practical/Oral

Internal Assessment End
Duration of End Total
Test- Sem TW PR OR
Test-II Average Sem Exam
I Exam
20 20 20 80 03 -- - - 100

Rationale
The Arbitration and Conciliation concept has been modelled on lines of the UNCITRAL (United Nations Commission on
International Trade Law) framework of laws with the idea to modernize Indian arbitration law and bring it in line with
the best global practices and also make India a global hub for arbitration. Arbitration and conciliation play significant
role in construction industry due to disputes arising on large scale construction projects. Alternative Dispute Resolution
(ADR) mechanism provides scientifically developed techniques to Indian judiciary. ADR provides various modes of
settlement including arbitration, conciliation, mediation, negotiation, etc. This course deals with introduction to
arbitration and conciliation, there requisites, rules, proceedings, roles of individuals, etc.
Objectives

1. To understand the importance of arbitration in resolving disputes in construction infrastructure industry.

2. To study the constitution of arbitral tribunal in the process of arbitration.

3. To study the procedures and conduct of arbitral proceedings.

4. To understand the making of arbitral award & termination of proceedings.

5. To study the significance and concepts of conciliation.

6. To study of the alternative means of settlement of disputes with negotiations.

Detailed Syllabus
Module Course Modules / Contents Hours
Arbitration
Arbitration and its significance in construction industry, Role of arbitrator, The Construction
Industry Arbitration Commission (CIAC), Arbitration agreement- Form, constitution, Guarantor
to agreement, Interim measures by court, Arbitral award, Arbitral tribunal, International 09
1
commercial arbitration, legal representative, Scope of arbitration, Arbitral disputes, the
arbitration & conciliation act 1996- Consolidating & amendment act, provisions, preamble &
its purpose.
2 Composition of Arbitral Tribunal 09

104
 Arbitrator, No. of arbitrator, Agreement providing two arbitrators, Appointment of arbitrator,
Appointment of international commercial arbitrator, appointment of sole arbitrator, objection
to nationality of arbitrator, Selection of arbitrator, appointment of arbitrator by court,
Removal of arbitrator, Grounds for challenge, challenge procedure, Termination and
substitution of mandate of arbitrator, insolvency notice.

Conduct of Arbitral Proceedings

3 Equal treatment of parties, Determination of rules of procedure- English law, Indian law, Place 06
of arbitration, Commencement of arbitral proceedings, Statement of claim and defense, Expert
appointment by arbitral tribunal,

Making of Arbitral Award & Termination of Proceedings

Rules applicable to substance of disputes, decision making by panel of arbitrators, Settlement,

4 06
Form and contents of arbitral award, Termination of proceedings, Correction and
interpretation of award, Additional award
5 Conciliation
Application and scope, commencement of proceedings, Appointment of conciliation, Role of
conciliator, sole conciliator, Communication between conciliator and parties, Settlement
agreement- Concept, status and effect, Confidentiality, Termination of proceedings, costs,
Deposits, Role of conciliator in other proceedings, Difference between conciliation and 13
mediation.
ICC Rules of Conciliation and arbitration, Rules of arbitration of the Indian council of
arbitration.
6 Alternative Means of Settlement of Disputes (ADR)

Introduction, Methods, merits, demerits, Indian statutes, Difference between mediation and
arbitration, Mediator and its necessity, Rules and Limitation of mediation, mediator’s
settlement. 09
Negotiation- Necessity, state of negotiation, power sources, , styles, kinds of approaches,
qualities of negotiation power, Obstructions to negotiation, Trade unions and negotiation.
Total 52

Contribution to Outcome

On completion of this course, the students will be able to:

1. Appraise the significance and concepts of arbitration in resolving disputes in construction infrastructure industry.
2. Explain the intricacies of constitution of arbitral tribunal in the process of arbitration.
3. Value the importance of the procedures and conduct of arbitral proceedings.
4. Comply the making of arbitral award & termination of proceedings.
5. Compare and study the significance and concepts of conciliation and mediation.
6. Apply the process of alternative means of settlement of disputes with negotiations.

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests
105
First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately 40%
but excluding contents covered in Test I)
End Semester Examination (80 Marks):
Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours
mentioned in the curriculum.
1. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
3. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will
be from any module other than module 3)
4. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Term Work:
The term work shall comprise the neatly written assignments. The assignments shall be given covering the entire
syllabus in such a way that the students would attempt at least four questions on each sub-modules and contents
thereof further. Apart from this, the students shall conduct at least one case study and shall prepare a detailed report
on case study mentioned. This report shall also form a part of the term work.

Distribution of the Term Work Marks:

The marks of term work shall be judiciously awarded for various components depending upon its quality. The final
certification and acceptance of the term-work warrants the satisfactory and the appropriate completion of the
assignments; and the minimum passing marks to be obtained by the students. The following weightage of marks shall
be given for different components of the term work.
Assignments : 10 Marks
Case studies : 10 Marks
Attendance : 05 Marks

Further, while giving weightage of marks on the attendance, following guidelines shall be resorted to. 75%- 80%; 03
Marks; 81%- 90%: 04 Marks 91% onwards: 05 Marks
Recommended Books:
1. Dr. S C Tripathi (2012), The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996, 6th Edn. Central Law Publication.
2. Dr. Rega Surya Rao. (2021), Lextures on Arbitration, Conciliation and ADR Systems, Andhra Law House.
3. Dr. Harman Shergil Sullar (2021), Alternative Dispute Resolution - Including Arbitration Conciliation Act, 1996
Amended Amendment Act, 4th Edn., Shreeram Law House Publication.
4. H C Johari Edition, A Guide to Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 (2022), Kamal Law House.
5. Rahul Ranjan (2020), Alternative Dispute Resolution Arbitration, Conciliation, Negotiation and Mediation, 2022
Edn., Proflic Publication.
6. Madhusudan Saharay, Textbook on Arbitration & Conciliation with Alternative Dispute Resolution, 4th Edn.,
Universal Law Publishing.
7. Dr. Anupam Kurlwal (2017), An Introduction to Alternative Dispute Resolution, 3rd Edn., Central Law Publications.
Reference Books:
1. P. C. Markanda, Naresh Markanda & Rajesh Markanda (2020), Law Relating to Arbitration and Conciliation, 10th
Edn., LexisNexis.
2. Abraham P. Ordover & Andrea Doneff (2002), Alternatives to Litigation: Mediation, Arbitration, and the Art of
Dispute Resolution, 2nd Edn., LexisNexis / National Institute for Trial Advocacy Publication.
3. Elkouri & Elkouri (2003), How Arbitration Works, Bna Books Publications, Edison, New Jersey, USA.

106
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Blockchain

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

107
 University of Mumbai
Blockchain
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Year &
Course Title Internal End
Sem Seminar/ Term Oral/
Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HBCC501:
TE Bit coin and Crypto 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem currency
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HBCC601:
Sem. Blockchain 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Platform
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HBCC701:
BE Block chain 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Development
VII HBCSBL601:
Private Blockchain -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Setup Lab(SBL)
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HBCC801:
Sem. DeFi
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII (Decentralized
Finance)
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

108
 Blockchain: Sem V
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
Code ral
HBCC501 Bit coin and 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Crypto currency

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam
HBCC501 Bit coin and
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Crypto currency

Course Objectives:
Sr. No. Course Objectives
The course aims:
1 To get acquainted with the concept of Block and Blockchain.
2 To learn the concepts of consensus and mining in Blockchain.
3 To get familiar with the bitcoin currency and its history.
4 To understand and apply the concepts of keys, wallets and transactions in the Bitcoin Network.
5 To acquire the knowledge of Bitcoin network, nodes and their roles.
6 To analyze the applications& case studies of Blockchain.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Describe the basic concept of Block chain. L1,L2
2 Associate knowledge of consensus and mining in Block chain. L1,L2
3 Summarize the bit coin crypto currency at an abstract level. L1,L2
4 Apply the concepts of keys, wallets and transactions in the Bit coin network. L3
5 Interpret the knowledge of Bit coin network, nodes and their roles. L1,L2
6 Illustrate the applications of Block chain and analyze case studies. L3

Detailed Syllabus:
Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
No. Mapping
0 Prerequisite Introduction to Cryptography: Hash functions, Public key 2 --
cryptography, Digital Signature (ECDSA).
I Introduction Structure of a Block, Block Header, Block Identifiers: Block Header 6 CO1
to Block Hash and Block Height, The Genesis Block, Linking Blocks in the
chain Block chain, Merkle Trees and Simplified Payment Verification
(SPV).
Self-learning Topics: Block chain Demo.

109
 II Consensus Decentralized Consensus, Byzantine General’s Problem, 12 CO2
and Mining Independent Verification of Transactions, Mining Nodes,
Aggregating Transactions into Blocks, Constructing the Block
header, Mining the Block, Successfully Mining the Block,
Validating a New Block, Assembling and Selecting Chains of Blocks,
Block chain Forks
Self-learning Topics: Study different consensus algorithms
III Introduction What is Bit coin and the history of Bit coin, Getting the first bit 4 CO3
to Bit coin coin, finding the current price of bit coin and sending and receiving
bit coin, Bit coin Transactions.
Self-learning Topics: Study the website coinmarketcap.com/
IV Concepts of Keys and addresses, Wallets and Transactions: Public Key 13 CO4
Bit coin Cryptography and Crypto currency, Private and Public Keys, Bit
coin Addresses, Base58 and Base58Check Encoding,
Nondeterministic (Random) Wallets, Deterministic (Seeded)
Wallets, HD Wallets (BIP-32/BIP-44), Wallet Best Practices, Using
a Bit coin Wallets, Transaction Outputs and Inputs, Transaction
Fees, Transaction Scripts and Script Language, Turing
Incompleteness, Stateless Verification, Script Construction (Lock +
Unlock), Pay-to-Public-Key-Hash (P2PKH), Bitcoin Addresses,
Balances, and Other Abstractions
Self-learning Topics: Visit and use https://bitcoin.org/en/
V Bit coin Peer-to-Peer Network Architecture, Node Types and Roles, 7 CO5
Networks Incentive based Engineering The Extended Bitcoin Network,
Bitcoin Relay Networks, Network Discovery, Full Nodes,
Exchanging “Inventory”, Simplified Payment Verification (SPV)
Nodes, Bloom Filters, SPV Nodes and Privacy, Encrypted and
Authenticated Connections, Transaction Pools
Self-learning Topics: Study technical papers based on bitcoin
security
VI Blockchain Domain-Specific Applications: FinTech, Internet of Things, 8 CO6
Applications Industrial and Manufacturing, Energy, Supply chain & Logistics,
& case Records & Identities, Healthcare
studies Case studies related to cryptocurrencies
Concept of Altcoin
Self-learning Topics: Read Technical papers on blockchain
applications

Text Books:
1. “Mastering Bitcoin, PROGRAMMING THE OPEN BLOCKCHAIN” , 2nd Edition by Andreas M. Antonopoulos, June
2017, O'Reilly Media, Inc. ISBN: 9781491954386.
2. “Blockchain Applications: A Hands-On Approach”, by ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, Paperback – 31 January
2017.
3. “Bitcoin and Cryptocurrency Technologies: A Comprehensive Introduction”, July 19, 2016, by Arvind Narayanan,
Joseph Bonneau, Edward Felten, Andrew Miller, Steven Goldfeder, Princeton University Press.

Reference Books:
1. “Mastering Blockchain”, by Imran Bashir, Third Edition,Packt Publishing

110
 2. “Mastering Ethereum: Building Smart Contracts and Dapps Paperback” byAndreas Antonopoulos, Gavin Wood,
Publisher(s): O'Reilly Media
3. “Blockchain revolution: how the technology behind bitcoin is changing money, business and the world $ don
tapscott and alex tapscot, portfolio penguin, 856157449
Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
1 https://andersbrownworth.com/blockchain/
2 https://andersbrownworth.com/blockchain/public-private-keys/
3 https://www.coursera.org/learn/cryptocurrency
4 https://coinmarketcap.com/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in
Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be compulsory
and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any other
Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

111
 Blockchain: Sem VI
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Oral
HBCC601 Block chain 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Platform

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg
Exam
HBCC601 Block chain
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Platform

Course Objectives:
Sr. No. Course Objectives
The course aims:
1 Understand the blockchain platform and its terminologies.
2 Understand smart contracts, wallets, and consensus protocols.
3 Design and develop decentralized applications using Ethereum, and Hyperledger.
4 Creating blockchain networks using Hyperledger Fabric deployment.
5 Understand the considerations for creating blockchain applications.
6 Analyze various Blockchain Platforms.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Explain the Blockchain platform and its types. L1,L2
2 Create Public Blockchain using Ethereum. L3,L4,L5, L6
3 Develop Smart Contracts using REMIX IDE. L3,L4,L5
4 Apply the concept of private blockchain using Hyperledger. L3
5 Analyze different types of blockchain platforms. L3,L4
6 Deploy Enterprise Applications on Blockchain. L3,L4,L5

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
No. Mapping
0 Prerequisite Introduction to Block chain and Bit coin, 2 --

I Introduction Why Blockchain Platform: Platform types, Public, Private, 6 CO1

to Block technology requirements for implementation.
chain
Introduction to Ethereum, Hyperledger and Smart Contracts. Case
Platforms study of blockchain Application.
Self-learning Topics: Study different applications of block chain.

112
 II Public Block Introduction, Characteristics of Public Blockchain, Advantages. 8 CO2, CO3
chain Examples of Public Blockchain-Bitcoin: Terminologies and
Transaction, Ethereum: Smart contract, Comparison of Bitcoin and
Ethereum, Other public Blockchain platforms.
Self-learning Topics: Study any one case study on public block
chain.
III Ethereum Introduction, Ethereum and Its Components: Mining, Gas, 12 CO2, CO3,
Blockchain Ethereum, Ether, Ethereum Virtual Machine, Transaction, CO6
Accounts.
Architecture of ethereum, Smart Contract: Remix IDE, Developing
smart contract for ethereum blockchain, e-voting applications
using smart contract, Dapp Architecture.
Types of test-networks used in ethereum, Transferring Ethers
Using MetaMask, Mist Wallet, Ethereum Frameworks, Case study
of Ganache for ethereum blockchain. Deploying e-voting
applications on Ganache framework.
Ethereum 2., Concept of Beacon chain, POS (Proof of Stake),
Shading of Chain.

Self-learning Topics: Study case study on any ethereum

blockchain.
IV Private Introduction, Key Characteristics, Need of Private Blockchain. 8 CO4
Blockchain Consensus Algorithm for private Blockchain (Ex. RAFT and PAXOS),
Smart Contract in Private Blockchain, Case Study of E-commerce
Website, Design Limitations.

Self-learning Topics: Case study on private block chain.

V Hyperledger Introduction to Hyperledger, tools and frameworks, Hyperledger 12 CO5, CO6
Blockchain Fabric, Comparison between Hyperledger Fabric & Other
Technologies, Distributed Ledgers.
Hyperledger Fabric Architecture, Components of Hyperledger
Fabric: MSP, Chain Codes etc., Transaction Flow, Advantages of
Hyperledger Fabric Blockchain, working of Hyperledger Fabric,
Creating Hyperlegder network, Case Study of Supply chain
management using Hyperledger

Self-learning Topics: Case study on Hyperledger blockchain.

VI Other Corda, Ripple, Quorum and other emerging blockchain platforms, 4 CO5
Blockchain Case Study on any of the blockchain platforms.
platforms Developing Blockchain application on Cloud(AWS/Azure)
Self-learning Topics: Compare different blockchain platforms.

Text Book:
1) Blockchain Technology, Chandramouli Subramanian, Asha A George, Abhillash K. A and MeenaKarthikeyen,
Universities press.
2) Mastering Ethereum, Building Smart Contract and Dapps, Andreas M. Antonopoulos Dr. Gavin Wood, O'reilly.
Reference Books:
1) Blockchain for Beginners, Yathish R and Tejaswini N, SPD
2) Blockchain Basics, A non Technical Introduction in 25 Steps, Daniel Drescher, Apress.

113
3) Blockchain with Hyperledger Fabric, LucDesrosiers, Nitin Gaur, Salman A. Baset, Venkatraman Ramakrishna, Packt
Publishing

E Books:

1) Blockchain By Example, BellajBadr, Richard Horrocks, Xun (Brian) Wu, November 2018, Implement decentralized
blockchain applications to build scalable Dapps.
2) Blockchain for Business, https://www.ibm.com/downloads/cas/3EGWKGX7.

Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://www.hyperledger.org/use/fabric

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in
Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be compulsory
and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any other
Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

114
 Blockchain: Sem VII
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Code Oral
HBCC701 Blockchain 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Development

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg
Exam
HBCC701 Block chain
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Development

Course Objectives:
Sr. No. Course Objectives
The course aims:
1 To understand Ethereum Ecosystem.
2 To understand aspects of different programming languages.
3 To explain how to use the solidity programming language to develop a smart contract for blockchain.
4 To demonstrate deployment of smart contracts using frameworks.
5 To understand principles of Hyperledger fabric.
6 To understand challenges to apply blockchain in emerging areas.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 To use Ethereum Components. L1,L2
2 To analyse different blockchain programming languages. L3
3 To implement smart contract in Ethereum using solidity. L4,L5
4 To analyse different development frameworks. L4
5 To implement private blockchain network with Hyperledger fabric. L4,L5
6 To illustrate blockchain integration with emerging technologies and security issues. L1,L2

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Blockchain cryptocurrency, Blockchain platform 2 --

I Ethereum Ethereum components: miner and mining node, Ethereum 4 CO1

Ecosystem virtual machine, Ether, Gas, Transactions, accounts, swarm and
whisper, Ethash, end to end transaction in Ethereum,
architecture of Ethereum
Self-learning Topics: Emerging blockchain platforms
II Blockchain Types of Blockchain Programming, Solidity, GoLang, Vyper, Java, 8 CO2
Programming Simplicity, Rholang, Game Theory and Cryptonomics,

115
 Comparative study of different blockchain programming
languages
Decentralized file system-IPFS.
Self-learning Topics: Emerging blockchain programming
languages
III Smart Solidity programming, Smart Contract programming using 10 CO3
Contract solidity, mapper function, ERC20 and ERC721 Tokens,
comparison between ERC20 & ERC721, ICO, STOMetamask
(Ethereum Wallet), setting up development environment, use
cases of smart contract, smart Contracts: Opportunities, Risks
Self-learning Topics: Cryptocurrencies and their security issues,
Consensus mechanisms, Digital Signatures
IV Blockchain Ethereum client, Ethereum Network, Introduction to Go 10 CO4
Deployment Ethereum (Geth), Geth Installation and Geth CLI, Setting up a
Private Ethereum Blockchain. Introduction to Truffle, Smart
Contract deployment on a Private Blockchain. Introduction to
Ganache
Introduction to Dapp,Dapp architecture, Daaps
Scalability,testing
Connecting to the Blockchain and Smart Contract,
Web3js, Deployment

Self-learning Topics: Smart Contract deployment using

Ganache.
V Hyperledger Installing Hyperledger Fabric, Hyperledger Fabric Network , 12 CO5
Application Building Your First Network, Hyperledger Fabric Demo,
Development Hyperledger Fabric Network Configuration, Certificate
Authorities, Chaincode Development and Invocation,
Deployment and testing of chaincode on development network,
Hyperledger Fabric Transactions
Self-learning Topics: Hyperledger sawtooth,Hyperledger caliper
VI Blockchain Integrating Blockchain with cloud, IoT, AI, ERP, End to end 6 CO6
integration blockchain integration, Risks and Limitations of Blockchain:
and Research Privacy & Security. Criminal Use of Payment Blockchains, The
challenges “Dark” Side of Blockchain
Research challenges in blockchain, Self-learning Topics: Use
Cases: Blockchain for Health Insurance, Blockchain in Supply
chain management, Blockchain & PropTech, Blockchain in
Banking

Text Books:
1. Mastering Ethereum, Building Smart Contract and Dapps, Andreas M. Antonopoulos Dr. Gavin Wood, O'reilly.
2. Blockchain Technology, Chandramouli Subramanian, Asha A George, Abhillash K. A and Meena Karthikeyen, Universities
press

References:

116
 1. Blockchin enabled Applications,Vikram Dhillon,,DevidMetcalf,Max Hooper,Apress
2. Building Blockchain Projects,NarayanPrusty,Packt

Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://ethereum.org/en/
2.
3. https://hyperledger-fabric.readthedocs.io/en/release-2.2/whatis.html
4. https://www.blockchain.com/
5. https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/v0.7.4/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in
Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be compulsory
and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any other
Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

117
 Blockchain: Sem VII
Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
(Contact Hours)
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
Code & Oral
HBCSBL601 Private -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 02
Blockchain Setup
Lab(SBL)

Examination Scheme
Course Theory Marks
Course Title Term Practical/
Code Internal assessment End Sem. Total
Work Oral
Test1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
HBCSBL601 Private Blockchain
-- -- -- -- 50 50 100
Setup Lab(SBL)

Lab Objectives:
Sr. No. Lab Objectives
The Lab aims:
1 To build and test Private Ethereum Blockchain.
2 To learn the concept of the genesis block and Account in the Blockchain.
3 To get familiar with the mining blocks to create a ether.
4 To understand and apply the concepts of keys, wallets.
5 To acquire the knowledge of gateway and desktop application.
6 To analyze the applications & case studies of Blockchain.

Lab Outcomes:
Sr. No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of lab, learner/student will be able to:
1 To understand how blockchain systems (mainly Etherum) work . L1,L2
2 To create the genesis block using Puppeth, a CLI tool and account using Smart L6
Contract.
3 To create mining blocks, check the account and PoW. L6
4 To use cryptocurrency exchanges and wallets safely. L1,L2,L3
5 To create Gateway to Blockchain Apps. L6
6 To use Blockchain on Mobile App and on Cloud. L1,L2,L3

Prerequisite: Expertise in Programming, Basic knowledge of Computer Security, Networking.

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements

PC With Following Configuration 1. NodeJs 1. Internet Connection.

1. PC i3/i5/i7 Processor or above. 2. Ethereum
2. 4 GB RAM 3. Geth
3. 500 GB Harddisk 4. Solidity
4. Network interface card
118
 DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Note: All practical are to be conducted on Linux platform its Compulsory for this entire practical

Sr. No Module . Description Hours LO Mapping

1 Build and Test Install Ethereum network to create a private 4 LO1
Ethereum Blockchain

Self- learning topic : Hyperledger

2 Build and Test Installation of geth 5 LO1

3 Create the Create the genesis block using Puppeth, a CLI tool 5 LO2
Genesis block
4 Create Account in Smart contract 6 LO2
the blockchain
5 Mining Blocks to Mine blocks, check account balance, PoWvsPoA 6 LO3
create Ether
6 Gateway to Metamask 5 LO4
Blockchain Apps
7 Web and Solidity programming on remix 6 LO4
Desktop
Application
8 Application Crypto Exchange and Wallet 4 LO5
Development
9 Application Blockchain Mobile App or Web Application using Dapp 6 LO6
Development
10 Application Hosting of a private blockchain on cloud(AWS/Azure) 5 LO6
Development

Text Books:

1. Mastering Ethereum: Building Smart Contracts and Dapps, Andreas Antonopoulos, Gavin Wood, O’Reilly Publication
2. Mastering Blockchain, Second Edition: Distributed ledger technology, decentralization, and smart contracts explained,
2nd Edition, Imran Bashir
3. Solidity Programming Essentials: A beginner's Guide to Build Smart Contracts for Ethereum and Blockchain, RiteshModi,
Packt publication
4. Mastering Blockchain, Imran Bashir, Second Edition, Packt Publication.

References Books:

1. Mastering Bitcoin, PROGRAMMING THE OPEN BLOCKCHAIN, 2nd Edition by Andreas M. Antonopoulos, June 2017,
Publisher(s): O'Reilly Media, Inc. ISBN: 9781491954386.
2. Blockchain Applications: A Hands-On Approach, by ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, Paperback – 31 January 2017.
3. Mastering Blockchain, Imran Bashir, Packt Publication.

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://geth.ethereum.org/downloads/

119
 2. https://medium.com/@agrawalmanas09/how-to-setup-private-ethereum-blockchain-on-windows-10-
machine-ab497e03d6b8
3. https://geth.ethereum.org/docs/dapp/
4. https://www.edureka.co/blog/ethereum-private-network-tutorial
5. https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/develop/index.html
6. https://metamask.io
7. https://medium.com/publicaio/a-complete-guide-to-using-metamask-updated-version-cd0d6f8c338f
8. https://docs.aws.amazon.com/blockchain-templates/latest/developerguide/blockchain-templates-
create-stack.html

Term Work:
The Term work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical based on the above syllabus. The term work Journal must
include at least 2 assignments. The assignments should be based on real world applications which cover concepts from
all above syllabus.

Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments/tutorial/write up) + 5
Marks (Attendance)

Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

120
 Blockchain: Sem VIII
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Code Oral
HBCC801 DeFi 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
(Decentralized
Finance)

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg
Exam
HBCC801 DeFi (Decentralized
Finance) 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:
Sr. No. Course Objectives
The course aims:
1 The basic concepts of Centralized and Decentralized Finance and compare them.
2 The DeFi System and its key categories.
3 The DeFi components, primitives,incentives,metrics and major business models where they are used.
4 The DeFi Architecture and EcoSystem.
5 The DeFi protocols.
6 The real time use cases of DeFi.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels
of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Explain the basic concepts of Centralized and Decentralized Finance and compare L1, L2
them.
2 Describe the the DeFi System and its key categories. L1
3 Discuss the DeFi components, primitives, incentives, metrics and major business L1, L2
models where they are used.
4 Explain the DeFi Architecture and EcoSystem. L1, L2
5 Illustrate the DeFi protocols. L1
6 Discuss the real time use cases of DeFi. L1,L2

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping
0 Prerequisite Blockchain & Cryptocurrency, Blockchain Platform, 02 -
Blockchain Development

I Introduction: Difference between Centralized and Decentralized Finance, 06 CO1

Traditional Financial Institution- Banks: 1. Payment and
121
 Centralized and Clearance systems, 2. Accessibility, 3. Centralization and
decentralized Transparency, Decentralized Finance Vs Traditional Finance
finance
Self-learning Topics:
The Potential Impact of Decentralized Finance
II What is The DeFi Ecosystem, Problems that DeFi Solves How 06 CO2
decentralized Decentralized is DeFi? Defi key Categories:-Stablecoins,
finance (defi)? Stable coin and pegging, Lending and Borrowing, Exchanges,
Derivations, Fund Management, Lottery, Payments,
Insurance
Self-learning Topics:
How Decentralized Finance Could Make Investing More
Accessible.
III DeFi Primitives 3.1 DeFi Components: Blockchain Cryptocurrency The Smart 10 CO3
and Business Contract Platform Oracles Stablecoins Decentralized
Models Applications
3.2 DeFi Primitives: Transactions Fungible Token: Equity
Tokens, Utility Tokens and Governance TokensNFT: NFT
Standard, Multi-token standard Custody Supply Adjustment:
Burn-Reduce Supply, Mint-Increase Supply, Bonding Curve-
Pricing Supply
Incentives: Staking Rewards, Slashing, Direct Rewards and
Keepers, Fees
Swap: Order Book Matching, Automated Market Makers
Collaterlized Loans Flash Loans (Uncollaterlized Loans)
3.3 DeFi Key Metrics: Total Value Locked,Daily Active
Users,Market Cap
3.4 DeFi Major Business Models: Decentralized Currencies,
Decentralized Payment Services, Decentralized fundraising,
Decentralized Contracting
Self-learning Topics: Study any real time Business model.

IV DeFi 4.1DeFi Architecture:Consumer Layer: Blockchains, Cross- 10 CO4

Architecture Blockchain networks, Oracles, Digital Asset Layer:
and EcoSystem Cryptocurrencies, Infrastructure Layer: Wallets and Asset
Management, DEXes and Liquidity, Lending and Borrowing,
Prediction Markets, Synthetic Assets, Insurance

4.2 DeFi EcoSystem and Protocols: On-chain Asset Exchange,

Loanable Fund Markets on-chain assets, Stablecoins,
Portfolio Management, Derivatives, Privacy-preserving
mixers

4.3 DeFi Risk and Challenges:

Technical Risks, Usability Risks,
Centralization Risks, Liquidity Risks, Regulation Risk

122
 Self-learning Topics: Study of the Problems which are
holding DeFi adoption back
V DeFi Deep Dive 5.1.Maker DAO:Maker Protocol: Dai Stablecoins, Maker 10 CO5
Vaults, Maker Protocol Auctions
Maker Actors: Keepers, Price Oracles, Emergency Oracles,
DAO Teams, Dai Savings Rate
Dai Use case Benefits and Examples
5.2.UniSwap:UniSwap Protocol Overview: How UniSwap
Works, EcoSystem Participants, Smart Contracts
UniSwap Core Concepts: Swaps, Pools, Flash Swaps, Oracles
5.3. Compound: Compound Protocol: Supplying Assets,
Borrowing Assets, Interest Rate Model
Compound Implementation and Architecture: cToken
Contracts, Interest Rate Mechanics, Borrowing, Liquidation,
Price Feeds, Comptroller, Governance
5.4. wBTC:Need for wBTC: Tokenization and common Issues
wBTC Implementation and Technology: Users, Custodian
Wallet Setup, Minting, Burning
wBTC Governance, wBTC vs Atomic Swaps, Fees, Legal
Binding, Trust Model and Transparency

Self-learning Topics:
MakerDAO Governance, UniSwap Governance Protocol
Math, Compound Protocol Math
VI Use Cases 6.1Decentralized Exchanges 08 CO6
6.2Decentralized Stablecoins
6.3Decentralized Money Markets
6.4Decentralized Synthetix
6.5Decentralized Insurance
6.6Decentralized Autonomous Organization (DAO),
Self-learning Topics:
Stock Exchange Operations, Derivatives, Tether, Ampleforth,
How to get stablecoins, Synthetix Network, Token, The
Ongoing Impact of The DAO’s Rise and Fall, DAO Projects

Text Books:
1. How to DeFi,Darren Lau, Daryl Lau, Teh Sze Jin,Kristian Kho, Erina Azmi, TM Lee,Bobby Ong-1st Edition, March 2020
2. DeFi and the Future of Finance-Campbell R. Harvey
3. DeFi Adoption 2020 A Definitive Guide to Entering the Industry
Reference Books/White Papers:
1. Blockchain disruption and decentralized finance: The rise of decentralized business models-Yan Chen, Cristiano
Bellavitis
2. SoK: Decentralized Finance (DeFi)-Sam M. Werner, Daniel Perez, Lewis Gudgeon,Ariah Klages-Mundt,Dominik
Harz∗‡, William J. Knottenbelt,Imperial College London, † Cornell University, Interlay
4. Decentralized Finance (DeFi) –A new Fintech Revolution?
5. https://makerdao.com/da/whitepaper/
6. https://uniswap.org/
7. https://compound.finance/documents/Compound.Whitepaper.pdf
8. https://wbtc.network/assets/wrapped-tokens-whitepaper.pdf
123
 9. https://defiprime.com/exchanges
10. https://defirate.com/stablecoins/
11. https://academy.ivanontech.com/blog/decentralized-money-markets-and-makerdao
12. https://www.gemini.com/cryptopedia/nexus-mutual-blockchain-insurance-nxm-crypto
13. https://consensys.net/blockchain-use-cases/decentralized-finance/
14. https://tokenlon.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/360041114431-DeFi-Explained-Synthetic-Assets,
https://www.blockchain-council.org/synthetix/synthetix-snx-the-biggest-ecosystem-in-decentralized-finance/
Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://www.udemy.com/
2. https://www.coursera.org/

Assessment:

Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in
Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be compulsory
and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any other
Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

124
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/ Minor Degree Program

in
Cyber Security

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

125
 University of Mumbai
Cyber Security
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Year & Sem Course Title Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HCSC501:
TE 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Ethical Hacking
Sem
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HCSC601:
Sem. 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Digital Forensic
VI Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HCSC701:
BE Security
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Information
VII Management
HCSSBL601:
Vulnerability
Assessment
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Penetration
Testing (VAPT) Lab
(SBL)
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HCSC801:
Sem. Application 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Security
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

126
 Cyber Security: Sem V
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
ral
HCSC501 Ethical 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Hacking

Examination Scheme
Course Theory Marks
Course Title Term
Code Internal assessment End Sem. Practical Oral Total
Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
HCSC501 Ethical
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Hacking

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To describe Ethical hacking and fundamentals of computer Network.
2 To understand about Network security threats, vulnerabilities assessment and social engineering.
3 To discuss cryptography and its applications.
4 To implement the methodologies and techniques of Sniffing techniques, tools, and ethical issues.
5 To implement the methodologies and techniques of hardware security.
6 To demonstrate systems using various case studies.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Articulate the fundamentals of Computer Networks, IP Routing and core L1,L2
concepts of ethical hacking in real world scenarios.
2 Apply the knowledge of information gathering to perform penetration testing L3
and social engineering attacks.
3 Demonstrate the core concepts of Cryptography, Cryptographic checksums and L1,L2
evaluate the various biometric authentication mechanisms.
4 Apply the knowledge of network reconnaissance to perform Network and web L3
application-based attacks.
5 Apply the concepts of hardware elements and endpoint security to provide L3
security to physical devices.
6 Simulate various attack scenarios and evaluate the results. L4,L5

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping
0 Prerequisite Computer Networks, Databases, system security 2 -

127
 I Introduction Fundamentals of Computer Networks/IP protocol stack, IP 10 CO1
to Ethical addressing and routing, Routing protocol, Protocol
Hacking vulnerabilities, Steps of ethical hacking, Demonstration of
Routing Protocols using Cisco Packet Tracer

Self-learning Topics:TCP/IP model, OSI model

II Introduction Private-key encryption, public key-encryption, key Exchange 08 CO3

to Protocols, Cryptographic Hash Functions & applications,
Cryptography steganography, biometric authentication, lightweight
cryptographic algorithms.Demonstration of various
cryptographic tools and hashing algorithms

Self-learning Topics: Quantum cryptography, Elliptic curve

cryptography

III Introduction Information gathering, reconnaissance, scanning, vulnerability 12 CO2

to network assessment, Open VAS, Nessus, System hacking: Password
security cracking, penetration testing, Social engineering attacks,
Malware threats, hacking wireless networks (WEP, WPA, WPA-
2), Proxy network, VPN security, Study of various tools for
Network Security such as Wireshark, John the Ripper,
Metasploit, etc.

Self-learning Topics: Ransomware(Wannacry), Botnets,

Rootkits, Mobile device security

IV Introduction OWASP, Web Security Considerations, User Authentication, 10 CO4

to web Cookies, SSL, HTTPS, Privacy on Web, Account Harvesting, Web
security and Bugs, Sniffing, ARP poisoning, Denial of service attacks, Hacking
Attacks Web Applications, Clickjacking, Cross-Site scripting and Request
Forgery, Session Hijacking and Management, Phishing and
Pharming Techniques, SSO, Vulnerability assessments, SQL
injection, Web Service Security, OAuth 2.0, Demonstration of
hacking tools on Kali Linux such as SQLMap, HTTrack, hping, burp
suite,Wireshark etc.
Self-learning Topics: Format string attacks

V Elements of Side channel attacks, physical unclonable functions, 6 CO5

Hardware Firewalls,Backdoors and trapdoors, Demonstration of Side
Security Channel Attacks on RSA, IDS and Honeypots.

Self-learning Topics: IoT security

VI Case Studies Various attacks scenarios and their remedies. Demonstration of 4 CO6
attacks using DVWA.

Self-learning Topics: Session hijacking and man-in-middle

attacks

Text Books:

1. Computer Security Principles and Practice --William Stallings, Seventh Edition, Pearson Education, 2017

128
2. Security in Computing -- Charles P. Pfleeger, Fifth Edition, Pearson Education, 2015
3. Network Security and Cryptography -- Bernard Menezes, Cengage Learning, 2014
4. Network Security Bible -- Eric Cole, Second Edition, Wiley, 2011
5. Mark Stamp's Information Security: Principles and Practice --Deven Shah, Wiley, 2009

References:

1.UNIX Network Programming –Richard Steven,Addison Wesley, 2003

2. Cryptography and Network Security -- Atul Kahate, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2013
3.TCP/IP Protocol Suite -- B. A. Forouzan, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2017
4. Applied Cryptography, Protocols Algorithms and Source Code in C -- Bruce Schneier, 2nd
Edition / 20th Anniversary Edition, Wiley, 2015

Online Resources:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://www.owasp.org/index.php/Category:OWASP_Top_Ten_Project
2. https://dvwa.co.uk/
3. http://testphp.vulnweb.com/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

129
 Cyber Security: Sem VI
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
Code ral
HCSC601 Digital Forensic 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Course
Internal assessment End Term
Code Title Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam
HCSC601 Digital
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Forensic

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To understand the various computer and cyber-crimes in the digital world.
2 To understand a significance of digital forensics life cycle, underlying forensics principles and
investigation process.
3 To understand the importance of File system management with respect to computer forensics.
4 To be able to identify the live data in case of any incident handling and application of appropriate tools
and practices for the same.
5 To Develop the skills in application of various tools and investigation report writing with suitable
evidences.
6 To be able to identify the network and mobile related threats and recommendation of suitable
forensics procedures for the same.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Identify and define the class for various computer and cyber-crimes in the L1,L2
digital world.
2 Understand the need of digital forensic and the role of digital evidence. L1,L2
3 Understand and analyze the role of File systems in computer forensics. L1,L2,L3
4 Demonstrate the incident response methodology with the best practices for L3
incidence response with the application of forensics tools.
5 Generate/Write the report on application of appropriate computer forensic L5
tools for investigation of any computer security incident .
6 Identify and investigate threats in network and mobile. L4

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping

130
0 Prerequisite Computer Hardware: Motherboard, CPU, Memory: RAM, 2 --
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), Solid State Drive (SSD), Optical drive
Computer Networks: Introduction CN Terminology: Router,
Gateway, OSI and TCP/IP Layers
Operating Systems: Role of OS in file management, Memory
management utilities, Fundamentals of file systems used in
Windows and Linux.
I Introduction to 1.1 Definition and classification of cybercrimes: Definition, 4 CO1
Cybercrime and Hacking, DoS Attacks, Trojan Attacks, Credit Card Frauds,
Computer- Cyber Terrorism, Cyber Stalking.
crime
1.2 Definition and classification of computer crimes:
Computer Viruses, Computer Worms.
1.3 Prevention of Cybercrime: Steps that can be followed to
prevent cybercrime, Hackers, Crackers, Phreakers.
Self-learning Topics: Steps performed by Hacker
II Introduction to 2.1 Introduction to Digital Forensics: Introduction to Digital 5 CO2
Digital Forensics and lifecycle, Principles of Digital Forensic.
Forensics and
Digital 2.2 Introduction to Digital Evidences: Challenging Aspects of
Evidences Digital Evidence, Scientific Evidence, Presenting Digital
Evidence.
2.3 Digital Investigation Process Models: Physical Model,
Staircase Model, Evidence Flow Model.
Self-learning Topics: Digital Investigation Process Models
comparison and its application, Rules of Digital Evidence.
III Computer 3.1 OS File Systems Review: Windows Systems- FAT32 and 7 CO3
Forensics NTFS, UNIX File Systems, MAC File Systems
3.2 Windows OS Artifacts: Registry, Event Logs
3.3 Memory Forensics : RAM Forensic Analysis, Creating a
RAM Memory Image, Volatility framework, Extracting
Information
3.4 Computer Forensic Tools: Need of Computer Forensic
Tools, Types of Computer Forensic Tools, Tasks performed
by Computer Forensic Tools
Self-learning Topics: Study of ‘The Sleuth Kit’ Autopsy tool
for Digital Forensics

IV Incident 4.1 Incidence Response Methodology: Goals of Incident 10 CO4

Response Response, Finding and Hiring IR Talent
Management,
Live Data 4.2 IR Process: Initial Response, Investigation, Remediation,
Collection and Tracking of Significant Investigative Information.
Forensic 4.3 Live Data Collection: Live Data Collection on Microsoft
Duplication Windows,

131
 4.4 Forensic Duplication: Forensic Duplicates as Admissible
Evidence, Forensic Duplication Tools: Creating a Forensic
evidence, Duplicate/Qualified Forensic Duplicate of a Hard
Drive.
Self-learning Topics: Live Data Collection on Unix-Based
Systems

V Forensic Tools 5.1 Forensic Image Acquisition in Linux : Acquire an Image 10 CO5
and Report with dd Tools, Acquire an Image with Forensic Formats,
Writing Preserve Digital Evidence with Cryptography, Image
Acquisition over a Network, Acquire Removable Media
5.2 Forensic Investigation Report Writing: Reporting
Standards, Report Style and Formatting, Report Content and
Organization.
Self-learning Topics: Case study on Report Writing
VI Network 6.1 Network Forensics: Sources of Network-Based Evidence, 14 CO6
Forensics and Principles of Internetworking, Internet Protocol Suite,
Mobile Evidence Acquisition, Analyzing Network Traffic: Packet Flow
Forensics and Statistical Flow, Network Intrusion Detection and
Analysis, Investigation of Routers, Investigation of Firewalls
6.2 Mobile Forensics: Mobile Phone Challenges, Mobile
phone evidence extraction process, Android OS Architecture,
Android File Systems basics, Types of Investigation, Procedure
for Handling an Android Device, Imaging Android USB Mass
Storage Devices.
Self-learning Topic: Elcomsoft iOS Forensic Toolkit, Remo
Recover tool for Android Data recovery

Text Books:
1. Digital Forensics by Dr. Dhananjay R. Kalbande Dr. Nilakshi Jain, Wiley Publications,
First Edition, 2019.
2. Digital Evidence and Computer Crime by Eoghan Casey, Elsevier Academic Press, Third
Edition, 2011.
3. Incident Response & Computer Forensics by Jason T. Luttgens, Matthew Pepe and Kevin
Mandia, McGraw-Hill Education, Third Edition (2014).
4. Network Forensics : Tracking Hackers through Cyberspace by Sherri Davidoff and
Jonathan Ham, Pearson Edu,2012
5. Practical Mobile Forensic by Satish Bommisetty, Rohit Tamma, Heather Mahalik,
PACKT publication, Open source publication, 2014 ISBN 978-1-78328-831-1
6. The Art of Memory Forensics: Detecting Malware and Threats in Windows, Linux, and
Mac Memory by Michael Hale Ligh (Author), Andrew Case (Author), Jamie Levy
(Author), AAron Walters (Author), Publisher : Wiley; 1st edition (3 October 2014),

References:

132
1. Scene of the Cybercrime: Computer Forensics by Debra Littlejohn Shinder, Syngress
Publication, First Edition, 2002.
2. Digital Forensics with Open Source Tools by Cory Altheide and Harlan Carvey, Syngress
Publication, First Edition, 2011.
3. Practical Forensic Imaging Securing Digital Evidence with Linux Tools by Bruce
Nikkel,NoStarch Press, San Francisco,(2016)
4. Android Forensics : Investigation, Analysis, and Mobile Security for Google Android by
Andrew Hogg, Elsevier Publication,2011

Online References:
Sr. Website Name
No.
1. https://www.pearsonitcertification.com/articles/article.aspx?p=462199&seqNum=2
2. https://flylib.com/books/en/3.394.1.51/1/
3. https://www.sleuthkit.org/autopsy/
4. http://md5deep.sourceforge.net/md5deep.html
5. https://tools.kali.org/
6. https://kalilinuxtutorials.com/
7. https://accessdata.com/product-download/ftk-imager-version-4-3-0
8. https://www.amazon.in/Art-Memory-Forensics-Detecting-Malware/dp/1118825098

Research Papers: Mobile Forensics/Guidelines on Cell Phone Forensics

1. Computer Forensics Resource Center: NIST Draft Special Publication 800-101 :
https://csrc.nist.gov/publications/detail/sp/800-101/rev-1/final
2. https://cyberforensicator.com/category/white-papers
3. https://www.magnetforensics.com/resources/ios-11-parsing-whitepaper/
4. Samarjeet Yadav , Satya Prakash , Neelam Dayal and Vrijendra Singh, "Forensics Analysis WhatsApp in
Android Mobile Phone", Electronic copy available at: https://ssrn.com/abstract=3576379

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

133
 Cyber Security: Sem VII
Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
Code ral
HCSC701 Security 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Information
Management

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam
HCSC701 Security
Information 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Management
Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 The course is aimed to focus on cybercrime and need to protect information.
2 Understand the types of attacks and how to tackle the amount of risk involved.
3 Discuss the role of industry standards and legal requirements with respect to compliance.
4 Distinguish between different types of access control models, techniques and policy.
5 Awareness about Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery.
6 Awareness about Incident Management and its life cycle.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Understand the scope of policies and measures of information security to L1,L2
people.
2 Interpret various standards available for Information security. L1,L2
3 Apply risk assessment methodology. L3
4 Apply the role of access control to Identity management. L3
5 Understand the concept of incident management, disaster recovery and L1,L2
business continuity.
6 Identify common issues in web application and server security. L3

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

0 Prerequisite Vulnerability Assessment for Operating Systems, Network (Wired 2 --

and Wireless). Tools for conducting Reconnaissance.

134
I Basics of 1.1 What is Information Security & Why do you need it? – 6 CO1,
Information 1.2 Basics Principles of Confidentiality, Integrity CO2
Security 1.3 Availability Concepts, Policies, procedures, Guidelines,
Standards
1.4 Administrative Measures and Technical Measures, People,
Process, Technology, IT ACT 2000, IT ACT 2008

Self-learning Topics: Impact of IT on organizations, Importance of

IS to Society
II Current 2.1 Cloud Computing: benefits and Issues related to information 8 CO2
Trends in Security.
Information 2.2 Standards available for InfoSec: Cobit, Cadbury, ISO 27001,
Security OWASP, OSSTMM.
2.3 An Overview, Certifiable Standards: How, What, When, Who.

Self-learning Topics: Cloud Threats, Impact of cloud computing on

users, examples of cloud service providers: Amazon, Google,
Microsoft, Salesforce etc.
III Threat & Risk 3.1 Threat Modelling: Threat, Threat-Source, Vulnerability, 8 CO3
Management Attacks.
3.2 Risk Assessment Frameworks: ISO 31010, NIST-SP-800-30,
OCTAVE
3.3 Risk Assessment and Analysis: Risk Team Formation,
Information and Asset Value, Identifying Threat and Vulnerability,
Risk Assessment Methodologies
3.4 Quantification of Risk, Identification of Monitoring
mechanism, Calculating Total Risk and Residual Risk.

Self-learning Topics: Risk management trends today and

tomorrow.
IV Identity and 4.1 Concepts of Identification, Authentication, Authorization and 10 CO4
Access Accountability.
Management 4.2 Access Control Models: Discretionary, Mandatory, Role
based and Rule-based.
4.3 Access Control Techniques: Constrained User, Access
control Matrix, Content-dependent, Context – dependent
4.4 Access Control Methods: Administrative, Physical,
Technical, Layering of Access control
4.5 Access Control Monitoring: IDS and IPS and anomaly
detection.
4.6 Accountability: Event-Monitoring and log reviews. Log
Protection
4.7 Threats to Access Control: Various Attacks on the
Authentication systems.

Self-learning Topics: challenges and solutions in identity and

access management
V Operational 5.1 Concept of Availability, High Availability, Redundancy and 10 CO5
Security Backup.
5.2 Calculating Availability, Mean Time Between Failure
(MTBF), Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)
135
 5.3 Incident Management: Detection, Response, Mitigation,
Reporting, Recovery and Remediation
5.4 Disaster Recovery:
Metric for Disaster Recovery, Recovery Time Objective (RTO),
Recovery Point Objective (RPO), Work Recovery Time (WRT),
Maximum Tolerable Downtime (MTD), Business Process Recovery,
Facility Recovery (Hot site, Warm site, Cold site, Redundant site),
Backup & Restoration

Self-learning Topics: Challenges and Opportunities of Having an IT

Disaster Recovery Plan

VI Web 6.1 Types of Audits in Windows Environment 8 CO6

Application, 6.2 Server Security, Active Directory (Group Policy), Anti-Virus,
Windows, and Mails, Malware
Linux security 6.3 Endpoint protection, Shadow Passwords, SUDO users, etc.
6.4 Web Application Security: OWASP, Common Issues in Web
Apps, what is XSS, SQL injection, CSRF, Password
Vulnerabilities, SSL, CAPTCHA, Session Hijacking, Local and
Remote File Inclusion, Audit Trails, Web Server Issues, etc.
Self-learning Topics:, Network firewall protection,Choosing the
Right Web Vulnerability Scanner

Textbooks:

1. Shon Harris, Fernando Maymi, CISSP All-in-One Exam Guide, McGraw Hill Education,
7th Edition, 2016.
2. Andrei Miroshnikov, Introduction to Information Security - I, Wiley, 2018
3. Ron Lepofsky, The Manager’s Guide to Web Application Security, Apress; 1st ed. edition,
2014

References:

1. Rich-Schiesser, IT Systems Management: Designing, Implementing and Managing World

- Class Infrastructures, Prentice Hall; 2 edition, January 2010.
2. NPTEL Course: - Introduction to Information Security – I (URL:
https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc15/SEM1/noc15-cs03/)
3. Dr. David Lanter – ISACA COBIT – 2019 Framework - Introduction and Methodology
4. Pete Herzog, OSSTMM 3, ISECOM
5. NIST Special Publication 800-30, Guide for Conducting Risk Assessments, September
2012

Online References:

Sr. Website Name

No.
1. https://www.ultimatewindowssecurity.com/securitylog/book/Default.aspx
2. http://www.ala.org/acrl/resources/policies/chapter14
3. https://advisera.com/27001academy/what-is-iso-27001/

136
 4. https://nvlpubs.nist.gov/nistpubs/legacy/sp/nistspecialpublication800-30r1.pdf
5. http://www.diva-portal.org/smash/get/diva2:1117263/FULLTEXT01.pdf

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

137
 Cyber Security: Sem VII
Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
(Contact Hours)
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
& Oral
HCSSBL701 Vulnerability -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 2
Assessment
Penetration Testing
(VAPT) Lab (SBL)

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Code Course Title Internal assessment End Term Practical/
Total
Sem. Work Oral
Test1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam
HCSSBL701 Vulnerability
Assessment
-- -- -- -- 50 50 100
Penetration Testing
(VAPT) Lab (SBL)

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab aims:
1 To identify security vulnerabilities and weaknesses in the target applications.
2 To discover potential vulnerabilities which are present in the system in network using vulnerability
assessment tools.
3 To identify threats by exploiting them using penetration test attempt by utilizing the vulnerabilities in a
system
4 To recognize how security controls can be improved to prevent hackers gaining access controls to database.
5 To test and exploit systems using various tools and understands the impact in system logs.
6 To write a report with a full understanding of current security posture and what work is necessary to both
fix the potential threat and to mitigate the same source of vulnerabilities in the future

Lab Outcomes:
Sr. No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels
of attainment as
per Bloom’s
Taxonomy
On successful completion, of lab, learner/student will be able to:
1 Understand the structure where vulnerability assessment is to be performed. L1,L2
2 Apply assessment tools to identify vulnerabilities present in the system in network. L3
3 Evaluate attacks by executing penetration tests on the system or network. L4
4 Analyse a secure environment by improving security controls and applying prevention L5
mechanisms for unauthorised access to database.
5 Create security by testing and exploit systems using various tools and remove the L6
impact of hacking in system.

138
 6 Formation of documents as per applying the steps of vulnerabilities of assessment and L3, L4, L5
penetration testing.

Prerequisite: Computer Networks, Basic of Network Security.

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements

PC With Following Configuration 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS 1. Internet Connection.

1. Intel PIV Processor
2. Security Software and tools
2. 4 GB RAM
3. 500 GB Harddisk
4. Network interface card

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

No. Mapping

0 Prerequisite Computer Network, Basics of Network Security, Ethical Hacking, 2

Digital Forensics

I Human Visibility Audit: Collecting information through social media and 8 LO1
Security internet. Collecting contact details (like phone number, email ID,
(Social What’s App ID, etc)
Engineering) Active Detection Verification: Test if the phone number, email
Assessment id etc are real by test message. Test whether the information is
filtered at point of reception. Test if operator / another person
assistance can be obtained.
Device Information: IP Address, Port details, Accessibility,
Permissions, Role in business
Trust Verification: Test whether the information can be planted
in form of note / email / Message (Phishing)
Test Subjects: College Staff, Reception, PA to Director / Principal.
To conduct information gathering to conduct social engineering
audit on various sections in your college.
Self-Learning Topics: Networking Commands
II Network & Network Discovery: Using various tools to discover the various 8 LO2
Wireless connected devices, to get device name, IP Address, relation of
Security the device in network, Detection of Active port, OS
Assessment Fingerprinting, Network port and active service discovery
Tools: IP Scanner, Nmap etc
Network Packet Sniffing: Packet Sniffing to detect the traffic
pattern, Packet capturing to detect protocol specific traffic
pattern, Packet capturing to reassemble packet to reveal
unencrypted password
Tools: Wireshark
Self-Learning Topics: Learning the CVE database for
vulnerabilities detected.
III Setting up Including an attacker machine preferably Kali and in the same 9 LO3
Pentester lab subnet victim machines either DVWA/ SEEDlabs/ multiple

139
 VULNHUB machines as and when required. Understanding
Categories of pentest and legalities/ ethics.
Installed Kali machine on VM environment with some VULNHUB
machines and we can find out vulnerability of Level 1-VULNHUB
machine like deleted system files, permissions of files.
Self learning Topics: Vulnerability exploitation for acquire root
access of the Kioptrx machine
IV Database and Database Password Audit: Tool based audit has to be performed 9 LO4
Access Control for strength of password and hashes.
Security Tools: DBPw Audit
Assessment Blind SQL Injection: Test the security of the Database for SQL
Injection
Tools: BSQL Hacker
Password Audit: Perform the password audit on the Linux /
Windows based system
Tools: Cain & Able, John the ripper, LCP Password Auditing tools
for Windows.
Active Directory and Privileges Audit: Conduct a review of the
Active Directory and the Group Policy to assess the level of
access privileges allocated.
Tools: SolarWinds
Self-Learning Topics: Federated Database security challenges
and solutions.
V Log Analysis Conduct a log analysis on Server Event Log / Firewall Logs / 6 LO5
Server Security Log to review and obtain insights
Tools: graylog, Open Audit Module.
Self-Learning Topics: Python and R-Programming scripts
VI Compliance License Inventory Compliance: 10 LO6
and Identify the number of licenses and its deployment in your
Observation organization.
Reporting Tools: Belarc Advisor, Open Audit Report
Writing: NESSUS tool
Report should contain:
a. Vulnerability discovered
b. The date of discovery
c. Common Vulnerabilities and Exposure (CVE) database
reference and score; those vulnerabilities found with a medium
or high CVE score should be addressed immediately
d. A list of systems and devices found vulnerable
e. Detailed steps to correct the vulnerability, which can include
patching and/or reconfiguration of operating systems or
applications
f. Mitigation steps (like putting automatic OS updates in place)
to keep the same type of issue from happening again
Purpose of Reporting: Reporting provides an organization with
a full understanding of their current security posture and what
work is necessary to both fix the potential threat and to mitigate
the same source of vulnerabilities in the future.
Self-Learning Topics: Study of OpenVAS, Nikto, etc.
140
Text & Reference Books and Links:

1. The Web Application Hacker's Handbook: Finding and Exploiting Security Flaws Paperback – Illustrated, 7
October 2011 by Dafydd Stuttard
2. Hacking: The Art of Exploitation, 2nd Edition 2nd Edition by Jon Erickson
3. Important links of Vulnhub: Vulnhub Kioptrix
Download Link: https://www.vulnhub.com/entry/basic-pentesting-1,216/
https://www.vulnhub.com/entry/kioptrix-level-1-1,22/
Installation Video: https://youtu.be/JupQRHtfZmw
Walkthrough/solutions Video: https://youtu.be/Qn2cKYZ6kBI
4. OWASP Broken Web Application Projects
https://sourceforge.net/projects/owaspbwa/
5. Mastering Modern Web Penetration Testing By Prakhar Prasad, October 2016, Packt Publishing.
6. Kali Linux Revealed: Mastering the Penetration Testing Distribution – June 5, 2017 by Raphael Hertzog
(Author), Jim O'Gorman (Author), Offsec Press Publisher

Term Work:
The Term work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical based on the above syllabus. The term work Journal must
include at least 2 assignments. The assignments should be based on real world applications which cover concepts
from all above syllabus.

Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments/tutorial/write up) + 5
Marks (Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

141
 Cyber Security: Sem VIII
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
ral
HCSC801 Application 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Security

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Term
Code Internal assessment End Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Avg. of 2 Exam
Test1 Test 2
Tests
HCSC801 Application 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Security

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 The terms and concepts of application Security, Threats, and Attacks
2 The countermeasures for the threats wrt Application security.
3 The Secure Coding Practices
4 The Secure Application Design and Architecture
5 The different Security Scanning and testing techniques
6 The threat modeling approaches

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Enumerate the terms of application Security, Threats, and Attacks L1
2 Describe the countermeasures for the threats with respect to Application security. L1
3 Discuss the Secure Coding Practices. L2
4 Explain the Secure Application Design and Architecture. L2
5 Review the different Security Scanning and testing techniques. L2
6 Discuss the threat modeling approaches. L2

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

No. Mapping
0 Prerequisite Operating System, DBMS, Computer Network, Web Programming, 02 -
OOP

142
 Introduction to Introduction to Web Application Reconnaissance, Finding 05 CO1
Application Subdomains, API Analysis, Identifying Weak Points in Application
I
Security, Architecture
Threats, and Offense: Cross-Site Scripting (XSS), Cross-Site Request Forgery
Attacks (CSRF), XML External Entity (XXE) Injection, Injection Attacks, Denial
of Service (DoS), Cross-Origin Resource Sharing Vulnerabilities

Self-learning Topics: Simulate the attacks using open-source tools

in virtual environment

Securing Modern Web Applications, Secure Application 09 CO2

Architecture, Reviewing Code for Security, Vulnerability Discovery,
II Defence and
Defending Against XSS Attacks, Defending Against CSRF Attacks,
tools
Defending Against XXE, Defending Against Injection attacks,
Defending Against DoS, Defending against CORS based attacks

Self-learning Topics: Implement the countermeasures to the

attacks using open-source tools

Security Requirements, Encryption, Never Trust System Input, 09 CO3

Encoding and Escaping, Third-Party Components, Security Headers:
III Secure Coding
Seatbelts for Web Apps, Securing Your Cookies, Passwords, Storage,
Practices
and Other Important Decisions, HTTPS Everywhere, Framework
Security Features, File Uploads, Errors and Logging, Input Validation
and Sanitization, Authorization and Authentication, Parameterized
Queries, Least Privilege, Requirements Checklist

Self-learning Topics: OWASP Secure Coding Practices

Secure Software Development Lifecycle 09 CO4

IV Secure Averting Disaster Before It Starts, Team Roles for Security, Security
Application in the Software Development Lifecycle,
Design and
Design Flaw vs. Security Bug,
Architecture
Secure Design Concepts,
Segregation of Production Data,
Application Security Activities

Self-learning Topics: Secure Hardware architecture

Testing Your Code, Testing Your Application, Testing Your 09 CO5

Infrastructure, Testing Your Database, Testing Your APIs and Web
V Security
Services, Testing Your Integrations, Testing Your Network, Dynamic
Scanning and
Web Application Profiling
testing
Self-learning Topics: Open-source Application Security Tools,
IAST, RASP and WAF, Selenium
Objectives and Benefits of Threat Modeling, 09 CO6

VI Threat Defining a Risk Mitigation Strategy, Improving Application Security,

Modeling Building Security in the Software Development Life Cycle

143
 Existing Threat Modeling Approaches

Security, Software, Risk-Based Variants

Threat Modeling Within the SDLC

Building Security in SDLC with Threat Modeling, Integrating Threat

Modeling Within the Different Types of SDLCs,

Self-learning Topics: The Common Vulnerability Scoring System

(CVSS)

Text Books:

1. Alice and Bob Learn Application Security, by Tanya Janca Wiley; 1st edition (4 December 2020)
2. Web Application Security, A Beginner's Guide by Bryan Sullivan McGraw-Hill Education; 1st edition (16 January
2012)
3. Web Application Security: Exploitation and Countermeasures for Modern Web Applications by Andrew Hoffman
Shroff/O'Reilly; First edition (11 March 2020)
4. The Security Development Lifecycle by Michael Howard Microsoft Press US; 1st edition (31 May 2006)
5. Risk Centric Threat Modeling Process for Attack Simulation And Threat Analysis, Tony Ucedavélez and Marco m.
Morana, Wiley
6. Iron-Clad Java: Building Secure Web Applications (Oracle Press) 1st Edition by Jim Manico

References:

1. Software Security: Building Security In by Gary McGraw Addison-Wesley Professional; 1st edition (January 23,
2006)
2. A Guide to Securing Modern Web Applications by Michal Zalewski
3. Threat Modeling: A Practical Guide for Development Teams by Izar Tarandach and Matthew J. Coles Dec 8,
2020
Online References:

Sr. Website Name

No.
1. https://owasp.org/www-project-top-ten/
2. https://owasp.org/www-pdf-archive/OWASP_SCP_Quick_Reference_Guide_v2.pdf
3. https://pentesterlab.com/
4. https://app.cybrary.it/browse/course/advanced-penetration-testing
5. https://www.udemy.com/
6. https://www.coursera.org/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus content
must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be covered in Second
IA Test

 Question paper format

144
 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

145
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

146
 University of Mumbai
Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Year
Course Title Internal End
& Sem Seminar/ Term Oral/
Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HVARC501:
TE 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Virtual Reality
Sem
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HVARC601:
Sem. 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
AR and Mix Reality
VI Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HVARC701:
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
BE ARVR Application-I
Sem. HVARSBL701:
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
VII ARVR Lab (SBL)
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HVARC801:
Sem. Game
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Development with
VR
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

147
 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Sem V

Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
ral
HVARC501 Virtual 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Reality

Examination Scheme

Course Course Theory Marks

Code Title Term
Internal assessment End Sem. Practical Oral Total
Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg. Exam

HVARC50 Virtual
1 Reality 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To understand primitives of computer graphics fundamental.
2 To analyze various Hardware devices suitable for VR.
3 To analyze visual physiology and issues related to it.
4 To apply the knowledge of Visual rendering.
5 To evaluate problems faced due to audio scattering in VR.
6 To create different interface in VR environment.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Solve Computer Graphics Problems. L1
2 Analyze application of VR hardware and software components. L1, L2, L3
3 Identify issues related to visual physiology. L1, L2
4 Integrate various shading and rendering techniques. L6
5 Solve problems due to Audio distortions. L5
6 Create User Interface for VR. L6

Prerequisite: Basic C programming

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

148
 0 Prerequisite Functioning of human sensory organs – EYE, Ear, Touch 02 --
etc.
Light and Lenses
Basic functioning of camera
Matrix multiplication
I Geometry of Geometric Modeling, 2D transformations, Homogenous 10 CO1
Virtual World coordinate system, 3D rotation and 6 degree of freedom,
Viewport Transformation

Self: Eye Transformation, demo of 2D transformation

II Introduction Introduction to VR and definitions and its components., 07 CO2
to VR
Hardware components: Display devices: LCD, OLED
Audio: Speakers, Earphones, Bone conduction
Touch: Haptic Device
GPU and CPU, Input devices like game controller, data
glows, Joysticks
Tracking Hardware: Industrial measurement Unit-IMU,
Gyroscope, accelerometer
Software component: Java3D, VRML
Self: Feedback mechanisms in VR environment
III Visual Functioning of Eye with photoreceptors, Resolution for VR, 08 CO3
Physiology, Eye movements and issues with it in VR, Neuroscience of
perception vision, Depth and motion perception, Frame rates and
and tracking display, Orientation tracking, tilt and yaw drift correction,
Tracking with camera

Self: Light House approach

IV Visual Overview, shading models, rendering pipelines, 09 CO4
Rendering rasterization, pixel shading, Distortion shading, post
rendering image wrap

Self: Rendering for VR application

V Audio Physics of Audio, Auditory Perception, localization, 10 CO5
rendering, Problems due to scattering of audio

Self: Study reaction of audio and other senses for VR

environment
VI Interfaces Locomotion, Manipulation, system control, social 06 CO6
interaction using open-source tool like Gopro VR etc.

Self: Explore tools for UI in VR

Text Books:
1. Hearn and Baker, “Computer Graphics- C version”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2002.
149
2. R. K Maurya, “Computer Graphics with Virtual Reality”, 3rd Edition, Wiley India, 2018.
3. Steven M. LaVelle,” Virtual Reality”, Cambridge University press, 2019
4. Grigore Burdea, Philippe Coiffet, “Virtual Reality Technology”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India,
2003
5. Vince, “Virtual Reality Systems”, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, 2002

References:
1. George Mather, “Foundations of Sensation and Perception”, Psychology Press book; 3rd
Edition, 2016
2. Tony Parisi, “ Learning Virtual Reality”, 1st edition, O’Reilly, 2015
3. Alan Craig and William Sherman,” Understanding virtual reality: Interface, application and
design”, 2nd Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publisher, 2019
4. Peter Shirley, Michael Ashikhmin, and Steve Marschner, “Fundamentals of Computer
Graphics” ,A K Peters/CRC Press; 4th Edition, 2016.

Online Resources:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121/106/121106013/#
2. http://msl.cs.uiuc.edu/vr/
3. http://lavalle.pl/vr/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

150
 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Sem VI

Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Oral
HVARC601 AR and Mix 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Reality

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Internal assessment End
Course Title Term
Code Sem. Practical Oral Total
Avg. of 2 Work
Test1 Test 2 Exam
Tests
HVARC601 AR and Mix
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Reality

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To understand the concepts of Augmented Reality and related technologies.
2 To understand the AR tracking system and use of computer vision in AR/MR.
3 To describe the technology for multimodal user interaction and authoring in AR.
4 To use different AR toolkits and apply them to develop AR applications.
5 To demonstrate AR Applications using Mobile AR Toolkits and SDKs.
6 To understand the use of AR/MR in interdisciplinary immersive applications.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Identify and compare different Augmented Reality and Mixed Reality Technologies. L1, L2
2 Apply concepts of Computer Vision for tracking in AR and MR Systems. L3
3 Model different interfaces and authoring in AR/MR. L3
4 Design AR/MR applications using open source platforms and toolkits. L6
5 Design Mobile based AR Applications. L6
6 Apply insights of AR/MR in different applications. L3

Prerequisite: Programming Language, Computer Graphics, Virtual Reality

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Module Title Description Hours CO
0 Pre-requisite Basics of Computer Graphics, Coordinate Systems, VR 02 --
Introduction, Tracking in VR

151
I Introduction Definition and Scope, A Brief History of Augmented Reality, AR 06 CO1
to Augmented Architecture, Related Fields of AR (like Mixed Reality, Virtual
Reality and Reality, Immersive Reality, Extended Reality) and Their
Mixed Reality comparison, General Architecture of Mixed Reality System,
Algorithm Steps in Mixed Reality

Self-Learning Topics: How AR/MR are related to Ubiquitous

Computing, Multidimensional Systems.
II Tracking and Multimodal Displays; Visual Perception; Spatial Display Model; 07 CO2
Computer Visual Displays; Tracking, Calibration and Registration;
Vision for AR Coordinate Systems; Characteristics of Tracking Technology;
and MR Stationary Tracking Systems; Mobile Sensors; Optical Tracking;
Sensor Fusion; Marker Tracking; Multiple Camera Infrared
Tracking; Natural Feature Tracking by Detection; Incremental
Tracking; Simultaneous Localization and Tracking; Outdoor
Tracking

Self-Learning Topics: Indoor Tracking, Full Body Tracking

III Interaction, Output Modalities, Input Modalities, Tangible Interfaces, 08 CO3
Modeling and Virtual User Interfaces on Real Surfaces, Multi-view Interfaces,
Annotation Haptic Interaction, Multimodal Interaction, Specifying
and Authoring Geometry, Specifying Appearance, Semi-automatic
Reconstruction, Free-form Modeling, Annotation,
Requirement of AR Authoring, Elements of Authoring, Stand-
alone Authoring Solutions, Plug-in Approaches, Web
Technology

Self-Learning Topics: Case Study on Object Annotation in Real

Time, Avatar Modeling.
IV Software AR Application Requirements, Software Engineering 10 CO4
Architecture in Requirements, Distributed Object Systems, Data Flow, Scene
AR Graphs; Developer Support: Parameter Configuration,
and AR Declarative Scripting, Procedural Scripting, Mixed Language
Development Programming, Runtime Reconfiguration, Choosing an AR
Toolkits Platforms and Toolkits; AR Non-programming Frameworks, AR
Programming Frameworks, Programming AR using ARToolkit.

Self-Learning Topics: Commercial AR Frameworks, AR Related

Markup Languages
V Mobile AR Types of Mobile Apps, AR Browsers for Smartphones, Point of 10 CO5
Interests (POI) in Mobile AR, POI Authoring and Publishing
Tools, AR Applications for Android, AR Games for Android,
Mobile AR Toolkits and SDKs, Developing Mobile AR
Applications, AR Application Development for Android
Smartphone

Self-Learning Topics: AR Applications for iOS, AR Games for

iOS, AR Application Development for iOS Smartphone
VI Applications Applications of AR/MR in: Edutainment, Medical, Military, 07 CO6
of AR/MR and Production and Manufacturing, Navigation, Astronomical
Human Observation, E-commerce; What are Human Factors, Physical
152
 Factors, Legal Side Effects, Visual Side Effects, Legal Considerations, Moral
and Social and Ethical Considerations.
Considerations
Self-Learning Topics: Applications of AR/MR in Civil
Construction and Architecture, Collaboration, Information
Control and Big Data Visualization

Textbooks:

1. Dieter Schmalsteig and Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality- Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education,
Inc. 2016 Edition.

2. Chetankumar G Shetty, “Augmented Reality- Theory, Design and Development”, Mc Graw Hill, 2020 Edition.

3. Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Augmented Reality – Concepts and Applications”, Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier,
2013 Edition.

References:

1. Borko Furht, “Handbook of Augmented Reality”, Springer, 2011 Edition.

2. Erin Pangilinan, Steve Lukas, and Vasanth Mohan, “Creating Augmented and Virtual Realities- Theory and
Practice for Next-Generation Spatial Computing”, O’Reilly Media, Inc., 2019 Edition.

3. Jens Grubert, Dr. Raphael Grasset, “Augmented Reality for Android Application Development”, PACKT
Publishing, 2013 Edition.

Online Resources:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. www.nptel.ac.in
2. www.coursera.org

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

153
 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Sem VII

Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/O Tutorial Total
Code ral
HVARC701 ARVR 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Application-I

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Avg. of 2 Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2
Tests Exam
HVARC701 ARVR
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Application-I

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To learn the underlying concepts of Virtual Reality, Augmented Reality and related technologies.
2 To analyse the principles of VR design, prototype.
3 To analyse the principles of AR design, prototype.
4 To design Graphical User interface using VR
5 To identify trends in XR, key issues in XR and XR Tools.
6 To analyse privacy, ethical, social concern on AR/VR problem.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Apply modelling techniques on Augmented Reality applications.. L1, L2, L3
2 Gets an overview of guidelines, methods, tools and pick design problems in Virtual L1, L2
Reality.
3 Gets an overview of guidelines, methods, tools and pick design problems in L1, L2
Augmented Reality.
4 Evaluate designs based on theoretical frameworks and build Graphical User L3, L4
interface using VR, Tools
5 Apply the appropriate XR development Approach on problem L3
6 Analyse main concerns with respect to designed solutions and discuss the privacy, L3, L4
ethical, social concerns.
Prerequisite: Programming Language, Computer Graphics, Virtual Reality

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Module Title Description Hours CO

154
 0 Prerequisite Fundamental Concept and Components of Virtual Reality, 02 --
Augmented Reality and Mixed Reality Technologies,
Authoring in AR
I AR/VR Difference between AR and VR , Rendering for VR/AR, 08 CO1
Concepts and Challenges with AR,AR systems and functionality
Technologies
Augmented Reality Application Development: Types of
Augmented Reality Application (Location Based AR Apps
Marker-Based AR Applications), three-dimensional modeling
and computer vision ,displays & tracking technologies

Self-learning Topic: Case study on Retail shopping using AR

II VR Design Principles of VR design, Overview of guidelines, methods, 09 CO2

Overview tools & design problem, Physical Prototyping for VR- Physical
prototype of potential solution, Digital Prototyping for VR-
tool choices, digital prototype of (key aspects of) solution
Self-learning Topic: Study of 3D navigation , layout and
contents
III AR Design Principles of AR design, Overview of guidelines, methods, 09 CO3
Overview tools & design problem, Physical Prototyping for AR - Physical
prototype of potential solution, Digital Prototyping for AR-
tool choices, digital prototype of (key aspects of) solution.

Self-learning Topic: Use of Anchors in AR

IV 3D 3 D interaction Overview and types, Navigation in VR, Object 10 CO4

interaction interaction, Graphical User interface using VR, Challenges in
with VR VR interaction, Tools

Self-learning Topic: Case study of Mobile applications using

3D interface
V XR Application XR overview, XR development Approach, XR design process, 10 CO5
Development Trends in XR, key issues in XR, Tools

Self-learning Topic: Difference between, AR, VR, MR and XR

VI Privacy and Privacy, Ethical, and Social Implications, and the Future of 04 CO6
security AR/VR

Self-learning Topic: Case study on Privacy and security issues

using AR and VR

Textbooks:

1. John Vince, “ Virtual Reality Systems”, Pearson publication

2. Tony Parisi, “ Learning Virtual Reality”, O’REILLY’
3. Dieter Schmalsteig and Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality- Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education, Inc.
2016 Edition.
4. Chetankumar G Shetty, “Augmented Reality- Theory, Design and Development”, Mc Graw Hill, 2020 Edition.
5. Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Augmented Reality – Concepts and Applications”, Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2013
Edition.

155
References:

1. Borko Furht, “Handbook of Augmented Reality”, Springer.

2. Erin Pangilinan, Steve Lukas, and Vasanth Mohan, “Creating Augmented and Virtual Realities- Theory and Practice
for Next-Generation Spatial Computing”, O’Reilly Media, Inc., 2019 Edition.
3. Jens Grubert, Dr. Raphael Grasset, “Augmented Reality for Android Application Development”, PACKT Publishing.

Online Resources:
Sr. No. Website Name
3. www.nptel.ac.in
4. www.coursera.org

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test.

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

156
 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Sem VII
Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
(Contact Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Course Code Course Title
Oral
HVARSBL701 ARVR Lab -- 2 -- -- 1 -- 01
(SBL)

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Code Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test2 Avg.
Exam
HVARSBL601 ARVR Lab (SBL) -- -- -- -- 50 50 50

Lab Objectives:
Sr. No. Lab Objectives
The lab course aims:
1 To Understand the definition and significance of the VR,AR and MR.
2 To Design various applications in VR .
3 To Examine various audio tools for audio embedded in scene
4 To Explore AR and MR applications in real world
5 To develop interface for VR and AR applications
6 To Explore the interconnection and integration of the physical world and able to design & develop Mobile
applications.

Lab Outcomes
Sr. No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Adapt different tools to implement VR,AR and MR. L1,L2
2 Demonstrate the working of VR background design. L1,L2
3 Apply audio tools and developed real world application. L1,L2,L3
4 Adapt different techniques for Integrating AR and MR concepts in applications. L5
5 Create interface for selected application L6
6 Create application and interface for mobile application /desktop version L6

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements

PC With Following Configuration 1. Unity 1. Internet Connection.
1. PC i3/i5/i7 Processor or above. 2. Python
2. 4 GB RAM 3.OpenCV
3. 500 GB Harddisk 4. Solidity
4. Network interface card
Prerequisite: VR, AR and MR concepts
157
Suggested List of Experiments
ARVR lab will describe the Designing of VR and AR applications using different Tools. It starts with installation of
software and then learner learn how to design background of various application. Now a day’s audio implementation
in VR scenes is also getting lots of attention so this aspect is also covered in the lab experiments. AR and MR are
important concepts where learner design the applications for desktop as well as mobile environment.

Sr. No. Detailed Content LO Mapping

1 To install Open source software /Unity with its functionality LO1
2 Select real world application and design background for the same LO2
3 To add sound in the selected application using Open source software /Unity LO3
software
4 To study interface requirements and apply for the selected application LO3
5 Creating Your Digital Prototype of your objects/environment – (WebVR/ Sketchup / LO6
Blender/Unity/Keynote/Figma)
6 To implement a depth map with Python and OpenCV and using Unity LO5
7 Identify multiple surfaces and move objects between them using ARCore LO3
8 To study Interact with AR objects and detect collisions. LO2
9 Marker less Object Placement - WebAR LO4
10 In a group of three to five students develop one real world application in VR/ AR or LO6
MR with object details and sound with good user interface

Text Books/ References:

1. Hearn and Baker, “Computer Graphics- C version”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2002.
2. R. K Maurya, “Computer Graphics with Virtual Reality”, 3rd Edition, Wiley India, 2018.
3. Dieter Schmalsteig and Tobias Hollerer, “Augmented Reality- Principles and Practice”, Pearson Education, Inc.
2016 Edition.
4. Chetankumar G Shetty, “Augmented Reality- Theory, Design and Development”, Mc Graw Hill, 2020 Edition.
5. Alan B. Craig, “Understanding Augmented Reality – Concepts and Applications”, Morgan Kaufmann, Elsevier, 2013
Edition.

Online Resources:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/121/106/121106013/#
2. http://msl.cs.uiuc.edu/vr/
3. http://lavalle.pl/vr
4. http://nptel.ac.in
5. www.coursera.org

Term Work:
The Term work shall consist of at least 10 to 12 practical based on the above syllabus. The term work Journal must
include at least 2 assignments. The assignments should be based on real world applications which cover concepts
from all above syllabus.
Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments/tutorial/write up) + 5
Marks (Attendance)
Oral Exam: An Oral exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

158
 Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality: Sem VIII
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Oral
HVARC801 Game 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Development
with VR

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course
Course Title Internal assessment End Term Practica
Code Oral Total
Sem. Work l
Test1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam
HVARC801 Game Development
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
with VR

Course Objectives

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 The different genres of game and explain the Unity UI Basics.
2 The use of navigation and cursor control to create a game environment.
3 How to import assets, interact with them using action objects and manage object states.
4 To build transitions by scripting events ,using physics, particle systems, and other Unity functionality action
sequences with UnityGUI design.
5 To build the game project together by handling mecanim ,using dialogue trees, creating and setting up the
game environment and menus for the game.
6 The VR development in Unity.

Course Outcomes

Sr. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

No. attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Identify the different genres of game and explain the Unity UI Basics L1,L2
2 Make use of navigation and cursor control to create a game L3
environment
3 Apply how to import assets ,interact with them using action objects L3
and manage object states
4 Build transitions by scripting events ,using physics, particle systems, L3
and other Unity functionality action sequences with UnityGUI design
5 Build the game project together by handling mecanim ,using L3
dialogue trees,creating and setting up the game environment and
menus for the game
6 Explain VR development in Unity L2
Prerequisite: Basics of VR

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
159
 Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
No. Mapping
0 Prerequisite VR Basic concepts 02 -

I Game The Adventure Genre, Fast Forward to Real-Time, What Draws 08 CO1
Development People to This Genre? Designing Your Game: Defining a Style,
and Unity UI Compartmentalizing Environments, First-Person or Third?
Basics Animation, Basic Human Characteristics Make for Fun? Managing
Your Project, Tips for Completing the Game, Real Time vs. Pre-
render.AI in Gaming-AI Guidelines, a simple workflow.

Unity UI: The Layout, Toolbar, Menus, Creating Simple Objects,

Selecting and Focusing, Transforming Objects In 3D, Snaps, Scene
Gizmo.Lights,3D Objects, Materials

Scripting: What is a script? Components of a Script, Picking an

Object in the Game, Conditionals and State, Order of Evaluation

Self-learning Topics: Understanding the role of AI in gaming

II Navigation and Creating Environments, Navigation-Arrow Navigation and Input, 06 CO2
Cursor Control Fun with Platforms, Collision Walls, Cursor visibility, Custom
cursors, GUI Texture Cursor, Hardware Cursor, UnityGUI Cursor,
Object-to-Object Communication, Mouseover Cursor Changes,
Object Reaction to Mouseover

Self-learning Topics: Multimodal Gaming for Navigation Skills in

Players Who Are Blind
III Imported Imported Assets:3D Art Assets, Setting Up Materials, Shadows. 09 CO3
Assets, Objects
Action Objects: Colliders, Triggering Animation, Adding Sound F/X,
& Managing
states Managing States: Identifying the Action Objects, Developing a
State Machine, Lookup Table, Scripting in Unity, Picking a script
Editor, Fundamentals of scripting in Unity. The Object Lookup
Script, Action-Related Messages

Self-learning Topics: Study the new Asset Import Pipeline: Solid

foundation for speeding up asset imports, Effects of scripting on
dialogues.
IV Transitions, Processing the Auxiliary Objects, Handling Object Visibility, 09 CO4
Text Ensuring Player Focus,
Management
Adding New Assets, Physics, Combining Physics and Keyframe
Animation, Particle systems,

GUI Skin, Text Visibility, Using Layers, Creating the Inventory

Screen, Adding Inventory Icons, Managing the inventory.

Self-learning Topics: Importance of effective Text management in

Gaming

160
 V Game Dialogue Trees, The Scenario, Starting a Conversation, Mecanim 09 CO5
Deployment and Characters, Game Environment, Setting up the game, Menus
and levels

Self-learning Topics: Branching dialogue trees and its effect in

Gaming. Study of different UI designs for Menus in Games.
VI XR Unity platform and services, XR Getting started with AR 09 CO6
development development in Unity, Getting started with VR development in
in Unity Unity, XR Plug-in Framework, Configuring your Unity Project for
XR, Universal Render Pipeline compatibility in XR, XR API
reference, Single Pass Stereo rendering (Double-Wide rendering),
VR Audio Spatializers, VR frame timing ,Unity XR SDK, Open-source
repositories using Bitbucket, Asset Store Publishing, use of unity as
library in other application.

Self-learning Topics: Study any open source tool for VR

Development
Text Books:

1. Beginning 3D Game Development with Unity 4 All-in-one Multi-platform Game development, 2nd Edition,
Apress, Sue Backman
2. Game Development with Unity 2nd Edition, Michelle Menard and Bryan Wagstaff
3. Unity Game development Essentials, Will Goldstone, PACKT Publishing
4. Unity Game Development Cookbook-Essentials for every Game, O’reilly ,Paris Buttfield-Addison, Jon Manning-
Tim Nugent.

Reference Books:

1. Introduction to Gam Development, Second Edition, Steve Rabin, CENGAGE Learning

2. Sams Teach Yourself Unity Game Development in 24 Hours-Mike Geig

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://docs.unity3d.com/Manual/VROverview.html
2. https://www.coursera.org/
3. https://www.udemy.com/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus
 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)
 A total of four questions need to be answered
161
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

162
 University of Mumbai
Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning (AI&ML)
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Scheme Hrs Examination Scheme and Marks Credit Scheme
/ Week
Course Code &
Course Title

Assessment
Year & Sem

Term Work
Seminar /

End Sem
Practical

Practical
Internal
Tutorial

Credits
Theory

Oral /
Exam

Total
TE HAIMLC501:
Sem Mathematics 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
V for AI & ML
Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HAIMLC601:
Sem Game Theory 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI using AI & ML
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

BE HAIMLC701:
Sem AI&ML in 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VII Healthcare
HAIMLSBL701:
AI&ML in
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Healthcare:
Lab
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HAIMLC801:
Sem Text, Web and
VIII 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Social Media
Analytics
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

163
 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning: Sem V
Course Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Name Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HAIMLC501 Mathematics
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
for AI&ML

Course Course Examination Scheme

Code Name Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and
Sem. Oral
Exam.
Test1 Test2 Avg.
HAIMLC501 Mathematics
20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
for AI&ML

Course Prerequisites:
Applied Mathematics, Discrete mathematics
Course Objectives:
1 To build an intuitive understanding of Mathematics and relating it to Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning
and Data Science.
2 To provide a strong foundation for probabilistic and statistical analysis mostly used in varied applications in
Engineering.
3 To focus on exploring the data with the help of graphical representation and drawing conclusions.
4 To explore optimization and dimensionality reduction techniques.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Use linear algebra concepts to model, solve, and analyze real-world problems.
2 Apply probability distributions and sampling distributions to various business problems.
3 Select an appropriate graph representation for the given data.
4 Apply exploratory data analysis to some real data sets and provide interpretations via relevant visualization
5 Analyze various optimization techniques.
6 Describe Dimension Reduction Algorithms

Module
Topics Hrs.
No.
1.0 Linear Algebra 05
1.1 Vectors and Matrices, Solving Linear equations, The four Fundamental Subspaces,
Eigenvalues and Eigen Vectors, The Singular Value Decomposition (SVD).
2.0 Probability and Statistics 09
2.1 Introduction, Random Variables and their probability Distribution, Random Sampling,
Sample Characteristics and their Distributions, Chi-Square, t-, and F-Distributions: Exact
Sampling Distributions, Sampling from a Bivariate Normal Distribution, The Central Limit
Theorem.
3.0 Introduction to Graphs 10

164
 3.1 Quantitative vs. Qualitative data, Types of Quantitative data: Continuous data, Discrete
data, Types of Qualitative data: Categorical data, Binary data, Ordinary data, Plotting data
using Bar graph, Pie chart, Histogram, Stem and Leaf plot, Dot plot, Scatter plot, Time-series
graph, Exponential graph, Logarithmic graph, Trigonometric graph, Frequency distribution
graph.
4.0 Exploratory Data Analysis 09
4.1 Need of exploratory data analysis, cleaning and preparing data, Feature engineering,
Missing values, understand dataset through various plots and graphs, draw conclusions,
deciding appropriate machine learning models.
5.0 Optimization Techniques 10
5.1 Types of optimization-Constrained and Unconstrained optimization, Methods of
Optimization-Numerical Optimization, Bracketing Methods-Bisection Method, False
Position Method, Newton’s Method, Steepest Descent Method, Penalty Function
Method.
6.0 Dimension Reduction Algorithms 05
6.1 Introduction to Dimension Reduction Algorithms, Linear Dimensionality Reduction:
Principal component analysis, Factor Analysis, Linear discriminant analysis.
6.2 Non-Linear Dimensionality Reduction: Multidimensional Scaling, Isometric Feature
Mapping. Minimal polynomial
Total 48

Text Books:
1 Linear Algebra for Everyone,
2 Gilbert Strang, Wellesley Cambridge Press.
3 An Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Vijay Rohatgi, Wiley Publication
4 An introduction to Optimization, Second Edition, Wiley-Edwin Chong, Stainslaw Zak.
5 Mathematics for Machine Learning, Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, Cheng Soon Ong, Cambridge
University Press.
6 Exploratory Data Analysis, John Tukey, Princeton University and Bell Laboratories.
References:
1 Introduction to Linear Algebra, Gilbert Strang.
2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig
3 Mehryar Mohri, Afshin Rostamizadeh, and Ameet Talwalkar. Foundations of Machine Learning. MIT Press,
2018.
4 Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David. Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms.
Cambridge University Press, 2014
5 Last updated on Sep 9, 2018.
6 Mathematics and Programming for Machine Learning with R, William B. Claster, CRC Press,2020
Useful Links:
1 https://math.mit.edu/~gs/linearalgebra/
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/probability-theory-statistics
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/105/111105090/
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ma01/preview
5 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-06-linear-algebra-spring-2010/video-lectures/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
165
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test when
additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions will be
asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the
syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

166
 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning: Sem VI
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HAIMLC601 Game Theory
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
using AI & ML

Course Course Name Examination Scheme

Code Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Sem. Duration Work and Oral
Exam.
Test1 Test2 Avg.
HAIMLC601 Game Theory
20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
using AI & ML

Course Prerequisites:
Knowledge of probability theory, discrete mathematics, and algorithm design is required.
Course Objectives:
1 To acquire the knowledge of game theory.
2 To understand the basic concept of AI, strength and weakness of problem solving and search
3 To study about various heuristic and game search algorithms
4 To optimize the different linear methods of regression and classification
5 To interpret the different supervised classification methods of support vector machine.
6 To acquire the knowledge of different generative models through unsupervised learning
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand basic concept of game theory.
2 Evaluate Artificial Intelligence (AI) methods and describe their foundations
3 Analyze and illustrate how search algorithms play vital role in problem solving, inference, perception,
knowledge representation and learning
4 Demonstrate knowledge of reasoning and knowledge representation for solving real world problems
5 Recognize the characteristics of machine learning that makes it useful to realworld problems and apply
different dimensionality reduction techniques
6 Apply the different supervised learning methods of support vector machine and tree based models

Module
Topics Hours.
No.
1.0 Introduction to Game Theory 05
1.1 Introduction, The theory of rational choice, Games with Perfect Information, Nash
Equilibrium: Theory, Prisoner’s Dilemma, Stag Hunt, Matching pennies, BOS, Multi NE,
Cooperative and Competitive Games, Strict and Non Strict NE, Best response functions
for NE.
1.2 Nash Equilibrium: Illustrations, Cournot’s model of oligopoly, Bertrand’s model of
oligopoly, Electoral competition, The War of Attrition, Auctions, Mixed Strategy
Equilibrium, Strategic games in which players may randomize, Dominated actions,
Extensive Games with Perfect Information

167
2.0 Games with Imperfect Information 09
2.1 Bayesian Games, Introduction, Motivational examples, General definitions, two
examples concerning information, Strictly Competitive Games and Maxminimization,
Rationalizability
2.2 Evolutionary Equilibrium, Monomorphic pure strategy equilibrium, Mixed strategies
and polymorphic equilibrium, Repeated games: The Prisoner’s Dilemma, Infinitely
repeated games, Strategies, General Results,
3.0 Introduction to AI & Problem Solving 10
3.1 Definitions – Foundation and History of AI, Evolution of AI - Applications of AI,
Classification of AI systems with respect to environment. Artificial Intelligence vs
Machine learning,
3.2 Heuristic Search Techniques: Generate-and-Test; Hill Climbing; Properties of A*
algorithm, Best first Search; Problem Reduction.
3.3 Beyond Classical Search: Local search algorithms and optimization problem, local
search in continuous spaces, searching with nondeterministic action and partial
observation, online search agent and unknown environments
4.0 Knowledge and Reasoning 09
4.1 Knowledge and Reasoning: Building a Knowledge Base: Propositional logic, first order
Logic, situation calculus. Theorem Proving in First Order Logic, Planning, partial order
planning. Uncertain Knowledge and Reasoning, Probabilities,
4.2 Bayesian Networks. Probabilistic reasoning over time: time and uncertainty, hidden
Markova models, Kalman filter, dynamic bayesian network, keeping track of many
objects
5.0 Introduction to ML 10
5.1 Introduction to Machine Learning, Examples of Machine Learning Applications, Learning
Types, Supervised Learning -Learning a Class from Examples, Vapnik- Chervonenkis (VC)
Dimension, Probably Approximately Correct (PAC) Learning, Noise, Learning Multiple
Classes, Regression, Model Selection and Generalization, Dimensions of a Supervised
Machine Learning Algorithm
5.2 Introduction, Linear Regression Models and Least Squares, Subset Selection, Shrinkage
Methods, Logistic Regression- Fitting Logistic Regression Models,
Quadratic Approximations and Inference, L1 Regularized Logistic Regression,
SVM-Introduction to SVM, The Support Vector Classifier, Support Vector Machines and
Kernels- Computing the SVM for Classification
6.0 Unsupervised Learning 05
6.1 Introduction, Association Rules-Market Basket Analysis, The Apriori Algorithm,
Unsupervised as Supervised Learning, Generalized Association Rules, Cluster Analysis
Proximity Matrices,
Clustering Algorithms-K-mean, Gaussian Mixtures as Soft K-means Clustering, Example:
Human Tumor Microarray Data, Vector Quantization, K-medoids, Hierarchical
Clustering, Self-Organizing Maps, PCA-Spectral Clustering
6.2 Hidden Markov Models-Introduction, Discrete Markov Processes, Hidden Markov
Models, Three Basic Problems of HMMs, Evaluation Problem, Finding the State
Sequence, Learning Model Parameters, Continuous Observations, The HMM with
Input, Model Selection in HMM
Total 48

Text Books:
168
1 Martin Osborne, An Introduction to Game Theory, Oxford University Press.
2 Russell, S. and Norvig, P. 2015. Artificial Intelligence - A Modern Approach, 3rd edition,Prentice Hall
3 Introduction to Machine Learning Edition 2, by Ethem Alpaydin
References:
1 Thomas Ferguson, Game Theory, World Scientific, 2018.
2 Stef Tijs. Introduction to Game Theory, Hindustan Book Agency
3 J. Gabriel, Artificial Intelligence: Artificial Intelligence for Humans (Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning),
Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, First edition , 2016
4 Introduction to Artificial Intelligence & Expert Systems, Dan W Patterson, PHI.,2010 2. S Kaushik, Artificial
Intelligence, Cengage Learning, 1st ed.2011
5 Machine Learning. Tom Mitchell. First Edition, McGraw- Hill, 1997

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test when
additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions will be
asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the
syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

169
 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning: Sem VII
Course Code Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Name Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HAIMLC701 AI&ML in
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Healthcare

Course Code Course Examination Scheme

Name Theory Marks Exam Term Practical and Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work Oral
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem.
Exam.
HAIMLC701 AI&ML in
20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
Healthcare

Course Prerequisites:
Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning
Course Objectives: The course aims
1 To understand the need and significance of AI and ML for Healthcare.
2 To study advanced AI algorithms for Healthcare.
3 To learn Computational Intelligence techniques .
4 To understand evaluation metrics and ethics in intelligence for Healthcare systems,
5 To learn various NLP algorithms and their application in Healthcare,
6 To investigate the current scope, implications of AI and ML for developing futuristic Healthcare Applications.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Understand the role of AI and ML for handling Healthcare data.
2 Apply Advanced AI algorithms for Healthcare Problems.
3 Learn and Apply various Computational Intelligence techniques for Healthcare Application.
4 Use evaluation metrics for evaluating healthcare systems.
5 Develop NLP applications for healthcare using various NLP Techniques..
6 Apply AI and ML algorithms for building Healthcare Applications

Module Topics Hours.

1.0 Introduction 04
1.1 Overview of AI and ML,A Multifaceted Discipline, Applications of AI in Healthcare -
Prediction, Diagnosis, personalized treatment and behavior modification, drug
discovery, followup care etc,
1.2 Realizing potential of AI and ML in healthcare, Healthcare Data - Use Cases.
2.0 AI, ML, Deep Learning and Data Mining Methods for Healthcare 10
2.1 Knowledge discovery and Data Mining, ML, Multi classifier Decision Fusion, Ensemble
Learning, Meta-Learning and other Abstract Methods.
2.2 Evolutionary Algorithms, Illustrative Medical Application-Multiagent Infectious Disease
Propagation and Outbreak Prediction, Automated Amblyopia Screening System etc.
2.3 Computational Intelligence Techniques, Deep Learning, Unsupervised learning,
dimensionality reduction algorithms.

170
3.0 Evaluating learning for Intelligence 06
3.1 Model development and workflow, evaluation metrics, Parameters and
Hyperparameters, Hyperparameter tuning algorithms, multivariate testing, Ethics of
Intelligence.
4.0 Natural Language Processing in Healthcare 08
4.1 NLP tasks in Medicine, Low-level NLP components, High level NLP components, NLP
Methods.
4.2 Clinical NLP resources and Tools, NLP Applications in Healthcare. Model Interpretability
using Explainable AI for NLP applications.
5.0 Intelligent personal Health Record 04
5.1 Introduction, Guided Search for Disease Information, Recommending SCA's.
Recommending HHP's , Continuous User Monitoring.
6.0 Future of Healthcare using AI and ML 07
6.1 Evidence based medicine, Personalized Medicine, Connected Medicine, Digital Health
and Therapeutics, Conversational AI, Virtual and Augmented Reality, Blockchain for
verifying supply chain, patient record access, Robot - Assisted Surgery, Smart Hospitals,
Case Studies on use of AI and ML for Disease Risk Diagnosis from patient data,
Augmented reality applications for Junior doctors.
6.2 Blockchain for verifying supply chain, patient record access, Robot - Assisted Surgery,
Smart Hospitals, Case Studies on use of AI and ML for Disease Risk Diagnosis from
patient data, Augmented reality applications for Junior doctors.
Total 48

Textbooks:
1 Arjun Panesar, "Machine Learning and AI for Healthcare”, A Press.
2 Arvin Agah, "Medical applications of Artificial Systems ", CRC Press
References:
1 Erik R. Ranschaert Sergey Morozov Paul R. Algra, “Artificial Intelligence in medical Imaging-
Opportunities, Applications and Risks”, Springer
2 Sergio Consoli Diego Reforgiato Recupero Milan Petković,“Data Science for Healthcare-
Methodologies and Applications”, Springer
3 Dac-Nhuong Le, Chung Van Le, Jolanda G. Tromp, Gia Nhu Nguyen, “Emerging technologies for
health and medicine”, Wiley.
4 Ton J. Cleophas • Aeilko H. Zwinderman, “Machine Learning in Medicine- Complete Overview”,
Springer

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test
when additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions
will be asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned
in the syllabus.
171
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning: Sem VIII

Course Code Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HAIMLC801 Text, Web and
Social Media 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Analytics

Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem. Oral
Exam.
HAIMLC801 Text, Web and
Social Media 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
Analytics

Course Prerequisites:
Python, Data Mining
Course Objectives: The course aims
1 To have a strong foundation on text, web and social media analytics.
2 To understand the complexities of extracting the text from different data sources and analysing it.
3 To enable students to solve complex real-world problems using sentiment analysis and Recommendation
systems.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Extract Information from the text and perform data pre-processing
2 Apply clustering and classification algorithms on textual data and perform prediction.
3 Apply various web mining techniques to perform mining, searching and spamming of web data.
4 Provide solutions to the emerging problems with social media using behaviour analytics and Recommendation
systems.
5 Apply machine learning techniques to perform Sentiment Analysis on data from social media.

Module Topics Hours.

1.0 Introduction 06
1.1 Introduction to Text Mining: Introduction, Algorithms for Text Mining, Future Directions

1.2 Information Extraction from Text: Named Entity Recognition, Relation Extraction,
Unsupervised Information Extraction

1.3 Text Representation: tokenization, stemming, stop words, NER, N-gram modelling

2.0 Clustering and Classification 10

172
 2.1 Text Clustering: Feature Selection and Transformation Methods, distance based
Clustering Algorithms, Word and Phrase based Clustering, Probabilistic document
Clustering

2.2 Text Classification: Feature Selection, Decision tree Classifiers, Rule-based Classifiers,
Probabilistic based Classifiers, Proximity based Classifiers.

2.3 Text Modelling: Bayesian Networks, Hidden Markovian Models, Markov random Fields,
Conditional Random Fields

Web-Mining:
3.0 05
3.1 Introduction to Web-Mining: Inverted indices and Compression, Latent Semantic
Indexing, Web Search,

3.2 Meta Search: Using Similarity Scores, Rank Positons

3.3 Web Spamming: Content Spamming, Link Spamming, hiding Techniques, and
Combating Spam

4.0 Web Usage Mining: 05

4.1 Data Collection and Pre-processing, Sources and types of Data, Data Modelling, Session
and Visitor Analysis, Cluster Analysis and Visitor segmentation, Association and
Correlation Analysis, Analysis of Sequential and Navigational Patterns, Classification and
Prediction based on Web User Transactions.
5.0 Social Media Mining: 05
5.1 Introduction, Challenges, Types of social Network Graphs

5.2 Mining Social Media: Influence and Homophily, Behaviour Analytics, Recommendation
in Social Media: Challenges, Classical recommendation Algorithms, Recommendation
using Social Context, Evaluating recommendations.
Opinion Mining and Sentiment Analysis:
6.0 08
6.1 The problem of opinion mining,

6.2 Document Sentiment Classification: Supervised, Unsupervised

6.3 Opinion Lexicon Expansion: Dictionary based, Corpus based

6.4 Opinion Spam Detection: Supervised Learning, Abnormal Behaviours, Group Spam
Detection.

Total 48

Textbooks:
1 Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing,” 3rd edition, 2020
2 Charu. C. Aggarwal, Cheng Xiang Zhai, Mining Text Data, Springer Science and Business Media, 2012.
3 BingLiu, “Web Data Mining-Exploring Hyperlinks, Contents, and Usage Data”, Springer, Second Edition, 2011.

173
4 Reza Zafarani, Mohammad Ali Abbasiand Huan Liu, “Social Media Mining- An Introduction”, Cambridge
University Press, 2014

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test when
additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions will be
asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the
syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

174
 Artificial Intelligence and Machine Learning:Sem VII
Course Code Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Name Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HAIMLSBL701 AI&ML in
Healthcare: -- 04 -- -- 02 -- 02
Lab

Course Code Course Examination Scheme

Name Theory Marks Exam Term Oral Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem.
Exam.
HAIMLSBL701 AI&ML in
Healthcare: 50 50 100
Lab

Course Prerequisites:
Python
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Students will be able to understand computational models of AI and ML.
2 Students will be able to develop healthcare applications using appropriate computational tools.
3 Students will be able to apply appropriate models to solve specific healthcare problems.
4 Students will be able to analyze and justify the performance of specific models as applied to healthcare
problems.
5 Students will be able to design and implement AI and ML-based healthcare applications.

Suggested Experiments:
Sr.
Name of the Experiment
No.
1 Collect, Clean, Integrate and Transform Healthcare Data based on specific disease.

2 Perform Exploratory data analysis of Healthcare Data.

3 AI for medical diagnosis based on MRI/X-ray data.

4 AI for medical prognosis .

5 Natural language Entity Extraction from medical reports.

Predict disease risk from Patient data.

6
Medical Reviews Analysis from social media data.
7

8 Explainable AI in healthcare for model interpretation.

Mini Project-Design and implement innovative web/mobile based AI application using Healthcare
9
Data.
175
 Documentation and Presentation of Mini Project.
10

Useful Links:
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/introduction-tensorflow?specialization=tensorflow-in-practice
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/convolutional-neural-networks-tensorflow?specialization=tensorflow-in-practice
3 https://datarade.ai/data-categories/electronic-health-record-ehr-data
4 https://www.cms.gov/Medicare/E-Health/EHealthRecords
5 https://www.coursera.org/learn/tensorflow-sequences-time-series-and-prediction?specialization=tensorflow-in-practice

Term Work:
1 Term work should consist of 8 experiments and a Mini Project.
2 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory
work and minimum passing marks in term work.
3 Total 25 Marks (Experiments: 10-Marks, Mini Project-10 Marks, Attendance Theory & Practical: 05-
marks)
Oral & Practical exam
1 Based on the entire syllabus of AI ML for Healthcare

176
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Data Science

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

177
 University of Mumbai
Data Science
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme and Marks Credit Scheme
Hrs / Week
Course Code &
Course Title

Assessment
Year & Sem

Term Work
Seminar /

End Sem
Practical

Practical
Internal
Tutorial

Credits
Theory

Oral /
Exam

Total
TE HDSC501:
Sem Mathematics
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
V for Data
Science
Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HDSC601:
Sem Statistical
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Learning for
Data Science
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

BE HDSC701:
Sem Data Science
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VII for Health and
Social Care
HDSSBL701:
Data Science
for Health and -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Social Care:
Lab
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HDSC801:
Sem Text, Web and
04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Social Media
Analytics
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

178
 Data Science: Sem V
Course Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Name Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HDSC501 Mathematics
for Data 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Science

Course Course Examination Scheme

Code Name Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem. Oral
Exam.
HDSC501 Mathematics
for Data 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
Science

Course Prerequisites:
1 Applied Mathematics, Discrete Mathematics
Course Objectives:
1 To build an intuitive understanding of Mathematics and relating it to Data Analytics.
2 To provide a strong foundation for probabilistic and statistical analysis mostly used in varied applications in
Engineering.
3 To focus on exploring the data with the help of graphical representation and drawing conclusions.
4 To explore optimization and dimensionality reduction techniques.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Use linear algebra concepts to model, solve, and analyze real-world problems.
2 Apply probability distributions and sampling distributions to various business problems.
3 Select an appropriate graph representation for the given data analysis.
4 Apply exploratory data analysis to some real data sets and provide interpretations via relevant visualization
5 Analyze various optimization techniques for data analysis.
6 Describe Dimension Reduction Algorithms in analytics

Module Topics Hours.

1.0 Linear Algebra 05
1.1 Vectors and Matrices, Solving Linear equations, The four Fundamental Subspaces,
Eigenvalues and Eigen Vectors, The Singular Value Decomposition (SVD).
2.0 Probability and Statistics 09
2.1 Introduction, Random Variables and their probability Distribution, Random Sampling,
Sample Characteristics and their Distributions, Chi-Square, t-, and F-Distributions: Exact
Sampling Distributions, Sampling from a Bivariate Normal Distribution, The Central
Limit Theorem.
3.0 Introduction to Graphs 10

179
 3.1 Quantitative vs. Qualitative data, Types of Quantitative data: Continuous data, Discrete
data, Types of Qualitative data: Categorical data, Binary data, Ordinary data, Plotting
data using Bar graph, Pie chart, Histogram, Stem and Leaf plot, Dot plot, Scatter plot,
Time-series graph, Exponential graph, Logarithmic graph, Trigonometric graph,
Frequency distribution graph.
4.0 Exploratory Data Analysis 09
4.1 Need of exploratory data analysis, cleaning and preparing data, Feature engineering,
Missing values, understand dataset through various plots and graphs, draw
conclusions, deciding appropriate machine learning models.
5.0 Optimization Techniques 10
5.1 Types of optimization-Constrained and Unconstrained optimization, Methods of
Optimization-Numerical Optimization, Bracketing Methods-Bisection Method, False
Position Method, Newton’s Method, Steepest Descent Method, Penalty Function
Method.
6.0 Dimension Reduction Algorithms 05
6.1 Introduction to Dimension Reduction Algorithms, Linear Dimensionality Reduction:
Principal component analysis, Factor Analysis, Linear discriminant analysis.
6.2 Non-Linear Dimensionality Reduction: Multidimensional Scaling, Isometric Feature
Mapping. Minimal polynomial
Total 48

Text Books:
1 Linear Algebra for Everyone,
2 Gilbert Strang, Wellesley Cambridge Press.
3 An Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Vijay Rohatgi, Wiley Publication
4 An introduction to Optimization, Second Edition, Wiley-Edwin Chong, Stainslaw Zak.
5 Mathematics for Machine Learning, Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, Cheng Soon Ong, Cambridge
University Press.
6 Exploratory Data Analysis, John Tukey, Princeton University and Bell Laboratories.
References:
1 Introduction to Linear Algebra, Gilbert Strang.
2 Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig
3 Mehryar Mohri, Afshin Rostamizadeh, and Ameet Talwalkar. Foundations of Machine Learning. MIT Press,
2018.
4 Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David. Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms.
Cambridge University Press, 2014
5 Last updated on Sep 9, 2018.
6 Mathematics and Programming for Machine Learning with R, William B. Claster, CRC Press,2020
Useful Links:
1 https://math.mit.edu/~gs/linearalgebra/
2 https://www.coursera.org/learn/probability-theory-statistics
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/111/105/111105090/
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_ma01/preview
5 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mathematics/18-06-linear-algebra-spring-2010/video-lectures/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
180
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test when
additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions will be
asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the
syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

181
 Data Science: Sem VI
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HDSC601 Statistical Learning
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
for Data Science

Course Course Name Examination Scheme

Code Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and Oral
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem.
Exam.
HDSC601 Statistical Learning
20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
for Data Science

Course Prerequisites:
1 Engineering Mathematics, Probability and Statistics
Course Objectives:
1 To understand basic statistical foundations for roles of Data Scientist.
2 To develop problem-solving skills.
3 To infer about the population parameters using sample data and perform hypothesis testing.
4 To understand importance and techniques of predicting a relationship between data and determine
the goodness of model fit.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Develop various visualizations of the data in hand.
2 Analyze a real-world problem and solve it with the knowledge gained from sampling and probability
distributions.
3 Analyze large data sets and perform data analysis to extract meaningful insights.
4 Develop and test a hypothesis about the population parameters to draw meaningful conclusions.
5 Fit a regression model to data and use it for prediction.

Module
Topics Hours.
No.
1.0 Introduction 08
1.1 Data and Statistics: Elements, Variables, and Observations, Scales of
Measurement, Categorical and Quantitative Data, Cross-Sectional and Time
Series Data, Descriptive Statistics, Statistical Inference, Descriptive Statistics:
Tabular and Graphical Summarizing Categorical Data, Summarizing
Quantitative Data, Cross Tabulations and Scatter Diagram.
1.2 Descriptive Statistics: Numerical Measures: Measures of Location, Measures
of Variability, Measures of Distribution Shape, Relative Location, and Detecting
Outliers, Box Plot, Measures of Association Between Two Variables

182
2.0 Probability 08
2.1 Probability : Experiments, Counting Rules, and Assigning Probabilities, Events
and Their Probabilities, Complement of an Event, Addition Law
Independent Events, Multiplication Law, Baye’s theorem
2.2 Discrete Probability Distributions
Random Variables, Discrete Probability Distributions, Expected Value and
Variance, Binomial Probability Distribution, Poisson Probability Distribution
2.3 Continuous Probability Distributions: Uniform Probability Distribution, Normal
Curve, Standard Normal Probability Distribution, Computing Probabilities for
Any Normal Probability Distribution
3.0 Sampling and Sampling Distributions 05
3.1 Sampling from a Finite Population, Sampling from an Infinite Population, Other
Sampling Methods, Stratified Random Sampling, Cluster Sampling, Systematic
Sampling, Convenience Sampling, Judgment Sampling
3.2 Interval Estimation: Population Mean: Known, Population Mean: Unknown,
Determining the Sample Size, Population Proportion
4.0 Hypothesis Tests 05
4.1 Developing Null and Alternative Hypotheses, Type I and Type II Errors,
Population Mean: Known Population Mean: Unknown Inference About Means
and Proportions with Two Populations-Inferences About Population Variances,
Inferences About a Population Variance, Inferences About Two Population
Variances
4.2 Tests of Goodness of Fit and Independence, Goodness of Fit Test: A Multinomial
Population, Test of Independence
5.0 Regression 08
5.1 Simple Linear Regression: Simple Linear Regression Model, Regression Model
and Regression Equation, Estimated Regression Equation, Least Squares
Method, Coefficient of Determination, Correlation Coefficient, Model
Assumptions, testing for Significance, Using the Estimated Regression Equation
for Estimation and Prediction Residual Analysis: Validating Model Assumptions,
Residual Analysis: Outliers and Influential Observations
5.2 Multiple Regression: Multiple Regression Model, Least Squares Method,
Multiple Coefficient of Determination, Model Assumptions, Testing for
Significance, Categorical Independent Variables, Residual Analysis
6.0 Time Series Analysis and Forecasting 05
6.1 Time Series Patterns, Forecast Accuracy, Moving Averages and Exponential
Smoothing, Trend Projection, Seasonality and Trend and Time Series
Decomposition
6.2 Nonparametric Methods
Sign Test, Wilcoxon Signed-Rank Test, Mann-Whitney-Wilcoxon Test, Kruskal-
Wallis Test, Rank Correlation
Total 48

183
Text Books:
1 https://static1.squarespace.com/static/5ff2adbe3fe4fe33db902812/t/6009dd9fa7bc363aa822d2c7/
1611259312432/ISLR+Seventh+Printing.pdf
2 Data Science from Scratch, FIRST PRINCIPLES WITH PYTHON, O’Reilly, Joel Grus,
3 Data Science from Scratch (oreillystatic.com)
4 Practical Time Series Analysis, Prediction with statistics and Machine Learning, O’Reilly, Aileen
Nielsen [DOWNLOAD] O'Reilly Practical Time Series Analysis PDF (lunaticai.com)
5 R for data science: Import, Tidy, Transform, Visualize, And Model Data, O’Reilly , Garrett Grolemund,
Hadley Wickham
6 Python for Data Analysis, 2nd Edition, O'Reilly Media, Wes McKinney.
7 https://static1.squarespace.com/static/5ff2adbe3fe4fe33db902812/t/6009dd9fa7bc363aa822d2c7/
1611259312432/ISLR+Seventh+Printing.pdf
References:
1 Data Science for Dummies Paperback, Wiley Publications, Lillian Pierson
2 Storytelling with Data: A Data Visualization, Guide for Business Professionals, Wiley Publications,
Cole Nussbaumer Knaflic
3 Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, Cengage Publications Jay L. Devore.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class
test when additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions
will be asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned
in the syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

184
 Data Science: Sem VII
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Hours)
Theory Pract Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
ical
HDSC701 Data Science for Health
04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
and Social Care

Course Course Name Examination Scheme

Code Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and Oral
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem.
Exam.
HDSC701 Data Science for Health
20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
and Social Care

Course Prerequisites:
Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning
Course Objectives: The course aims
1 To gain perspective of Data Science for Health and Social Care.
2 To understand different techniques of Biomedical Image Analysis.
3 To learn NLP techniques for processing Clinical text.
4 To understand the role of social media analytics for Healthcare data .
5 To learn advanced analytics techniques for Healthcare Data.
6 To investigate the current scope, potential, limitations, and implications of data science and its applications for
healthcare.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Identify sources and structure of healthcare data.
2 Apply structured lifecycle approach for handling Healthcare data science projects.
3 Analyze the data, create models, and identify insights from Healthcare data.
4 Apply various data analysis and visualization techniques for Healthcare and social media data.
5 Apply various algorithms and develop models for Healthcare data science projects.
6 To Provide data science solutions for solving problems of Health and Social Care.

Module Topics Hours.

1.0 Data Science for Healthcare 05
1.1 Introduction, Healthcare Data Sources and Data Analytics for Healthcare, Applications
and Practical Systems for Healthcare.
1.2 Electronic Health Records(EHR), Components of EHR, Benefits of EHR, Barriers to
Adopting EHR, Challenges of using EHR data, Phenotyping Algorithms
2.0 Biomedical Image Analysis 06
2.1 Biomedical Imaging Modalities, Object detection ,Image segmentation, Image
Registration, Feature Extraction
2.2 Mining of Sensor data in Healthcare, Challenges in Healthcare Data Analysis
2.3 Biomedical Signal Analysis, Genomic Data Analysis for Personalized Medicine.

185
3.0 Data Science and Natural Language Processing for Clinical Text 06
3.1 NLP, Mining information from Clinical Text, Information Extraction, Rule Based
Approaches, Pattern based algorithms, Machine Learning Algorithms.
3.2 Clinical Text Corpora and evaluation metrics, challenges in processing clinical reports,
Clinical Applications.
4.0 Social Media Analytics for Healthcare 06
4.1 Social Media analysis for detection and tracking of Infectious Disease outbreaks.
4.2 Outbreak detection, Social Media Analysis for Public Health Research, Analysis of
Social Media Use in Healthcare.
5.0 Advanced Data Analytics for Healthcare 08
5.1 Review of Clinical Prediction Models, Temporal Data Mining for Healthcare Data
5.2 Visual Analytics for Healthcare Data, Information Retrieval for Healthcare- Data
Publishing Methods in Healthcare.
6.0 Data Science Practical Systems for Healthcare 08
6.1 Data Analytics for Pervasive Health, Fraud Detection in Healthcare
6.2 Data Analytics for Pharmaceutical discoveries, Clinical Decision Support Systems
6.3 Computer-Assisted Medical Image Analysis Systems- Mobile Imaging and Analytics
for Biomedical Data.
Total 48

Textbooks:
1 Chandan K. Reddy and Charu C Aggarwal, “Healthcare data analytics”, Taylor & Francis, 2015.
2 Hui Yang and Eva K. Lee, “Healthcare Analytics: From Data to Knowledge to Healthcare Improvement, Wiley,
2016.
References:
1 Madsen, L. B. (2015). Data-driven healthcare: how analytics and BI are transforming the industry. Wiley India
Private Limited
2 Strome, T. L., & Liefer, A. (2013). Healthcare analytics for quality and performance improvement. Hoboken,
NJ, USA: Wiley
3 McNeill, D., & Davenport, T. H. (2013). Analytics in Healthcare and the Life Sciences: Strategies,
Implementation Methods, and Best Practices. Pearson Education.
4 Rachel Schutt and Cathy O’Neil, “Doing Data Science”, O’Reilly Media
5 Joel Grus, Data Science from Scratch: First Principles with Python, O'Reilly Media
6 EMC Education Services,”Data Science and Big Data Analytics”,Wiley

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class test when
additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions will be
asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
186
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned in the
syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

187
 Data Science: Sem VIII
Course Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Code Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HDSC801 Text, Web and
Social Media 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Analytics

Course Course Name Examination Scheme

Code Theory Marks Exam Term Practical Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work and
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem. Oral
Exam.
HDSC801 Text, Web and
Social Media 20 20 20 80 03 -- -- 100
Analytics

Course Prerequisites:
Python, Data Mining
Course Objectives: The course aims
1 To have a strong foundation on text, web and social media analytics.
2 To understand the complexities of extracting the text from different data sources and analysing it.
3 To enable students to solve complex real-world problems using sentiment analysis and Recommendation
systems.
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Extract Information from the text and perform data pre-processing
2 Apply clustering and classification algorithms on textual data and perform prediction.
3 Apply various web mining techniques to perform mining, searching and spamming of web data.
4 Provide solutions to the emerging problems with social media using behaviour analytics and
Recommendation systems.
5 Apply machine learning techniques to perform Sentiment Analysis on data from social media.

Module
Topics Hours.
No.
1.0 Introduction 06
1.1 Introduction to Text Mining: Introduction, Algorithms for Text Mining, Future
Directions

1.2 Information Extraction from Text: Named Entity Recognition, Relation Extraction,
Unsupervised Information Extraction

1.3 Text Representation: tokenization, stemming, stop words, NER, N-gram modelling

2.0 Clustering and Classification 10

188
 2.1 Text Clustering: Feature Selection and Transformation Methods, distance based
Clustering Algorithms, Word and Phrase based Clustering, Probabilistic document
Clustering

2.2 Text Classification: Feature Selection, Decision tree Classifiers, Rule-based Classifiers,
Probabilistic based Classifiers, Proximity based Classifiers.

2.3 Text Modelling: Bayesian Networks, Hidden Markovian Models, Markov random
Fields, Conditional Random Fields

Web-Mining:
3.0 05
3.1 Introduction to Web-Mining: Inverted indices and Compression, Latent Semantic
Indexing, Web Search,

3.2 Meta Search: Using Similarity Scores, Rank Positons

3.3 Web Spamming: Content Spamming, Link Spamming, hiding Techniques, and
Combating Spam

Web Usage Mining:

4.0 05
4.1 Data Collection and Pre-processing, Sources and types of Data, Data Modelling,
Session and Visitor Analysis, Cluster Analysis and Visitor segmentation, Association
and Correlation Analysis, Analysis of Sequential and Navigational Patterns,
Classification and Prediction based on Web User Transactions.
5.0 Social Media Mining: 05
5.1 Introduction, Challenges, Types of social Network Graphs

5.2 Mining Social Media: Influence and Homophily, Behaviour Analytics,

Recommendation in Social Media: Challenges, Classical recommendation Algorithms,
Recommendation using Social Context, Evaluating recommendations.
Opinion Mining and Sentiment Analysis:
6.0 08
6.1 The problem of opinion mining,

6.2 Document Sentiment Classification: Supervised, Unsupervised

6.3 Opinion Lexicon Expansion: Dictionary based, Corpus based

6.4 Opinion Spam Detection: Supervised Learning, Abnormal Behaviours, Group Spam
Detection.

Total 48

Textbooks:
1 Daniel Jurafsky and James H. Martin, “Speech and Language Processing,” 3rd edition, 2020
2 Charu. C. Aggarwal, Cheng Xiang Zhai, Mining Text Data, Springer Science and Business Media, 2012.
3 BingLiu, “Web Data Mining-Exploring Hyperlinks, Contents, and Usage Data”, Springer, Second Edition, 2011.

189
4 Reza Zafarani, Mohammad Ali Abbasiand Huan Liu, “Social Media Mining- An Introduction”, Cambridge
University Press, 2014

Assessment:
Internal Assessment: (20)
1 Assessment consists of two class tests of 20 marks each.
2 The first-class test is to be conducted when approx. 40% syllabus is completed and second-class
test when additional 40% syllabus is completed.
3 Duration of each test shall be one hour.
End Semester Theory Examination: (80)
1 Question paper will comprise of total 06 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2 Question No: 01 will be compulsory and based on the entire syllabus wherein 4 to 5 sub-questions
will be asked.
3 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature and randomly selected from all the modules.
4 Weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture hours as mentioned
in the syllabus.
5 Total 04 questions need to be solved.

190
 Data Science: Sem VII
Course Code Course Name Teaching Scheme (Contact Credits Assigned
Hours)
Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
HDSSBL701 Data Science for
Health and Social -- 04 -- -- 02 -- 02
Care: Lab

Course Code Course Name Examination Scheme

Theory Marks Exam Term Oral Total
Internal Assessment End Duration Work
Test1 Test2 Avg. Sem.
Exam.
HDSSBL701 Data Science for
Health and Social 50 50 100
Care: Lab

Course Prerequisites:
Python
Course Outcomes:
After successful completion of the course, the student will be able to:
1 Students will be able to, Identify sources of data, suggest methods for collecting, sharing and analyzing
Healthcare data.
2 Students will be able to Clean, integrate and transform healthcare data.
3 Students will be able to apply various data analysis and visualization techniques
on healthcare data.
4 Students will be able to apply various algorithms and develop models for healthcare data Analytics .
5 Students will be able to implement data science solutions for solving healthcare problems.

Suggested Experiments:
Sr.
Name of the Experiment
No.
Introduction
1 Clean, Integrate and Transform Electronic Healthcare Records.

2 Apply various data analysis and visualization techniques on EHR.

3 Bio Medical Image Preprocessing, Segmentation.

4 Bio Medical Image Analytics.

5 Text Analytics for Clinical Text Data.

Diagnose disease risk from Patient data.

6
Social Media Analytics for outbreak prediction/ Drug review analytics.
7

8 Visual Analytics for Healthcare Data.

191
9 Implement an innovative Data Science application based on Healthcare Data.
Documentation and Presentation of Mini Project.
10

Useful Links:
1 http://openclassroom.stanford.edu/MainFolder/CoursePage.php?course=MachineLearning
2 http://www.cse.wustl.edu/~kilian/cse517a2010/
3 https://datarade.ai/data-categories/electronic-health-record-ehr-data
4 https://www.cms.gov/Medicare/E-Health/EHealthRecords
5 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_ee40

Term Work:
1 Term work should consist of 8 experiments and a Mini Project.
2 The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures satisfactory performance of laboratory
work and minimum passing marks in term work.
3 Total 25 Marks (Experiments: 10-Marks, Mini Project-10 Marks, Attendance Theory & Practical: 05-
marks)
Oral & Practical exam
1 Based on the entire syllabus of AI ML for Healthcare

192
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Internet of Things

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023

193
 University of Mumbai
Internet of Things
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Year &
Course Title Internal End
Sem Seminar/ Term Oral/
Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HIoTC501:
TE IoT Sensor 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Technologies
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HIoTC601:
Sem. 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
IoT System Design
VI Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HIoTC701:
BE Dynamic Paradigm 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. in IoT
VII HIoTSBL601:
Interfacing &
-- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Programming with
IoTLab (SBL)
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HIoTC801:
Industrial IoT 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem.
VIII
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04=18

194
 Internet of Things: Sem V

Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Oral
HIoTC501 IoT Sensor 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Technologies

Examination Scheme
Course Theory Marks
Course Title Term
Code Internal assessment End Sem. Practical Oral Total
Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg Exam
HIoTC501 IoT Sensor
Technologies 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To provide in depth knowledge about the sensing mechanism.
2 To make students understand about the use of sensors in design of IoT based systems.
3 To familiarize students various types of sensors used to measure the physical quantities.
4 To develop reasonable level of competence in the design, construction and development of sensor
suitable to the system requirements.
5 To Introduce students the current state of the art in sensor technology.
6 To familiarize students with electronics used to interface with sensors.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Understand the sensing mechanism and structural details of sensors. L1, L2

2 Explain principles and working of the sensors. L1,L2

3 Evaluate the performance of various types of sensors. L5
4 Select the sensor suitable to system requirements. L5

5 Interface the sensors with microcontrollers and Arduino L6

6 Understand the current state of the art in sensor technology. L2

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. Module Detailed Content Hours CO Mapping
No.

195
0 Prerequisite 1. Basics of Electrical and Electronics Engineering 2 CO 1, CO2, CO3,
2. Applied Mechanics CO4, CO5
3. Applied Physics, Applied Chemistry
I Sensor Sensor Fundamentals and Properties: Introduction to IoT, 8 CO1, CO2
Fundamental Need for sensors in IoT, Data Acquisition – sensor
s and characteristics – electric charges, fields, potentials –
Properties capacitance – magnetism – inductance – resistance –
piezoelectric – pyroelectric – Hall effect thermoelectric
effects – sound waves – heat transfer – light – dynamic
models of sensors. Need of actuators, all types of actuators
and their working. Identification of sensor and actuator for
real-time application

Self-learning Topics: IoT Systems, Transfer function and

modelling of sensors
II Optical, 8 CO1, CO2, CO3,
radiation and Optical, radiation and Displacement sensors Photosensors: CO4
Displacement Photodiode, phototransistor and photo resistor, imaging
sensors sensors, UV detectors, Basic Characteristics of radiation
sensors, Thermal infrared sensors, X-ray and Nuclear
Radiation Sensors, Fibre Optic Sensors, Capacitive and
Inductive Displacement Sensor, Electromagnetism and
Inductance, Magnetic Field Sensors

Self-learning Topics: Optical sources and detectors, Sensors

based on polymer optical fibers, Micro-structured and solid
fibers
III Presence, Presence, force, Pressure, Flow Sensors 9 CO1, CO2, CO3,
force, CO4
Potentiometric Sensors, Piezoresistive Sensors, Capacitive
Pressure,
Sensors for presence, Inductive and Magnetic Sensors, Strain
Flow Sensors
gages, Pressure sensitive films, piezoelectric force sensor,
Piezoelectric Cables, Concept of Pressure, Mercury Pressure
Sensor, Bellows, Membranes, and Thin Plates, Piezo resistive
Sensors, Capacitive Sensors, VRP Sensors, Optoelectronic
Pressure Sensors, Indirect Pressure Sensor, Vacuum Sensors,
Basics of Flow Dynamics, Pressure Gradient Technique,
Thermal Transport Sensors, Ultrasonic Sensors, Level Sensors

Self-learning Topics: Vibration energy harvesting with

Piezoelectric, MEMS systems. Develop a sensor system for
force measurement using piezoelectric transducer. Develop
Resistance Temperature Detector
IV Humidity, Humidity, Moisture Chemical and Biological Sensors 8 CO1, CO2, CO3,
Moisture CO4, CO5
Microphones: Characteristics, Resistive, condenser, Electret,
Chemical and
Optical, Pizoelectric, Dynamic,
Biological
Sensors Concept of humidity, Capacitive Humidity Sensors, Resistive
Humidity Sensors, Thermal Conductivity Sensors, Optical
Hygrometers, Oscillating Hygrometer, Soil Moisture

196
 Chemical Sensor Characteristics, Electrical and
Electrochemical Sensors, Photoionization Detectors, Physical
Transducers, Spectrometers, Thermal Sensors, Optical
Transducers, Multi-sensor Arrays

Artificial Microsystems for Sensing Airflow, Temperature, and

Humidity by Combining MEMS and CMOS Technologies

Self-learning Topics: Biosensors for biomedical applications

V Interface Interface Electronic Circuits 8 CO1, CO2, CO5
Electronic
Introduction, Signal Conditioners, Sensor Connections,
Circuits
Excitation Circuits, Analog to Digital Converters, Integrated
Interfaces, Data Transmission, Noise in Sensors and Circuits,
Batteries for Low-Power Sensors, Types of Single board
computers, various sensor interfacing with Arduino,
Embedded C Programming. data communication protocol
interfacing, study the properties of LDR, Build a simple LED
light intensity controller, Linux on Raspberry Pi, Interfaces, and
Programming.
Self-learning Topics: Python Programming to interface
sensors
VI Current Current Trends in sensors and Technology 9 CO1, CO2, CO3,
Trends in CO4, CO5, CO6
Smart Sensors: Introduction, Primary sensors, Excitation,
sensors and
Amplification, Filters, Converters, Compensation, Information
Technology
Coding/Processing, Data Communication, Standards for Smart
Sensor Interface, The Automation

Sensor Technologies: Introduction, Film Sensors, Thick Film

Sensors, Thin Film Sensors, Semiconductor IC Technology—
Standard Methods, Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS),
Nano-sensors

Sensor Applications: Onboard Automobile sensors, Home

appliances sensors, Aerospace Sensors, Sensors for
Environmental Monitoring

Self-learning Topics: Energy Harvesting, Self-powered

Wireless Sensing in ground, Ground penetrating sensors

Text Books:
1. Jacob Fraden, “Hand Book of Modern Sensors: physics, Designs and Applications”, 2015, 3rd edition,
Springer, New York.
2. Jon. S. Wilson, “Sensor Technology Hand Book”, 2011, 1st edition, Elsevier, Netherland
3. D. Patranabis – Sensor and Transducers (2e) Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003
4. Vijay Madisetti and Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach)”,1st Edition, VPT, 2014

References:
1. Edited by Qusay F Hasan, Atta ur rehman Khan, Sajid A madani, “Internet of Things Challenges, Advances,
and Application”, CRC Press
197
 2. Triethy HL - Transducers in Electronic and Mechanical Designs, Mercel Dekker, 2003
3. Gerd Keiser,”Optical Fiber Communications”, 2017, 5th edition, McGraw-Hill Science, Delhi.
4. John G Webster, Halit Eren, “Measurement, Instrumentation and sensor Handbook”, 2014, 2nd edition, CRC
Press, Taylor and Fransis Group, New York.
5. Adrian McEwen, “Designing the Internet of Things”, Wiley Publishers, 2013, ISBN: 978-1-118-43062-0
6. Nathan Ida, “Sensors, Actuators and their Interfaces: A Multidisciplinary Introduction”, Second Edition, IET
Control, Robotics and Sensors Series 127, 2020

Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108123/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108098/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/noc/courses/noc19/SEM2/noc19-ee41/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106165/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

198
 Internet of Things: Sem VI

Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Oral
HIoTC601 IoT System 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04
Design

Examination Scheme

Course Theory Marks

Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Code Practical Oral Total
Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2 Avg. Exam
HIoTC601 IoT System
Design 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To learn basic principles, concepts, and technologies for internet of things.
2 To understand various architectures of IOT.
3 To train the students to build IoT systems using sensors, single board computers and open source IoT
platform for given application.
4 To learn and implement various networking and communication protocols.
5 To design and analyze IoT for given applications.
6 To Evaluate performance of given IoT system.

Course Outcomes:
Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Able to explain principles, concepts, and technologies for internet of things. L1, L2
2 Able to identify various building blocks of IoT system L1,L2

3 Able to analyze and evaluate various networking and communication protocols used L3,L4
in IoT system
4 Able to select appropriate interface for given application L3
5 Able to design and analyze IoT system for given application L4,L5
6 Able to evaluate performance of given IOT System L5

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping

199
 0 Prerequisite Comment (Prerequisite syllabus should not be considered for paper 2 --
setting) Basics of Embedded System, IoT Sensors, Digital design

I Overview of What is IoT System? IoT Impact, Current Trends in IoT, IoT Challenges, 6 CO1, CO2
IoT System Comparing IoT Architectures, A Simplified IoT Architecture, The Core
IoT Functional Stack How are IoT Systems different from traditional
system Values and Uses of IoT Functional View and Infrastructure
view of IoT Systems
Self-learning Topics: Understanding the Issues and Challenges of a
More Connected World
II Networking OSI Model for the IoT/M2M System Lightweight M2M 8 CO3
Protocols Communication Protocols, Internet based Communications, IP
addressing in IoT, Network Model, TCP & UDP, Client-Server
architecture
Self-learning Topics: How to choose correct protocol for our network.
III Communicat IoT Edge to Cloud protocols: HTTP, REST APIs, WebSocket, MQTT, 10 CO3,CO4
ion Protocols COAP, Comparison of Protocols.M2M Communication Protocols,
Bluetooth BR/EDR and Bluetooth low energy. RFID IoT System , RFID
IoT Network Architecture, ZigBee IP/ZigBee SE2.0, Wifi(WLAN),
Message Communication protocols for connected devices Data
exchange formats: JSON & XML, Node-Red, Flow control using Node-
Red, learning the different nodes of Node-RED for implementing the
Communication Protocols
Self-learning Topics: Types of Communication
IV Sensor Digital Interfaces: UART, Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI), I2C (Inter- 10 CO4
Interfaces Integrated Circuit), Controller Area Network (CAN), Middleware
Technologies, Communication Protocols and Models. Practical
Components Programming with interface in Arduino, MBed and
Raspberry Pi
Self-learning Topics: SMART SENSOR INTERFACES
V Design Design solution for ubiquitionos and utility, Interface design for user 8 CO5
principles for experience, Designing for data privacy, Interfacing – Apps & Webs,
prototyping Designing for Affordability, Cost v/s Ease of Prototyping, Prototypes
and Production, Selection of embedded platform, Prototype and
Mass personalization, Open Source v/s Closed Source ,Amplification
and Signal Conditioning- Integrated Signal Conditioning- Digital
conversion- MCU Control MCUs for Sensor Interface- Techniques and
System Considerations- Sensor Integration
Self-learning Topics: Principles for Prototyping and moving towards
Product Development
VI IoT, case Arduino Programming for Ethernet and Wifi connectivity, Networking 8 CO6
studies and Data logging with Raspberry Pi Applications-Agriculture, Medical,
Fire detection, Air pollution prediction, Earthquake early detection;
for smart environmental care, smart traveling, Home Automation
Self-learning Topics: IoT enabled Business solution in Supply Chain
Text Books:
1. S. Misra, A. Mukherjee, and A. Roy, 2020. Introduction to IoT. Cambridge University Press.

200
2. Adrian McEwen and Hakim Cassimally, ―Designing the Internet of Things‖, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, UK, 2014.
3. Milan Milenkovic, Internet of Things: Concepts and System Design, Springer International Publishing,May
2020cation
4. Dr.Raj Kamal,Internet of Things(IoT) , Architecture and Design Principles.McGraw Hill Education.

References:

1. David Hanes, Gonzalo Salgueiro, Patrick Grossetete, Robert Barton, Jerome Henry,"IoT Fundamentals:
Networking Technologies, Protocols, and Use Cases for the Internet of Things

2. N. Ida, Sensors, Actuators and Their Interfaces, Scitech Publishers, 2014.

3. Editors OvidiuVermesan Peter Friess,'Internet of Things – From Research and Innovation to Market

4. Dr. Guillaume Girardin , Antoine Bonnabel, Dr. Eric Mounier, 'Technologies Sensors for the Internet of Things
Businesses & Market Trends 2014 -2024',Yole Development Copyrights ,2014

Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

201
 Internet of Things: Sem VII

Course Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/ Tutorial Total
Code Oral
HIoTC701 Dynamic Paradigm 03 -- -- 03 -- -- 03
in IoT

Course Course Title Examination Scheme

Code Theory Marks
Internal assessment Term
End Sem. Practical Oral Total
Avg. of 2 Work
Test1 Test 2 Exam
Tests
HIoTC701 Dynamic
20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100
Paradigm in IoT

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To explore the role of the cloud in Internet of Things deployment.
2 To introduce the usage of different machine learning algorithms on IoT Data.
3 To explore data analytics and data visualization on IoT Data.
4 To explore the role of Fog computing in Internet of Things.
5 To explore design issues and working principles of various security measures and various standards for
secure communication in IoT.
6 To develop the ability to integrate IoT with Dev-ops.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Identify the need for the cloud in IoT deployment and describe different Cloud L1,L2
provider’s architecture.
2 Use and correlate machine learning techniques on IoT Data. L3,L4

3 Apply IoT analytics and data visualization. L3

4 Recognize the use of Fog Computing in the Internet of things. L1,L2
5 Explain the need of security measures in the Internet of Things. L4
6 Apply the knowledge of Dev-ops in IoT applications. L3

DETAILED SYLLABUS:
Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO
Mapping

202
0 Prerequisite Basics of Cloud Computing, Basics of Machine learning and 2 --
primitives of cryptography
I IoT and Cloud Computing Concept, Grid/SOA and Cloud Computing, Cloud 10 CO1
CLOUD Middleware
NIST’s SPI Architecture and Cloud Standards, The Cloud of Things--
The Internet of Things and Cloud Computing
The Cloud of Things Architecture-- Four Deployment Models,
Vertical Applications, Fifteen Essential Features, Four
Technological Pillars, Three Layers of IoT Systems, Foundational
Technological Enabler Cloud Providers and Systems -- Microsoft
Azure IoT, Amazon Web Services, Google’s cloud IoTs.

Self-learning Module: IBM Watson Cloud

II IoT and Advantages of IoT and Machine Learning Integration, 6 CO2
Machine Implementation of Supervised Algorithm- Regression (Linear and
Learning Logistic), SVM for IoT-Neural Network on case study: Agriculture and
IoT, Smart Home etc.

Self-Learning Module: Regression, SVM

III IoT and Data Defining IoT Analytics, IoT Analytics challenges, IoT analytics for the 8 CO3
Analytics cloud-Microsoft Azure overview– Strategies to organize Data for IoT
Analytics, Linked Analytics Data Sets, Managing Data lakes, The data
retention strategy. Communicating with Others- Visualization and
Dash boarding- Designing visual analysis for IoT data, creating a
dashboard –creating and visualizing alerts.
Self-learning Topics: Study real time case study on IoT Analytics.
IV IoT and Fog Fog computing Basics, The Hadoop philosophy for Fog computing, 8 CO4
Computing Fog Computing versus Edge Computing versus cloud computing,
Open Fog Reference Architecture Application services-- Application
support, Node management and software backplane, Hardware
virtualization, Open Fog node security, Network Accelerators
Compute, Storage Hardware platform infrastructure, Protocol
abstraction, Sensors, actuators, and control systems, Fog Topology.
Self-learning Module: Amazon Green grass and Lambda
(implementation)
V IoT and it’s Cyber security vernacular Attack and threat terms, Defense terms, 8 CO5
Security Anatomy of IoT cyber attacks – Mirai, Stuxnet, Chain Reaction,
Physical and hardware security, Root of Trust, Key management and
trusted platform modules, Processor and memory space, Storage
security, Network stack – Transport Layer Security, Software defined
perimeter, Software-Defined Perimeter architecture,

Self-learning Module: OWASP-Existing Security attacks and its

prevention methods.
VI IoT and Introduction to DevOps, DevOps application - business scenarios, 10 CO6
Devops DevOps process -- Source Code Management (SCM), Code review,
Configuration Management, Build management, Artifacts repository
management, Release management, Test automation, Continuous
integration, Continuous delivery, Continuous deployment,
Infrastructure as Code, Routine automation, Key application
performance monitoring/indicators. DevOps frameworks--DevOps
maturity life cycle, DevOps maturity map, DevOps progression
203
 framework/readiness model, DevOps maturity checklists, Agile
framework for DevOps process projects, Agile ways of development
Tool for IoT—Chef and Puppet, Setting up Chef and Puppet, Multi-tier
Application Deployment, NETCONF-YANG Case Studies- Steps for IoT
device management with NETCONF-YANG, Managing Smart irrigation
IoT system with NETCONF-YANG, Managing Home Intrusion
Detection IoT system with NETCONF-YANG
Self-learning Topics: Compare different tool of IoT.

Text Books:
1. The Internet of Things in the Cloud A Middleware Perspective, Honbo Zhou – CRC Publication.
2. Analytics for the Internet of Things (IoT), Andrew Minteer, Packt Publication 2017
3. Internet of Things- Hands on Approach, Arshdeep Bagha, Vijay Medisetti, Published by Arshdeep Bagha and Vijay
Medisetti,2014.
4. Hands-on DevOps, Sricharan Vadapalli, Packt Publication, 2017
5. Internet of things For Architects, Perry Lea Packt Publication,2018

References:
1. Enterprise Cloud Computing, Gautam Shroff, Cambridge,2010
2. Mastering Cloud Computing -Foundations and Applications Programming, Raj Kumar Buyya, Christian Vecchiola,
S. Thamarai Selvi, MK Publication, 2013.
3. Machine Learning in Action‖, Peter Harrington, DreamTech Press
4. Introduction to Machine Learning‖, Ethem Alpaydın, MIT Press
5. Learning AWS IoT- Effectively Manage Connected Devices on the AWS Cloud Using Services Such as AWS
Greengrass, AWS Button, Predictive Analytics and Machine Learning, Agus Kurniawan, Packt Publication,2018
6. Practical Dev-Ops, Joakim Verona, Packt Publication, 2016

Online References:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://hub.packtpub.com/25-datasets-deep-learning-iot/
2. https://data.world/datasets/iot
3. https://dashboard.healthit.gov/datadashboard/data.php
4. https://www.data.gov/
5. https://dev.socrata.com/data/
6. https://www.kaggle.com/
Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:

 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

204
 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)
 A total of four questions need to be answered

205
 Internet of Things: Sem VII

Teaching Scheme
(Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical & Tutorial Total
Oral
HIoTSBL701 Interfacing & -- 4 -- -- 2 -- 02
Programming
with IoT Lab (SBL)

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Code Course Title Internal assessment End Term Practical/
Total
Sem. Work Oral
Test1 Test 2 Avg. of 2 Tests
Exam
HIoTSBL701 Interfacing &
Programming with -- -- -- -- 50 50 100
IoT Lab (SBL)

Lab Objectives:

Sr. No. Lab Objectives

The Lab aims:
1 To Understand the definition and significance of the Internet of Things.
2 To Discuss the architecture, operation, and business benefits of an IoT solution.
3 To Examine the potential business opportunities that IoT can uncover.
4 To Explore the relationship between IoT, cloud computing, and DevOps.
5 To Identify how IoT differs from traditional data collection systems.
6 To Explore the interconnection and integration of the physical world and able to design & develop IOT
Devices.

Lab Outcomes:
Sr. No. Lab Outcomes Cognitive levels of
attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of lab, learner/student will be able to:
1 Adapt different techniques for data acquisition using various IoT sensors for L6
different applications.
2 Demonstrate the working of actuators based on the collected data. L2

3 Use different IoT simulators and correlate working of IoT protocols. L3

4 Adapt different techniques for Integrating IoT services to other third-party Clouds. L6
5 Execute DevOps methodologies for continuous integration and continuous L3
deployment of IoT application.
6 Implement IoT protocols like MQTT for communication to realize the revolution of L3
internet in mobile devices, cloud and sensor networks.

Prerequisite:
206
IoT introduction course: Basics of IoT, Introduction to Embedded systems

Hardware & Software Requirements:

Hardware Requirements Software Requirements Other Requirements

PC With Following Configuration 1. Windows or Linux Desktop OS 1. Internet Connection for

1. Intel PIV Processor installing additional packages if
2. DeVops
2. 4 GB RAM required
3. 500 GB Harddisk 3.Python
4. Network interface card
5. Sensors 4. IoT Simulator/Emulator (open
6. IoT Kit (Arduino/ARM/Raspberry Pi) source)

This lab will describe the market around the Internet of Things (IoT), the technology used to build these kinds of
devices, how they communicate, how they store data, and the kinds of distributed systems needed to support
them. Divided into four main modules, we will learn by doing. We will start with simple examples and integrate
the techniques we learn into a class project in which we design and build an actual IoT system. The client will run
in an emulated ARM environment, communicating using common IoT protocols with a cloud enabled backend
system with DevOps integration.

Suggested List of Experiments

Sr. No. Detailed Content Hours LO
Mapping
1 To study and implement interfacing of different IoT sensors with Raspberry 4 LO1
Pi/Arduino/ModeMCU
2 To study and implement interfacing of actuators based on the data 4 LO2
collected using IoT sensors. (like led switch ON/OFF, stepper word)
3 To study and demonstrate Contiki OS for RPL (like Create 2 border router 4 LO3
and 10 REST clients, Access border router from other network (Simulator))
4 To study and demonstrate use of IoT simulators (like Beviswise) on any real 4 LO3
time device (LED/stepper motor)
5 Select any one case study (in a group of 2-3) and perform the experiments 8 LO4
5 to 10. The sample case studies can be as follows:

1. Smart home automation system

2. Healthcare management system
3. Smart traffic management system & so on…

Write a program on Raspberry Pi to push and retrieve the data from cloud
like thingspeak, thingsboard, AWS, Azure etc.
6 To install MySQL database on Raspberry Pi and perform basic SQL queries 6 LO4
for analysis data collected.
7 To study and implement IoT Data processing using Pandas. 4 LO4

207
 8 To study and implement Continuous Integration using Jenkins on IoT data 6 LO6
and also perform interfacing of Raspberry Pi into Jenkins.
9 To study and implement Continuous Deployment (Infrastructure as a code) 6 LO6
for IoT using Ansible.

10 To study MQTT Mosquitto server and write a program on 6 LO5

Arduino/Raspberry Pi to publish sensor data to MQTT broker.

Books / References:
1. Jake VanderPlas,“ Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly publication,2016
2. Joakim Verona,” Practical DevOps”, PACKT publishing, 2016
3.Honbo Zhou,” The internet of things in the cloud”, CRC press, Taylor and Francis group, 2012
4. Perry Lea,” Internet of things for architects”, PACKT publishing, 2018

Online Resources:
Sr. No. Website Name
1. https://spoken-tutorial.org/watch/Arduino/Introduction+to+Arduino/English/
2. https://pythonprogramming.net/introduction-raspberry-pi-tutorials/
3. https://iotbytes.wordpress.com/basic-iot-actuators/
4. http://www.contiki-os.org/
5. https://www.bevywise.com/iot-simulator/
6. https://mqtt.org/

Term Work:
The Term work shall consist of at least 10 practical based on the above list. The term work Journal must include at
least 2 assignments. The assignments should be based on real world applications which cover concepts from all above
list.

Term Work Marks: 50 Marks (Total marks) = 40 Marks (Experiment) + 5 Marks (Assignments/tutorial/write up) + 5
Marks (Attendance)

Practical & Oral Exam: An Oral & Practical exam will be held based on the above syllabus.

208
 Internet of Things: Sem VIII
Course Code Course Title Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical/Oral Tutorial Total
HIoTC801 Industrial IoT 04 -- -- 04 -- -- 04

Examination Scheme
Theory Marks
Course Code
Course Title Internal assessment End Term
Practical Oral Total
Avg. of 2 Sem. Work
Test1 Test 2
Tests Exam

HIoTC801 Industrial IoT 20 20 20 80 -- -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

Sr. No. Course Objectives

The course aims:
1 To learn the concepts of Industry 4.0 and IIOT.
2 To learn reference Architecture of IIOT.
3 To learn Industrial Data Transmission and Industrial Data Acquisition.
4 To learn middleware and WAN technologies.
5 To learn IIOT Block chain and Security.
6 To learn different applications and securities in IIOT.

Course Outcomes:

Sr. No. Course Outcomes Cognitive levels of

attainment as per
Bloom’s Taxonomy
On successful completion, of course, learner/student will be able to:
1 Understand the concepts of Industry 4.0 and IIOT. L1,L2
2 Understand reference Architecture of IIOT. L1,L2
3 Understand Industrial Data Transmission and Industrial Data Acquisition. L1,L2
4 Understand middleware and WAN technologies in IIOT. L1,L2
5 Understand the concepts of Blockchain and Security in IIOT. L1,L2
6 Apply security in IIOT applications. L3

DETAILED SYLLABUS:

Sr. No. Module Detailed Content Hours CO

Mapping

0 Prerequisite IOT Concepts, Sensor Technology, IOT Stack and Protocols, Design 02 --
IoT systems, WSN etc.

209
I Introduction Overview of Industry 4.0 and Industrial Internet of Things, Industry 06 CO1
4.0: Industrial Revolution: Phases of Development, Evolution of
Industry 4.0, Environment impacts of industrial revolution,
Industrial Internet, Basics of CPS, CPS and IIOT, Design
requirements of Industry 4.0, Drivers of Industry 4.0, Sustainability
Assessment of Industries, Smart Business Perspective, Cyber
security, Impacts of Industry 4.0, Industrial Internet of Things:
Basics, IIOT and Industry 4.0, Industrial Internet Systems, Industrial
Sensing, Industrial Processes, IIOT Challenges – Identifying Things
within the internet, Discovering Things and the Data they possess,
Managing massive amount of data, Navigating Connectivity
Outages, IIOT Edge - Leveraging the Power of Cloud Computing,
Communicating with Devices on the Edge, Determining a
Request/Response Model

Self-learning Topics: Study real time IIoT challenges in industry.

II IIOT The IIC Industrial Internet Reference Architecture - Industrial 08 CO2

Reference Internet Architecture Framework (IIAF),Industrial Internet
Architecture Viewpoints -Functional, Operational, Information Application and
Business Domain of IIAF.
The Three-Tier Topology, Key Functional Characteristics of
Connectivity.
Software Architectural Style for the Industrial Internet of Things -
Software Architecture Practice, Advanced Architectural Styles,
Systems of Systems, Challenges of Software Engineering in IIoT,
Principles for Software Architecture design in IIoT, The Principled
Decomposition, The Architectural Style

Self-learning Topics: Study IIoT Architecture.

III Industrial Introduction, (Features and Components of - Foundation Fieldbus, 10 CO3

Data Profibus, HART,Interbus, Bitbus, CC-Link, Modbus, Batibus,
Transmission DigitalSTROM, Controller Area Network, DeviceNet, LonWorks, ISA
and Industrial 100.11a, Wireless HART, LoRa and LoRaWAN) NB-IoT, IEEE
Data 802.11AH,
Acquisition Distributed Control System, PLC, SCADA

Self-learning Topics: Study SCADA, PLC in detail.

IV (From Industrial Application Perspective) 10 CO4

IIOT
Middleware Examining Middleware Transport Protocols (TCP/IP, UDP, RTP,
and WAN CoAP), Middleware Software Patterns (Publish Subscribe Pattern,
Technologies Delay Tolerant Networks),

Software Design Concepts – Application Programming Interface –

A Technical Perspective, Why Are APIs Important for Business?
Web Services,

210
 IIOT Middleware Platforms – Middleware Architecture

IIOT WAN Technologies and Protocols - IIoT Device Low-Power

WAN Optimized Technologies for M2M, SigFox,LoRaWAN,nWave,
Dash7 Protocol, Ingénue RPMA, Low Power Wi-Fi, LTE
Category-M, Weightless, Millimeter Radio

Self-learning Topics: Study different IIoT Middleware and WAN

Technologies.

V Blockchains and cryptocurrencies in IoT, Bitcoin (blockchain- 08 CO5

IIOT based), IOTA- distributed ledger (directed a cyclical graph-based),
Blockchain Government regulations and intervention, US Congressional Bill –
and Security Internet of Things (IoT) Cyber security Improvement Act of 2017,
Other governmental bodies, IoT security best practices, Holistic
security.

Self-learning Topics: Case study on IIoT Block chain and Security.

VI IIOT The IoT Security Lifecycle- 08 CO6

Applications
and Securities The secure IoT system implementation lifecycle, Implementation
and integration, IoT security CONOPS document, Network and
security integration, System security verification and validation
(V&V), Security training, Secure configurations, Operations and
maintenance, Managing identities, roles, and attributes, Security
monitoring, Penetration testing, Compliance monitoring, Asset
and configuration management, Incident management, Forensics,
Dispose, Secure device disposal and zeroization, Data purging,
Inventory control, Data archiving and records management
Securing the Industrial Internet - Security in Manufacturing, PLCs
and DCS, Securing the OT (Operation Technology), Network,
System Level: Potential Security Issues, Identity Access
Management
Develop New Business Models –
Adopt Smart Architectures and Technologies, Sensor-Driven
Computing, Industrial Analytics, Intelligent Machine Applications,
Transform the Workforce
Case Studies –
Healthcare Applications in Industries – Challenges associated with
Healthcare, Introduction, Smart Devices, Advanced technologies
used in Healthcare.
Inventory Management and Quality Control – Introduction,
Inventory Management and IIOT, Quality Control

Manufacturing Industry, Automotive Industry and Mining Industry

211
 Self-learning Topics: Study real time IIoT application.

Text Books:

1. “Industry 4.0: The Industrial Internet of Things”, by Alasdair Gilchrist (Apress)

2. “Introduction to Industrial Internet of Things and Industry 4.0”,by Sudip Misra, Chandana Roy And Anandarup
Mukherjee, CRC Press (Taylor & Francis Group)
3. “Internet of Things Principles and Paradigms”, by Rajkumar Buyya, Amir Vahid Dastjerdi, ELSEVIER Inc.
4. Internet of things For Architects, Perry Lea Packt Publication,2018

References:

1. “Practical Internet of Things Security”, by Brian Russell, Drew Van Duren (Packt Publishing)
2. “Industrial Internet of Things and Communications at the Edge”, by Tony Paine, CEO, Kepware Technologies
3. “Architectural Design Principles For Industrial Internet of Things”, Hasan Derhamy, Luleå University of
Technology, Graphic Production

Online References:

Sr. No. Website Name

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs69/preview
2. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/developing-industrial-iot
3. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/advanced-manufacturing-enterprise/the-industrial-
internet-of-things-iiot-59EvI
4. https://www.coursera.org/lecture/industrial-iot-markets-security/segment-12-
blockchains-l4aG9
Assessment:
Internal Assessment (IA) for 20 marks:
 IA will consist of Two Compulsory Internal Assessment Tests. Approximately 40% to 50% of syllabus
content must be covered in First IA Test and remaining 40% to 50% of syllabus content must be
covered in Second IA Test

 Question paper format

 Question Paper will comprise of a total of six questions each carrying 20 marks Q.1 will be
compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the syllabus

 Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (part (a) and part (b) of each question must be from
different modules. For example, if Q.2 has part (a) from Module 3 then part (b) must be from any
other Module randomly selected from all the modules)

 A total of four questions need to be answered

212
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Waste Technology

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

213
 University of Mumbai
Honours in Waste Technology
(With effect from 2022-23)

Year Course Code and Teaching Scheme Hours/ Examination Scheme and Marks Credit
and Course Title Week Scheme
Sem Theory Seminar/ Pract. Internal End Term Oral/
Tutorial. Assess Sem Work Pract Total Credits
ment Exam
HCWC501: Solid
And Hazardous
TE 4 – – 20 80 – – 100 4
Waste
Sem V Management

Total 4 – – 100 – – 100 4

Total Credits=04

HCWC601: Liquid
TE Effluent 4 – – 20 80 – – 100 4
Sem Management
VI
Total 4 – – 100 – – 100 4

Total Credits=04

HCWC701: Waste
4 – – 20 80 – – 100 4
Volorization I
BE
HCWSBL701:
Sem
Waste Technology – – 2 – – 50 50 100 2
VII
.Skill Based Lab -1

Total 4 – 2 100 50 50 100 6

Total Credits=06

HCWC801:
BE Sustainable Waste 4 – – 20 80 – – 100 4
Sem Volorization II
VIII
Total 4 – – 100 – – 100 4

Total Credits=04

Total Credit for Semester V+VI+VII+VIII=18

214
 Waste Technology: Semester V
Course Code Course Name Credits
HCWC501 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT 04

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term Work / Practical/Oral Total

Internal Assessment End Duration of End

Sem Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

To recognize the relevant, regulations that apply for facilities used for disposal and destruction of
1.
waste.
2. To provide in depth knowledge of municipal solid waste management
3. To provide in-depth knowledge of hazardous waste management
4. To provide in-depth knowledge of Physico-chemical processes useful for the treatment of
municipal and solid wastes
5. To provide in-depth knowledge of biological processes useful for the treatment of municipal and
solid wastes.
6. Know the necessity of environment risk assessment.

Module Content Hours

1 Rules and Regulations 4
Municipal solid waste (management and handling) rules, hazardous waste (management
and handling) rules, biomedical waste handling rules, fly ash rules, recycled plastics usage
rules, batteries (management and handling) rules
2 Municipal Solid Waste Management 9
Need for management, sources, composition, generation rates, collection of waste,
separation, transfer and transport of waste, treatment and disposal options, source
reduction of wastes, recycling and reuse.
3 Hazardous Waste Management 9
Need for management, hazardous characterization of waste, compatibility and
flammability of chemicals, waste sampling, TCLP tests, fate and transport of chemicals,
health effects
4 Physicochemical Treatment of Solid and Hazardous Waste 9
Chemical treatment processes for MSW (combustion, stabilization and solidification of
hazardous wastes), physicochemical processes for hazardous wastes (soil vapour
extraction, air stripping, chemical oxidation), ground water contamination and
remediation

215
 5 Biological Treatment of Solid and Hazardous Waste 14
Composting, bioreactors, anaerobic decomposition of solid waste, principles of
biodegradation of toxic waste, inhibition, co-metabolism, oxidative and reductive
processes, slurry phase bioreactor, in-situ remediation. Landfill design for solid and
hazardous wastes, leachate collection and removal, landfill covers, incineration
6 Environmental Risk Assessment 7
Defining risk and environmental risk, methods of risk assessment, case studies

Course Outcome:

On completion of the course the students will:

1 understand rules and regulations for handling solid waste.

2 understand principals of municipal solid waste management.
3 understand hazardous waste management.
4 learn physicochemical treatment of solid and hazardous waste.
5 understand biological treatment of solid and hazardous waste.
6 understand environment risk assessment.

Assessment
Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests.

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents (approximately
40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lectures.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will
be from any module other than module 3).
5. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Test Books/Reference Books:

1 Tchobanoglous G., Theisen H. and Vigil S.A., "Integrated Solid Waste Management",
McGraw-Hill International editions.
2 Bhide A.D. and Sundaresan B.B., "Solid Waste Management, Collection, Processing and
Disposal", Nagpur.
3 . "Manual on Municipal Solid Waste Management", CPHEEO, Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India.
4 Management and Handling Rules for: municipal solid waste, biomedical waste,
hazardous waste and radioactive wastes, Government of India Publications.
5 Solid Waste Management Hand Book – Pavoni

216
 Waste Technology: Semester VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HCWC601 LIQUID EFFLUENT MANAGEMENT 04

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term Work / Practical/Oral Total

Internal Assessment End Duration of End

Test-I Test-II Average Sem Sem TW PR OR
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- 100

Course Objectives:

1 To learn how to minimize waste and study available treatment options.

2 To know concept of pollution control.
3 To learn ion exchange process and various adsorption techniques.
4 To study advanced methods for effluent management.
5 To know methods of waste reduction and how to recover byproducts.
6 To learn concepts and design of natural treatment system.

Module Contents Hours

Waste Minimization and Treatment options
1 Methods of waste volume and strength reductions, Waste minimization - 4 R concepts, Waste 9
audit, Classification of treatment and development of treatment flow sheets.

Pollution control
Zero discharge concept. Concept of common effluent treatment plant- objectives, types of
2 8
CETP, technical and financial aspects. Rural wastewater systems – septic tanks, two-pit latrines,
ecotoilet, soak pits.

Ion Exchange and Adsorption

Ion exchange process, ion exchange resins, exchange capacity, ion exchange, chemistry and
3 reactions, Design of ion exchange units, Disposal of concentrate waste streams. Types of 9
adsorption, adsorption isotherms, activated carbon adsorption kinetics, analysis and design of
adsorption column.
Advanced methods for effluent management
4 Ozonation, photocatalysis, wet air oxidation, evaporation, reverse osmosis, biological 9
treatment for toxic waste

5 Waste Reduction/Byproduct recovery 9

217
 Waste reduction/ byproduct recovery for sugar, paper mill, petroleum and oil refineries,
steel and engineering industries, fertilizer and pesticide industries, organic & inorganic
manufacturing industries

6 Natural Treatment Systems

Constructed wetland and aquatic treatment systems; Types- free water surface and subsurface 8
constructed wetlands, selection of plants, removal mechanisms, applications, design procedure
for constructed wetlands, management of constructed wetlands

Course Outcomes:

1 Understand minimizing the waste and available treatment options.

2 Understand concept of pollution control.
3 Understand ion exchange process/design and adsorption techniques.
4 Advanced methods for effluent management.
5 Waste reduction/byproducts recovery for manufacturing industries.
6 Concepts and design of natural treatment system.

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests. First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based
on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lectures.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
will be from any module other than module 3).
5. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Text Books and References:

1 Eckenfelder, W.W., Industrial Water Pollution Control, McGraw-Hill, 1999.

2 Arceivala, S.J., Wastewater Treatment for Pollution Control, McGraw-Hill, 1998.
3 Frank Woodard, Industrial waste treatment Handbook, Butterworth Heinemann, New Delhi,
2001

218
 Honours in Waste Technology: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HCWC701 WASTE VALORIZATION I 04

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term Work / Practical/Oral Total

Internal Assessment End Duration of End

Test-I Test-II Average Sem Sem TW PR OR
Exam Exam
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- -- 100

Course Outcomes:

1. To know waste valorization process used for reduce, reuse and recycle.
2. To learn biovalorization of industrial waste.
3. To know concept of biorefineries and related factors.
4. To learn recent trends and vermiculture.
5. To know biovalorisation of agriculture biomass.
6. To study case studies based on waste recycling.

Module Contents Hours

1 Wastes valorization processes: 5
Preparation for reuse, recycling, and other valorisation processes. Analysis of advantages
and limitations.
2 Bio-valorisation of industrial wastes: 12
Anaerobic bio-valorisation of leather industry solid waste and production of high value-
added biomolecules and biofuels, Anaerobic bio-valorisation of pulp and paper mill waste,
Bio-valorisation of winery industry waste to produce value-added products, Conversion of
textile effluent wastewater into fertilizer using marine cyanobacteria along with different
agricultural waste.
3 Biorefineries: 8
Biorefinery for hydrocarbons and emerging contaminants, Biodesulfurization of petroleum
wastes, Microbial leaching of heavy metals from e- waste, opportunities and challenges.

4 Biovalorisation of agricultural biomass: 11

Recent trends in biorefinery-based valorisation of lignocellulosic biomass, Protein
engineering approaches for lignocellulosic ethanol biorefinery, Biovalorization potential of
agro forestry/industry biomass for optically pure lactic acid fermentation, Opportunities
and challenges, Agro-based sugarcane industry wastes for production of high-value
bioproducts
5 Recent trends and vermiculture 8

219
 Recent trends and challenges in bioleaching technologies, membrane separation
technologies for downstream processing. Definition, scope and importance – common
species for culture – environmental requirements – culture methods- applications of
vermiculture-Potentials and constraints for composting in India-large scale and
decentralized plants.
6 Case studies on waste recycling 8
Recycling technologies for paper, glass, metal, plastic, used lead acid battery, end of life
vehicle recycling, electronic waste recycling, waste oil, recycling solvent recovery, drivers
and barriers for material recycling, social, legal and economic factors, environmental
impacts of waste recycling, design for the environment the life cycle approach.

Course Outcomes:

On completion of this course students will

1 understand the waste valorization process to reduce, reuse and recycle.

2 understand Biovalorization of industrial waste
3 understand concept of biorefineries, their opportunities and challenges
4 understand recent trends and vermiculture.
5 understand biovalorisation of agriculture biomass.
6 understand waste recycling using case studies.

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests. First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based
on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective
lectures.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b)
will be from any module other than module 3).
5. Only Four questions need to be solved.
Text Books/ Reference Books
1 Aarne Veslind and Alan E Rimer (1981), Unit operations in Resource Recovery
Engineering , Prentice Hall Inc., London
2 Manser A G R, Keeling A A (1996). Practical handbook of processing and recycling
on municipal waste. Pub CRC Lewis London, ISBN 1-56670-164
3 Chiumenti, Chiumenti, Diaz, Savage, Eggerth, and Goldstein, Modern Composting
Technologies JG Press October 2005
4 Charles R Rhyner (1995),Waste Management and Resource Recovery, Lewis

220
 Waste Technology: Semester VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HCWSBL701 WASTE TECHNOLOGY SKILL BASED LAB 02

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Practical Tutorial Total
- 04 - -- 02 - 02
Term Work / Practical/Oral Total
Theory

Internal Assessment End Duration of End Sem

Sem Exam TW OR/PR
Test-I Test-II Average
Exam
- - - - -------------- 50 50 100

Course Objectives:-

Students will able to

1 Understand analyze properties of MSW

2 Understand vermicomposting on a lab scale.
3 Understand aerobic and anaerobic digesting of solid waste.
4 Will know of incineration process and handling of HSW.
5 Understand ecology baseline and impact of waste on environment.
6 Understand process of project report preparation based on case studies.

List of Experiments (minimum eight)

Waste Technology based experiments should be conducted.

1. Determination of pH of MSW

2. Determination of Total Solids, fixed solids and volatile solids

3. Determination of nutrient value (NPK)

4. Lab scale study on vermicomposting

5. Lab scale study of aerobic and anaerobic digesting of solid wastes (Both industrial & Municipal)

6. A Visit to the Hazardous waste Generation or disposal site.

7. Practical knowledge and working of incinerators

8. Visit to Industrial area, especially the handling of Hazardous materials

221
9. Ecology baseline and impact of waste – disposal on vegetation

10.Preparation of Project report based on a case study of one hospital Study of the source, generation rates and
characteristics of hazardous wastes and their regulation, handling, treatment, and disposal. Special emphasis is
placed on process design of waste handling, treatment and disposal systems.

Course Outcomes:

At the end of the course the student will be able to:

1 Learn to analyze properties of MSW.

2 To study vermicomposting on a lab scale.
3 To carry out aerobic and anaerobic digesting of solid waste.
4 To acquire knowledge of incineration process and handling of HSW.
5 Learn to analyze ecology baseline and impact of waste.
6 Learn about project report preparation based on case studies.

Term work (25 marks)

Term work should be evaluated based on performance in practical/Assignments.

Practical Journal/Assignments: 20 marks

Attendance: 05 marks

Total: 25 marks

End Semester Oral Practical Examination/orals (25 marks)

 A student will become eligible for Oral practical examination after completing 8 out of 10
experiments/Assignments

222
 Waste Technology: Semester VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HCWC801 WASTE VALORIZATION II 04

Course Hours Credits Assigned

Theory Practical Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
04 - - 04 - - 04

Theory Term Work/ Practical/Oral Total

Internal Assessment End Duration of End
Sem Sem TW PR OR
Test-I Test Aver Exam Exam
-II age
20 20 20 80 03 Hrs -- - -- 100

Course Objective:
1 To know concept of energy from waste.
2 To study devices for converting waste into energy.
3 To undertake case studies based on impact of pollution on environmental and health.
4 To learn biohydrogen processes its applications and briquetting techniques.
5 To know microalgal biovalorization.
6 To learn process of converting biomass to energy.

Module Contents Hours

1 Introduction to Energy from waste
Present status of technologies for conversion of waste into energy, design of waste to
8
energy plants for cities, small townships and villages. Sources of energy generation,
Classification of waste as fuel – agro based, forest residue, industrial waste
2 MSW –conversion devices
Incinerators, gasifiers, digestors. , land fill gas generation and utilization, ,Anaerobic 9
Digestion: Biogas production
3 Environmental and health impacts-case studies
Environmental and health impacts of waste to energy conversion, case studies of
10
commercial waste to energy plants, waste to energy- potentials and constraints in India,
eco-technological alternatives for waste to energy conversions.
4 Briquetting
Industrial Application of Gasifiers-Utilization and Advantages of Briquetting, environmental 9
and health impacts of incineration; strategies for reducing environmental impacts.
5 Biohydrogen: Overview on Processes involved, and from Biohydrogen and applications. 8
6 Microalgal biovalorization:
Conventional and nonconventional approach, Integration of wastewater valorization with 8
microalgae for biofuel production,

Course Outcome:
Students will be able to

223
1 understand the concept of energy from waste.
2 understand various devices to convert energy from waste.
3 understand environmental and health impacts using case studies.
4 understand biohydrogen processes, applications and briquetting techniques.
5 understand concept of microalgal biovalorization.
6 understand process for biomass to energy.

Assessment

Internal Assessment (20 Marks):

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests. First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based
on remaining contents (approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I).

End Semester Examination (80 marks):

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to number of respective lectures.

2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks.

3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum.

4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3 then part (b) will
be from any module other than module 3).

5. Only Four questions need to be solved.

Textbooks /References

1 Rada E.C. Waste Management and Valorization: Alternative Technologies., CRC Press, Taylor and
Francis Group, 2016.
2 Rathinam N.K. and Sani, R.K. Biovalorisation of Wastes to Renewable Chemicals and Biofuels.
Elsevier Inc. 2020.

224
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Electric Vehicles

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

225
 University of Mumbai
Electric Vehicles
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& Course Title Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
Sem Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HCEV501:
TE Vehicular Systems 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem and Dynamics
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HCEV601:
Sem. EV Drive and 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Energy Sources
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HCEV701:
BE Automotive
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. Controllers and
VII Auxiliary Systems
HSEVBL701:
Electric Vehicles -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Lab
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HCEV801:
Sem. Electric Vehicle 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII System Design
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04
Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

226
 ‘Electric Vehicle’ - SEM-V
Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Code Course Name Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
HCEV501 Vehicular Systems and Dynamics 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HCEV501 Vehicular Systems and Dynamics 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

Course 1. To study different automotive components and subsystems

Objectives 2. To explore and compare the transition of automotive domain from ICE to electric vehicles
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able:
Outcomes
1. To Illustrate the general configuration and identify various components of automobile.
2. To define the functionality and working principles of different types of Automotive Powertrains
3. To illustrate the working of various automotive transmission systems
4. To identify and illustrate the various hybrid electric powertrains and their different modes of
operations
5. To explain the basic and state of the art of Electric vehicles and its major parts.
6. To compare and contrast the performance of ICE vehicles, HEVs and EVs.

Module Contents Hours

Vehicle Mechanics:
History of Vehicle Development, General Configuration of Automobile, Body and Chassis
Fundamentals: General Packaging, Types of Structural System, Backbone Construction; Body
and Chassis Materials.
1. 10
Automotive Powertrain Mechanical, Suspensions system, Steering System, NVH, Control
System Integration and Implementation.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Powertrains, Rear-Wheel Drive Powertrains (RWD), Multi-Wheel
Drive Powertrains (AWD and 4WD)
Transmission Systems:
Transmission gears, Manual Transmission (MT), Automatic Transmission (AT), Automated
2. Manual Transmissions (AMT) and Continuously Variable Transmissions (CVT); 10
Manual Transmissions Powertrain Layout and Manual Transmission Structure, Power Flows
and Gear Ratios, Manual Transmission Clutch and its structure. Drivetrain and Differential
Automotive Subsystems:
Automotive Aero-dynamics, Vehicle Power Demand Analysis; Types of suspension and drive,
3. Braking systems; Tyre Mechanics: Tyres and wheels, Tyre characteristics; Vehicle handling & 06
stability; Automotive instrumentation
ICE Performance Characteristics:
4. Power and torque generation, specific fuel consumption, specific emissions, Efficiencies- fuel 06
conversion efficiency, mechanical efficiency, volumetric efficiency

227
 Hybrid Powertrain:
Series HEVs, Parallel HEVs, Series–Parallel HEVs, Complex HEVs, Operating Modes, Degree
5. of Hybridization, Comparison of HEVs, Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEVs) 10
Real Life examples of HEVs
Electric Vehicles:
Basics of Electric Vehicles, Current Status and Trends for EVs, Battery Electric Vehicles (BEVs),
6. Fuel-Cell Electric Vehicles (FCEVs), Electric Machines for EV applications, EV Transmission: 10
Single-Speed EV Transmission, Multiple Ratio EV Transmissions.
Comparison of ICE vehicle with HEVs and EVs. National Policy for adoption of EVs
Text Books:-

1. Vehicle Powertrain Systems by Behrooz Mashadi and David Crolla, Wiley, 2012

2. Automotive Aerodynamics by Joseph Katz, Wiley, 2016

3. Automotive Chassis Engineering, by David C. Barton and John D. Fieldhouse, Springer, 2018

4. Automotive Engineering Powertrain, Chassis System and Vehicle Body Edited by David A. Crolla, Elsevier,
2009

5. Automotive Power Transmission Systems by Yi Zhang and Chris Mi, Wiley, 2018

6. Linear Electric Machines, Drives, and MAGLEVs Handbook, by Ion Boldea, CRC Press. 2013

7. Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric, and Fuel Cell Vehicles by Mehrdad Ehsani, Yimin Gao, Sebastien E. Gay, and
Ali Emadi, CRC Press 2005

8. Electric Vehicle Technology Explained by James Larminie and John Lowry, John Wiley, 2003

9. Electric And Hybrid Vehicles- Design Fundamentals by Iqbal Husain, CRC Press, 2005

Reference Books:-

1. Encyclopaedia of Automotive Engineering edited by David Crolla et al, Wiley, 2014

2. Design and Control of Automotive Propulsion Systems by Zongxuan Sun and Guoming Zhu, CRC Press, 2015

3. The Automotive Transmission Book by Robert Fischer, Ferit Küçükay, Gunter Jürgens , Rolf Najork, and
Burkhard Pollak, Springer, 2015

4. Noise and Vibration Control in Automotive Bodies by Jian Pang, Wiley, 2019

Website Reference / Video Courses:

1. NPTEL Web course: Fundamentals of Automotive Systems, by Prof. C.S. Shankar Ram,
IIT Madras, https://nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106088/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
228
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.
‘Electric Vehicle’ - SEM-VI
Teaching Scheme (Contact
Course Credits Assigned
Course Name Hours)
Code
Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
EV Drive and
HCEV601 04 - 04 - 04
Energy Sources

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
EV Drive and
HCEV601 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
Energy Sources

Course 1. To explore and understand various traction motors, power drives and control strategies used in
Objectives EVs.
2. To get conversant with the energy sources used in EVs and their state of the art.
3. To understand the various battery charging and management systems
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. To identify and assess various traction motors along with their suitability in various EV segments
2. To describe and differentiate various power converters and their control used in EV drives
3. To evaluate the battery specifications using various design considerations for EVs
4. To illustrate different battery charging methods and protocols
5. To explain the impact of large scale integration of EV charging infra in existing grid and its mitigation
techniques.
6. To illustrate the need and importance of drive cycles used in testing of automobiles.

Module Contents Hours

Introduction to Traction Motors:
DC Machines- Brushed and Brushless DC motors (BLDC); AC Motors: Induction motors (IM),
permanent-magnet ac synchronous motor-surface-permanent-magnet (SPM) motors and
interior-permanent-magnet (IPM) motors; PM Materials; Switched Reluctance Motor
(SRM); Basic construction details and working principles of each of the machine. In-Wheel
1. Motors 10
Comparison of Traction Machines; Specifications of the motors, Characteristic Curves of a
Machines: Constant-Torque Mode, Constant-Power Mode; Efficiency Map;
Suitability of each machine in Electric vehicle domain for 2W, 3W, 4 wheeler and large size
vehicles. Real life examples; Review of advancement in EV Motors and Drives.
Power Converters for EV drive:
Power Conversion –Basic Principle, review of DC-DC converters, DC-AC Converters used in
EV applications; Power topologies for IM, BLDC, PMSM and SRM motors.
2. Traction Drives, Modulation schemes: Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation, SPWM with 08
third harmonic injection, Space vector modulation, comparison of modulation techniques.
Converter / Inverter Loss calculation, Heat-sinking: passive and active cooling.

229
 Control of Power converters and Motors:
Induction Motor Control: Variable-Voltage Variable-Frequency Control (VVVF), Field-
Oriented Control (FOC), Direct Torque Control (DTC);
3. PM Synchronous Motor Control: Field-Oriented Control of PMSM, Flux-Weakening Control 10
of PMSM, Position Sensorless Control of PMSM.
SRM motor control: Current chopping control (CCC), Torque-Ripple Minimization Control
BLDC Motor Control: Trapezoidal back EMF BLDC motor control
Energy Sources for EV:
Overview of energy sources for electric vehicle: Batteries, Fuel Cell, Ultra-capacitor and
flywheel energy storage; Hybridization of energy sources for electric and hybrid vehicles;
Comparison of sources.
Batteries: Lead-acid battery, Nickel-based batteries, Sodium based batteries, lithium
4. 10
batteries Metal/air batteries;
Battery parameters, Battery pack formation and testing, SoC & SoH, Estimation of SoC.
Battery cell balancing, Battery management System (BMS), Thermal and safety
considerations in battery pack design.
Voltage and AHr/ kWhr ratings of ES for EV applications: Major design considerations
Battery charging Infrastructure:
AC and DC charging, CC-CV charging, Pulse charging; On-board and off-board charging;
Standards and protocols for charging;
Fast DC chargers, Home and Public charging infrastructure; Wireless power transfer (WPT)
5. technologies for EVs, Move-and-charge technology. 10
Charging Infrastructure-standardization and connectivity issues; SAE J1772, CHAdeMo,
GB/T, CCS2 battery charging protocols. OCPP protocol
Impact on existing power grid, G2V and V2X- Vehicle-to-home (V2H), vehicle-to-vehicle
(V2V), and vehicle-to-grid (V2G) energy systems. Renewable Energy Based Charging infra.
EV Drive Cycle Testing:
6. Need for a driving cycle, different Drive Cycles: NEDC, EUDC, EPA, WLTP, and FTP-75; 04
Testing of EV for range per charge for a given drive cycle

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Fundamentals And Applications Of Lithium-Ion Batteries In Electric Drive Vehicles by Jiuchun Jiang and
Caiping Zhang, Wiley, 2015

2. Battery Management Systems for Large Lithium-Ion Battery Packs, by Davide Andrea, Artech House Publication,
2010

3. Electric Vehicle Battery Systems by Sandeep Dhameja, Newens, 2002

4. Fundamentals And Applications Of Lithium-Ion Batteries In Electric by Jiuchun Jiang and Caiping Zhang, Wiley,
2015

5. Optimal Charging Control of Electric Vehicles in Smart Grids by Wanrong Tang and Ying Jun Zhang, Springer,
2017

6. Plug In Electric Vehicles in Smart Grids Charging Strategies Edited by Sumedha Rajakaruna, Farhad Shahnia and
Arindam Ghosh, Springer 2015

7. Technologies and Applications for Smart Charging of Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Vehicles edited by Ottorino
Veneri, Springer, 2017

230
 8. Solar Powered Charging Infrastructure for Electric Vehicles A Sustainable Development Edited by Larry E.
Erickson, Jessica Robinson, Gary Brase, and Jackson Cutsor, CRC Press, 2017

9. Energy Systems for Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Edited by K.T. Chau, IET, 2016

10. Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Motor Drive Edited by Ali Emadi, CRC Press, 2005

11. Electric And Hybrid Vehicles Power Sources, Models, Sustainability, Infrastructure And The Market by
Gianfranco Pistoia, Elsevier, 2013

12. AC Motor Control and Electrical Vehicle Applications, Second Edition by Kwang Hee Nam CRC Press, 2019

Website Reference / Video Courses:

1. NPTEL Web Course: Electric Vehicles - Part 1 by PROF. AMIT KUMAR JAIN Department of Electrical Engineering
IIT Delhi; https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102121/
2. NPTEL Web Course: Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & Economics: by Prof. Ashok Jhunjhunwala,
Prof. Prabhjot Kaur, Prof. Kaushal Kumar Jha and Prof. L Kannan, IIT Madras,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106170/
3. NPTEL Web Course: Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles by Dr. Praveen Kumar and Prof. S. Majhi, IIT
Guwahati, https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/103/108103009/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

231
 ‘Electric Vehicle’ - SEM-VII
Teaching Scheme
Course Credits Assigned
Course Name (Contact Hours)
Code
Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
Automotive Controllers and
HCEV701 04 - 04 - 04
Auxiliary Systems

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
Automotive Controllers and
HCEV701 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
Auxiliary Systems

Course 1. To Identify functionalities of various automotive controllers and auxiliary systems

Objectives 2. To study various automotive sensors and actuators
3. To explore details of energy sources management system, thermal management system and overall
system integration in EVs/ HEVs
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able:
Outcomes
1. To illustrate functionality of various auxiliary subsystems used EVs
2. To demonstrate the use of VCUS and ECUS in automobile
3. To describe the need and functionality of automotive sensors / actuators and networking
4. To illustrate the design and management aspects of EV energy sources
5. To describe the various heat losses, and thermal management systems incorporated in EVs
6. To elaborate on System Integration and resource optimization in EVs

Module Contents Hours

Introduction:
Review of Automotive electrical, electronic, communication and thermal subsystems;
Review of Energy Storage (Power Plant) system, Main Traction Inverter, On-Board Charger
(OBC), LV Auxiliary Power Source, HV Battery Disconnect; Vehicle Control Unit (VCU) and
ECUs.
Braking Systems: Energy Consumption in Braking, Braking Power and Energy on Front and
1. 12
Rear Wheels, Brake System of EVs and HEVs, Series Brake-Optimal Feel, Series Brake-Optimal
Energy Recovery; Parallel Brake; Antilock Brake System (ABS); Fundamentals of
Regenerative Braking.
Steering System: In-car system networking, Steering ratio characteristic, Steering
Stabilization, Over-steer, understeer, Electric-Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS); Autonomous
vehicles, Principle of object detection.
Vehicle Control Unit and Electronic Control Unit:
VCU functionality: Inverter control, battery management, charging control, vehicle functions
2. in transmission and engine control; Advanced Driver Assistance System (ADAS); 08
Electronic control units (ECUs): Various Section ECUs and their networking; Body and
Lighting ECU (Key-less Entry, Sonar, HID, LED Lamps), Body ECU (Airbag).

232
 Automotive sensors / actuators and networking:
Radar Sensor Detectors for Vehicle Safety Systems; Airborne Ultrasonic Imaging: SONAR
3. Based Image Generation for Autonomous Vehicles, Motor angle sensor, Steering angle 10
sensor, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Systems (TPMS);
In Vehicle communication system: CAN, LIN, Ethernet, Flexray
Energy Storage (Power Plant) Management system:
Battery cell packaging, Battery Management System (BMS), Design of battery pack and
4. 10
safety considerations; High voltage cabling and cut-outs; Battery pack installation. Use of
Battery-UC Hybrid source; Fuel Cell (FC): FC management and Hydrogen storage in EV.
Thermal Management System:
Heat Calculation in various subsystems; HVAC system: HVAC compressor drive; Liquid
5. 06
cooling system for Battery, Electric drive and On board charger. Design considerations for
thermal management system
System Integration and Implementation:
Vehicular Power Control Strategy and Energy Management: A Generic Framework,
6. 06
Definition, and Needs, Methodologies for Optimization, Cost Function Optimization,
Benefits of Energy Management.

Text/Reference Books:-
1. Electric Powertrain Energy Systems, Power Electronics and Drives for Hybrid, Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles by
John G. Hayes and G. Abas Goodarzi, Wiley, 2018.
2. Handbook of Automotive Power Electronics and Motor Drive Edited by Ali Emadi, CRC Press, 2005
3. Encyclopaedia of Automotive Engineering edited by David Crolla et al., Wiley, 2014
4. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles Technologies, Modeling and Control: A Mechatronic Approach by Amir Khajepour,
Saber Fallah and Avesta Goodarzi, Wiley, 2014.
5. Hybrid Electric Vehicles Principles and Applications with Practical Perspectives, Second Edition Chris Mi and M.
Abul Masrur, Wiley 2018.
6. Autonomous Vehicles Intelligent Transport Systems And Smart Technologies edited by Nicu Bizon, Lucian
Dascalescu and Naser Mahdavi Tabatabaei, Nova Publishers, 2014
7. Energy Management Strategies for Electric and Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles by Sheldon S. Williamson,
Springer, 2013
8. Electric and Hybrid Buses for Urban Transport Energy Efficiency Strategies, by Bogdan Ovidiu Varga, Calin
Iclodean and Florin Mariasiu, Springer, 2016
Website Reference / Video Courses:
1. NPTEL Web Course: Electric Vehicles - Part 1 by PROF. AMIT KUMAR JAIN Department of Electrical Engineering
IIT Delhi; https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102121/
2. NPTEL Web Course: by Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & Economics: Prof. Ashok Jhunjhunwala,
Prof. Prabhjot Kaur,Prof. Kaushal Kumar Jha andProf. L Kannan, IIT Madras,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106170/
3. NPTEL Web Course: Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles by Dr. Praveen Kumar and Prof. S. Majhi, IIT
Guwahati, https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/103/108103009/
Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project
Theory Examination:

233
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

234
 ‘Electric Vehicle’ - SEM-VII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours)
Course Code Credits Assigned
Course Name
Theory Practical/ Theory Practical/ Total
Tutorial Tutorial
HCEVSBL701 Electric Vehicles Lab 04 -- 04 04

Examination
Course code Scheme
Course Name Theory
Internal Assessment End Exam Term Oral Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HCEVSBL701 Electric Vehicles Lab - - - - - 50 50 100

Course 1. To provide hands-on with various major components used in EV/HEVs

Objectives 2. To explore EV drives & control implementation along with analysis using simulation tool
or with hardware.
3. To study various auxiliary systems commonly used in EV.
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. Compare and contrast conventional vehicles and EV/HEVs.
2. Illustrate operations and features of Conventional, hybrid electric vehicle and electrical
vehicle Powertrains.
3. Describe the working of EV drives used for different kinds of electric motors.
4. Illustrate battery characteristics and working of BMS.
5. Describe the operation of On-board and Off-board EV chargers
6. Demonstrate the use of simulations tools along with hardware implementation for
evaluation of EV subsystems.

Contents
Electric Vehicles Lab: Experimental study based on the following topics
1. Conventional and electrical vehicle sub-systems and components
2. Conventional, hybrid electric vehicle and electrical vehicle Powertrains
3. Motor performance test - for BLDC /PMSM/ IM/SRM motors;
4. EV drive for BLDC/PMSM/IM /SRM motors
5. Battery cell and module- characterization
6. Battery Management System (BMS)
7. On-board and Off-board charger for EV
8. Study of Automotive Electronics-HVAC control, Steering Control, VCU; 2/3 or 4 Wheeler EV.
(or any other experiments based on EV/HEV related systems/ subsystems)

Use of software tools:

Use of tools like ADVISOR, MATLAB, SEMIKRON SEMISEL, Python, C, Java platforms (or similar) etc. for the
following
1. Simulation/ Emulation of Vehicle performance analysis for Conventional and Electrical Vehicle
2. Design simulation of a battery pack with given specifications and constraints.

235
 3. Simulation/ Emulation of BLDC motor drive for performance analysis
4. Simulation/ Emulation of PMSM motor drive for performance analysis
5. Simulation/ Emulation of IM motor drive for performance analysis
6. Simulation/ Emulation of SRM motor drive for performance analysis
7. Simulation/ Emulation of On board and Off board charger.
8. Simulation/ Emulation of regenerative breaking.
(or any other simulation based on EV/HEV related systems/ subsystems)

Visit to industrial/ manufacturing facility:

1. Visit to EV manufacturing facility.
2. Visit to Battery pack /BMS design facility
3. Visit to battery Charger facility
4. Visit to Automotive Research Association of India (ARAI), Pune EV COE
(or a visit to any facility / industry / research institute carrying out work in the domain of EV)

Course Project
Course project to be carried out to design /fabricate/ program one of the vehicular sub-systems used in EV

Note: Students and teachers are encouraged to use the virtual labs whose links are as given below. The
remote-access to Labs in various disciplines of Science and Engineering is available. Students can conduct
online experiments which would help them in learning basic and advanced concepts through remote
experimentation.

Virtual Lab Website Reference

1. http://vlab.co.in/broad-area-electrical-engineering
2. https://www.vlab.co.in/broad-area-mechanical-engineering - Energy Storage Labs, Solar Energy lab,
Wind Energy Lab

Term work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments, at least one plant visit, and one course project. The
distribution of marks shall be as follows:
Experiments Performance : 20 marks
Attendance : 05 marks
Plant Visit report : 10 marks
Course Project report : 10 Marks
Journal & Attendance : 10 marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the minimum passing in the term work.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire lab work of HCEVSBL701-Electric Vehicles Lab

236
 ‘Electric Vehicle’ - SEM-VIII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Course
Course Name Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
Code
HCEV801 Electric Vehicle System Design 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HCEV801 Electric Vehicle System Design 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

Course 1. To illustrate the design philosophies used in the EV domain.

Objectives 2. To explore the selection of power and control architecture of EV drives
3. To study the design aspects of EV battery packs and other auxiliary systems
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. To select and size the electric motor for a particular EV application and performance criteria
2. To select and size the battery pack to meet desired EV performance and
3. To design the EV drive system with functional safety considerations.
4. To illustrate the use of hybrid energy source for EV performance improvement
5. To illustrate the design aspects of Automotive Subsystem
6. To design the EV chargers and charging infrastructure

Module Contents Hours

Selection/ Sizing of EV Electric Motors:
Electric Vehicle modelling, Tractive force calculations, Design considerations for 2W, 3W and
4W EVs; Torque, power and Speed requirement, Traction Limit, Maximum Acceleration
Limit, Maximum Grade Limit, Vehicle Power Demand Vehicle Performance Envelope, and
1. Vehicle Power Envelope; Vehicle Power Demand during Driving Cycles. 08
Design considerations for EV motors and their cooling system. Application Examples of EV
/HEV motors with vehicles and motor specifications.

Selection/ Sizing of Battery pack and other Energy Resource:

Selection of type of Battery pack for 2W, 3W and 4W EVs; Battery pack sizing: Design
considerations: Range per charge, range anxiety, EV motor power requirement; Impact of
road conditions, environmental conditions and traffic conditions.
High-Voltage Cabling and Disconnects, Safety in Battery Design, Testing for safety.
2. Accelerated Reliability Testing of Electric Vehicles, Battery Cycle Life versus Peak Power and 12
Rest Period.
Selection and sizing of Fuel cell for FCEV, design considerations; Battery-ultra-capacitor hybrid
combination sizing, performance analysis.
Design considerations for Ultra-capacitor based EV, requirement of charging infra.
Flywheel selection and sizing for EV/HEV applications.
Automotive Subsystem Design:
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) and its Control Features, Communications between ECUs,
3. 06
Control Software Development: Software-in-the-Loop (SIL) Simulation and Hardware-in-the-
Loop (HIL) Simulation.
237
 Acceleration and braking control, regenerative braking; Automotive Steering Systems.
Design considerations of HVAC controller
EV System integration:
4. EMC design on ECU level, EMC design on system level and in special subsystems, Radiated 06
emissions and Conducted emissions, EMI EMC measurements.
Design of Charging Infrastructure:
Design considerations for AC charger: vehicle interface and charging protocol design.
applicable charging standards
Design of On-Board Charger (OBC)-Schematic, power topology and control, Power
5. capacities, regenerative braking control. 12
Design considerations of DC fast charger: vehicle interface and charging protocol design.
Connectivity and applicable charging standards
Installation guidelines and grid requirement for charger installations.
Design with Functional Safety of Automotive Electronics:
Functional Safety requirements of Automotive Electronics; ASIL identification and safety goal
finalization, ISO 26262.
Energy Storage integrity / protection: rupture and toxic gas management; low energy
6. 08
stranding, Unintended vehicle movement, shock protection, and Elimination of potential
thermal/ explosive event.
Hazard and Risk Analysis (HARA) for different situations, Testing of vehicles for compliance
of safety norms

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Design and Control of Automotive Propulsion Systems by Zongxuan Sun and Guoming Zhu, CRC Press, 2015

2. Electric Vehicle Machines And Drives Design, Analysis and Application by K. T. Chau, IEEE Press, and Wiley, 2015

3. EMC and Functional Safety of Automotive Electronics by Kai Borgeest, IET, 2018

Website Reference / Video Courses:

1. NPTEL Web Course: Electric Vehicles - Part 1 by PROF. AMIT KUMAR JAIN Department of Electrical Engineering
IIT Delhi; https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/102/108102121/
2. NPTEL Web Course: Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & Economics, by Prof. Ashok Jhunjhunwala,
Prof. Prabhjot Kaur, Prof. Kaushal Kumar Jha and Prof. L Kannan, IIT Madras,
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106170/
3. NPTEL Web Course: Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles by Dr. Praveen Kumar and Prof. S. Majhi, IIT
Guwahati, https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108/103/108103009/

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

238
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Microgrid Technology

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

239
 University of Mumbai
Microgrid Technology
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Credit
Examination Scheme and Marks
Year Course Code and Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& Course Title Internal End
Seminar/ Term Oral/
Sem Theory Pract Assess Sem Total Credits
Tutorial Work Pract
ment Exam
HCMT501:
TE Futuristic Power 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Systems
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HCMT601:
Sem. Power Electronic
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI Converters for
Energy Sources
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HCMT701:
BE Microgrid Power
04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. and Control
VII Architecture
HCMTSBL701:
Microgrid and RES -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Lab
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HCMT801:
Sem. Microgrid System 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Design
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04
Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

240
 ‘Microgrid Technology - SEM-V
Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Code Course Name Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
HCMT501 Futuristic Power Systems 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HCMT501 Futuristic Power Systems 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

Course 1. To explore the state of the art and future trends in power systems.
Objectives 2. To understand the technical, economic and social challenges in power system evolution.
3. To realize the role and importance of Microgrids if futuristic power systems.
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able:
Outcomes 1. To solicit the importance of large scale renewable energy integration with existing grid infrastructure.
2. To understand the importance and utility of Energy storage systems in futuristic power systems.
3. To explore large scale micro-grid deployment with RES and ESS integration.
4. To understand the role of communication and IT Infrastructure in power system and related
challenges.
5. To explore the potential of Microgrids and its importance in Indian context.

Module Contents Hours

Introduction:
Present status of worldwide scenario of electricity generation, transmission and distribution;
1. 06
Energy infrastructure-Resilience and Security; Social, Technical and economic challenges;
Major trends driving power system evolution; State of the art technologies in power system.
Renewable Energy Integration:
Review of renewable energy (RE) resources and systems: Solar- PV, Solar Thermal, Wind,
Biomass, Micro-hydro and Fuel Cell, comparison of various RE resources; Renewable Energy
2. 12
Policies and present status of integration with existing grid; Large scale integration of
renewable energy-Technical challenges, enabling technologies, International requirements;
Renewable energy forecasting
Energy Storage Systems (ESS):
Review of energy storage components: Battery, VRB, Ultra-capacitor, Fuel Cells, Pumped
Hydro-Storage and flywheels, comparison of ESS technologies; Importance of ESS in futuristic
3. power systems; Aggregated ESS, Distributed ESS; Applications of ESS: Energy Management 12
(Load Leveling and Peak Shifting), Fluctuation Suppression (Intermittency Mitigation),
Uninterruptible Power System Low-Voltage Ride Through; Placement of the ESS to Improve
Power Quality, Voltage Regulation Using ESS, ESS as Spinning Reserve.
Micro-grid and Smart-grid
Micro-grid evolution: Micro-grid concept, importance in futuristic power system, basic
architectures and control, objectives and state of the art technologies; Microgrid as a building
4. 12
block of Smart-grid; Smart-grid concept, Smart Grid versus conventional electrical networks,
Smart-grid infrastructure, Smart Grid communication system and its cyber security,
International standard IEC 61850 and its application to Smart-grid;

241
 Microgrids /smart grid and Electric Vehicles integration. Technical, Economic, Environmental
and Social Benefits of Microgrid Operation.
Communication and IT infrastructure:
Requirements of Communication and IT infrastructure in futuristic power systems: various
5. communication protocols, comparison of performance; IEEE standard: IEEE 802.11 Mesh 05
Networking, IEEE 802.15.4-Wireless Sensor Networks; Communications Technologies for
Smart metering; Cyber security issues and mitigation techniques.
Microgrids in India:
Microgrids for Rural Electrification, Review of Microgrid Best Practices through Case Studies:
6. 05
Strategic Planning, Operations: Commercial and Financial Considerations; Technical and Social
Context.

Text Books:-
1. Microgrids Architectures and Control Edited by Nikos Hatziargyriou, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
2. Energy Storage for Sustainable Microgrid by David Wenzhong Gao, Elsevier, 2015
3. Introduction to the Smart Grid- Concepts, Technologies and Evolution by Salman K. Salman, IET, 2017
4. Energy Storage Systems and Components by Alfred Rufer, CRC Press, 2018
Reference Books:-
1. Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Handbook Edited by D. Yogi Goswami and Frank Kreith, 2nd Edition-
2016, CRC
2. Clean Energy Microgrids, Edited by Shin'ya Obara and Jorge Morel IET, 2017
3. Hybrid-Renewable Energy Systems in Microgrids- Integration, Developments and Control edited by Hina
Fathimaby et al., Elsevier WoodHead Publishing, 2018
4. Smart Microgrids: Lessons from Campus Microgrid Design and Implementation edited by Hassan Farhangi, CRC
Press 2017
Website Reference / Video Courses:
1. NPTEL Web Course on: DC Microgrid And Control System Prof. Avik Bhattacharya, IIT Roorkee
2. NPTEL Web Course on Electronics and Distributed Generation Dr. Vinod John Department of Electrical
Engineering IISc Bangalore
3. NPTEL Web Course on Introduction to Smart Grid, PROF. N.P. PADHY Department of Electrical Engineering IIT
Roorkee PROF. PREMALATA JENA Department of Electrical Engineering
4. NPTEL Web Course on Electric vehicles and Renewable energy, Prof. Ashok Jhunjhunwala, Prof. Prabhjot Kaur,
Prof. Kaushal Kumar Jha and Prof. L Kannan, IIT Madras

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

242
 ‘Microgrid Technology - SEM-VI
Teaching Scheme (Contact
Course Credits Assigned
Course Name Hours)
Code
Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
Power Electronic Converters
HCMT601 04 - 04 - 04
for Energy Sources

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
Power Electronic Converters
HCMT601 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
for Energy Sources

Course 1. To illustrate the design philosophies used in the domain of microgrid power converters.
Objectives 2. To explore the control implementations in power converters for voltage, current and power
regulation for various DC and AC energy sources
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. Select and size various passive and active components for power converters
2. Design power converters used with DC energy resources with their control implementation
3. Design power converters used with AC energy resources with their control implementation
4. Understand the design considerations of power conditioning unit for ESS, SPV and Wind applications.
5. Understand the design and selection aspects of various auxiliary systems and components used in
PCUs

Module Contents Hours

Selection of components for Power Electronics Converters (PEC):
Selection and Sizing of capacitors and magnetic components for PECs, design of Magnetic
1. 06
Components; Selection and sizing of Power Devices, Commonly used software tools for
selection and sizing; Heatsink- selection and sizing.
Design and Control of DC-DC Converters:
Design of Buck and Boost converters, Design examples; Design of Bidirectional Converters.
2. Design of gate driver circuits; Review of DC-DC converter modelling; Closed loop PI controller 10
design for buck and boost converters; Current control mode and voltage control mode.
Design and Control of DC-AC converters:
Design of Inverter for standalone applications; Design of grid connected Inverter with
3. 10
different grid synchronization strategies- ZCD, PLL; Strategies for Control of voltage, current
and power output.
Design of PCU for SPV and Wind Application:
4. Various topologies of Power Converter Unit (PCU) for SPV and Wind energy systems. Design 10
considerations of PCU for SPV and Wind energy Systems and Design Examples.
Design of PCU for ESS Applications:
5. Design consideration for BDC converter based PCU for batteries and Ultra-capacitors. 08

Design of Auxiliary System and Interfaces:

6. 08

243
 Design of current and voltage sensor interfaces; Design considerations for auxiliary power
supplies; Design of protection and snubber components: Introduction to Digital Signal
Processors (DSP) and microcontroller interfaces

Text Books:-

1. Microgrids Design and Implementation edited by Antonio Carlos Zambroni de Souza and Miguel Castilla,
Springer, 2019
2. Power Electronic Converters for Microgrids by Suleiman M. Sharkh, Mohammad A. Abusara, Georgios I.
Orfanoudakis Babar Hussain, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
3. Microgrids Architectures and Control Edited by Nikos Hatziargyriou, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
4. Energy Storage for Sustainable Microgrid by David Wenzhong Gao, Elsevier, 2015
5. Control Circuits In Power Electronics Practical Issues In Design And Implementation Edited by Miguel Castilla,
IET, 2016
6. Control and Dynamics in Power Systems and Microgrids by Lingling Fan, CRC Press, 2017
7. Integrated Power Electronic Converters and Digital Control, by Ali Emadi, Alireza Khaligh, Zhong Nie, and Young
Joo, Lee 2009, CRC Press.

Reference Books:-
1. Cooperative Synchronization in Distributed Microgrid Control by Ali Bidram, Vahidreza Nasirian Ali Davoudi,
and Frank L. Lewis, Springer, 2017
2. Hybrid-Renewable Energy Systems in Microgrids- Integration, Developments and Control edited by Hina
Fathimaby et al., Elseiver WoodHead Publishing, 2018
3. Smart Microgrids- Lessons from Campus Microgrid Design and Implementation edited by Hassan Farhangi, CRC
Press 2017
4. Energy Storage Systems and Components by Alfred Rufer, CRC Press, 2018

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

244
 ‘Microgrid Technology - SEM-VII
Teaching Scheme
Course Credits Assigned
Course Name (Contact Hours)
Code
Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
Microgrid Power and Control
HCMT701 04 - 04 - 04
Architecture

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
Microgrid Power and Control
HCMT701 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
Architecture

Course 1. To study various power and control architectures adopted in DC and AC Microgrids.
Objectives 2. To explore various control strategies used in power control
3. To take insight into operations stability and protection issues related to Microgrids
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes 1. Understand various types Microgrids based on applications, power and control architecture.
2. Illustrate various power control strategies adopted in DC, AC and Hybrid Microgrids
3. Compare and contrast various control architectures used DC, AC and Hybrid Microgrids
4. Illustrate the various operational challenges in Microgrids
5. Comprehend the various aspects related to the stability in Microgrids
6. Understand the protection challenges in Microgrids along with various protection methods to
overcome these challenges,

Module Contents Hours

Microgrid Power Architecture:
Types of Microgrid system, AC and DC and Hybrids Microgrids, Application based Suitability
1. 08
of Microgrid type; Review of power architecture of various Microgrids deployed world-wide.
Comparison of various Microgrid power architectures.
AC Microgrid and Control Architecture:
Black-start operation, Grid Synchronisation- various Grid synchronization methods, Grid
forming and grid following operations; Power Control- Real and reactive power control in AC
Microgrid, simple droop control and other variants of droop control, Unit Power Flow
2. Control, Feeder power flow control and Mixed mode control, source optimization; 12
Centralized, decentralised, distributed and hierarchical control architecture, Local and
system / supervisory level control strategies, Multi Agent System (MAS) Based Control;
Control approaches used in AC Microgrids deployed worldwide. Microgrid standards IEEE
1547 series. Communication in AC Microgrids
DC Microgrid and Control Architecture:
Power sharing in DC Microgrids, source optimization; Control approaches: Centralized,
3. 08
decentralised, distributed and hierarchical control architecture. Control approaches used in
hybrid Microgrids. Communication in DC/Hybrid Microgrids

245
 Operational Control in Microgrids:
Energy management in Microgrids, coordinated control, load management, grid
4. 08
synchronisation and islanding, Anti-islanding schemes; Various Architectural and
Operational Challenges in Microgrid, Optimal operation of Microgrids.
Microgrid Stability
5. Steady-state and dynamic stability in AC and DC Microgrids, Methods to improve the stability 06
in Microgrids; introduction to small signal and large signal stability analysis in Microgrids.
Protection in Microgrids
Fault scenarios in DC and AC Microgrids, Protection in DC and AC Microgrids, adaptive
6. 10
protection, Fault current source (FCS) based protection; Protection challenges in islanded and
autonomous modes of operation and ways to mitigate.

Text/Reference Books:-
1. Microgrids Design and Implementation edited by Antonio Carlos Zambroni de Souza and Miguel Castilla,
Springer, 2019
2. Microgrids Architectures and Control Edited by Nikos Hatziargyriou, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
3. Cooperative Synchronization in Distributed Microgrid Control by Ali Bidram, Vahidreza Nasirian Ali Davoudi,
and Frank L. Lewis, Springer, 2017
4. Control Circuits In Power Electronics Practical Issues In Design And Implementation Edited by Miguel Castilla,
IET, 2016
5. Control and Dynamics in Power Systems and Microgrids by Lingling Fan, CRC Press, 2017
6. Hybrid-Renewable Energy Systems in Microgrids- Integration, Developments and Control edited by Hina
Fathimaby et al., Elseiver WoodHead Publishing, 2018
7. Urban DC Microgrid Intelligent Control and Power Flow Optimization by Manuela Sechilariu and Fabrice
Locment, 2016 Elsevier
8. Integrated Power Electronic Converters and Digital Control, by Ali Emadi, Alireza Khaligh, Zhong Nie, and
Young Joo, Lee 2009, CRC Press.
9. Island Power Systems by Lukas Sigrist, Enrique Lobato, Francisco M. Echavarren Ignacio Egido, and Luis
Rouco, CRC Press, 2016
Website Reference / Video Courses:
1. NPTEL Web Course on: DC Microgrid and Control System Prof. Avik Bhattacharya, IIT Roorkee
2. NPTEL Web Course on Electronics and Distributed Generation Dr. Vinod John Department of Electrical
Engineering IISc Bangalore
3. NPTEL Web Course on Introduction to Smart Grid, PROF. N.P. PADHY Department of Electrical Engineering
IIT Roorkee PROF. PREMALATA JENA Department of Electrical Engineering
4. NPTEL Web Course on Electric vehicles and Renewable energy, Prof. Ashok Jhunjhunwala, Prof. Prabhjot
Kaur, Prof. Kaushal Kumar Jha and Prof. L Kannan, IIT Madras

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project
Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

246
 Microgrid Technology - SEM-VII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours)
Course Code Credits Assigned
Course Name
Theory Practical Theory Practical Total
HCMTSBL701 Microgrid and RES Lab -- 04 -- 04 04

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Oral Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg
Exam (Hrs.)
.
HCMTSBL701 Microgrid and RES Lab -- -- -- -- -- 50 50 100

Course 1. To provide hands-on with power converters used in AC, DC Microgrids

Objectives 2. To explore various control implementation incorporated in Microgrids in simulation or with
hardware
3. To study various auxiliary systems commonly used in Microgrids.
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. Test the various power converters used AC, DC Microgrids
2. Illustrate various operational modes of power converters
3. Illustrate various operational modes of Microgrid.
4. Describe the working of various auxiliary system interfaces (communication / sensors)
5. Analyse the steady-state and transient behaviour of Microgrid
6. Demonstrate the design the Microgrid and its sub-systems.

Contents
Microgrid / RES Lab: Experimental Setups (Any Five of the following)
1. Testing of Power Conversion Unit for DC Microgrid
2. Testing of Power Conversion Unit for AC Microgrid
3. DC Microgrid: Power Sharing between the sources
4. AC Microgrid: Power Sharing between the sources
5. Grid Connected Inverter
6. Grid Forming Inverter
7. Grid Interactive Inverter
8. Solar MPPT Control
9. Islanding detection
10. Island mode of operation of DC or AC Microgrid
11. Data transfer through Microgrid Communication Interfaces
12. Standalone Microgrid operation
13. Voltage and current sensing circuits
14. DSP / Microcontroller interface circuits
15. DSP / Microcontroller programming for converter control.
(or any other experiments based on Microgrid related systems/ subsystems)
Use of software tools: (Any three of the following)
Use of tools like MATLAB, Scilab, PSIM, LTSPice, python, C, Java platforms etc. for the following

247
 1. Simulation/ Emulation of DC Microgrid with steady state performance analysis.
2. Simulation/ Emulation of AC Microgrid with steady state performance analysis.
3. Simulation/ Emulation of DC Microgrid ith transient performance analysis.
4. Simulation/ Emulation of AC Microgrid with transient performance analysis.
5. Microgrid Stability analysis with study of impact of ESS on stability
(or any other simulations based on Microgrid related systems/ subsystems)
Plant Visit:
Visit to existing Microgrid facility or a Solar PV/ Wind Installation or a power converters manufacturing / research
facility.
Course Project
Course project to be carried out to design /fabricate/ program one of the PCU used in Microgrid.

Note: Students and teachers are encouraged to use the virtual labs whose links are as given below. The remote-access
to Labs in various disciplines of Science and Engineering is available. Students can conduct online experiments which
would help them in learning basic and advanced concepts through remote experimentation.

Virtual Lab Website Reference

1. http://vlab.co.in/broad-area-electrical-engineering
2. https://www.vlab.co.in/broad-area-mechanical-engineering - Energy Storage Labs, Solar Energy lab, Wind
Energy Lab

Term work:
Term work shall consist of minimum eight experiments, at least one plant visit, and one course project. The
distribution of marks shall be as follows:
Experiments Performance : 20 marks
Attendance : 05 marks
Plant Visit report : 10 marks
Course Project report : 10 Marks
Journal & Attendance : 10 marks
The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the minimum passing in the term work.

Oral Examination:
Oral examination will be based on entire lab work of HCMTSBL701-Microgrid and RES Lab

248
 ‘Microgrid Technology - SEM-VIII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Course
Course Name Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
Code
HCMT801 Microgrid System Design 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Course Theory
code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HCMT801 Microgrid System Design 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

Course 1. To illustrate the design philosophies used in the domain of Microgrid.

Objectives 2. To explore the selection of power and control architecture of Microgrids
3. To study the design aspects of AC Microgrid, DC Microgrid and their auxiliary systems
Course Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
Outcomes
1. Select and size various Microgrid energy resources
2. Select the power and control architecture of the Microgrid
3. Select and design the Microgrid’s communication architecture.
4. Illustrate the design aspects DC Microgrids with their control strategies.
5. Illustrate the design aspects AC Microgrids with their control strategies.
6. Illustrate the implementation of the Microgrid islanding detection and anti-islanding scheme/
blackstart operation

Module Contents Hours

Selection/ Sizing of Microgrid Energy Resources
Factors affecting the selection and sizing of energy resources for Microgrid applications,
1.
dependency on type of loads connected, Selection/ Sizing: Renewable energy 07
resources, Energy Storage components. Hybrid combination of RES and ESS.
Selection of Power and Control Architecture:
Factors affecting the selection of Microgrid power and control architecture; Design
2. Consideration for control implementation; Sensors: Selection of sensors and design of 07
sensor Interfaces, design of control Interfaces. Design considerations for DSP/
Microcontroller interfaces
Selection and Design of Communication Architecture
Design considerations for selection of communication network for Microgrid
3. applications; Design and implementation of communication links/ interfaces. 08
Microg4controller programming for Data transfer on communication network. Practical
design considerations for Communication networks.
Design of DC Microgrid
Design DC Power Conditioning Units for RES and ESS, Unidirectional and Bidirectional
4. Converter design, implementation of Control loop with DSP; Programming for Power 12
sharing and Energy Management algorithms; Design of Protection system for DC
Microgrid

249
 Design of AC Microgrid
Design AC Power Conditioning Units for RES and ESS, Unidirectional and Bidirectional
5. Converter design, implementation of Control loop with DSP; Grid Synchronization. 12
Programming for Power sharing and Energy Management algorithms; Design of
Protection system for AC Microgrid.
Islanding in Microgrids
6. Selection and implementation of Islanding detection and anti-islanding scheme; Black- 06
start and Autonomous operations in Microgrids;

Text Books:-

1. Microgrids Design and Implementation edited by Antonio Carlos Zambroni de Souza and Miguel Castilla,
Springer, 2019
2. Microgrids Architectures and Control Edited by Nikos Hatziargyriou, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
3. Power Electronic Converters For Microgrids by Suleiman M. Sharkh, Mohammad A. Abusara, Georgios I.
Orfanoudakis Babar Hussain, IEEE and Wiley, 2014
Reference Books:-

1. Energy Storage for Sustainable Microgrid by David Wenzhong Gao, Elsevier, 2015
2. Cooperative Synchronization in Distributed Microgrid Control by Ali Bidram, Vahidreza Nasirian Ali Davoudi,
and Frank L. Lewis, Springer, 2017
3. Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy Handbook Edited by D. Yogi Goswami and Frank Kreith, 2nd Edition-
2016, CRC
4. Control Circuits In Power Electronics Practical Issues In Design And Implementation Edited by Miguel Castilla,
IET, 2016
5. Hybrid-Renewable Energy Systems in Microgrids- Integration, Developments and Control edited by Hina
Fathimaby et al., Elseiver WoodHead Publishing, 2018
6. Urban DC Microgrid Intelligent Control and Power Flow Optimization by Manuela Sechilariu and Fabrice
Locment, 2016 Elsevier
7. Integrated Power Electronic Converters and Digital Control, by Ali Emadi, Alireza Khaligh, Zhong Nie, and
Young Joo, Lee 2009, CRC Press.

Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on minimum 02
Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course project

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

250
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Robotics

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

251
 University of Mumbai
Robotics
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Examination Scheme and Marks Credit
Year Course Code Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
& and Course Seminar Internal End
Sem Title Theor /Tutorial Pract Assess Sem Term Oral/ Total Credits
y ment Exa Work Pract
m
HXXC501:
TE Industrial 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Robotics
V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04
Tota l Credits = 04

TE HXXC601:
Sem Mechatronics 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VI &IoT
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04

Total Credits = 04

HXXC701:
BE Artificial 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem Intelligence &
VII Data Analysis
HXXSBL701: -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Lab-1
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06
Total Credits = 06

BE HXXC801:
Sem Autonomous 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
VIII Vehicle
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04

Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V,VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

252
 Robotics - SEM-VI
Course Code Course Name Credits

HRC501 Industrial Robotics 4

Course Objectives:

1. To acquaint with significance of robotic system in agile and automated manufacturingprocesses.

2. To make conversant with robotic elements/ peripherals, their selection and interface with
manufacturing equipment’s.
3. To study the basics of robot kinematics
Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion the course, learner will be able to

1. Acquire skills in understanding robot language and programming.

2. Acquire skill in robot task planning for problem solving.
3. Develop skills in understanding various sensors, robot peripherals and their use &
deployment in manufacturing system.
4. Develop skills in identifying areas in manufacturing where robotics can be deployedfor
enhancing productivity.

Module Details Hours

1 Introduction Automation, robotics, Robotic system & Anatomy,Classification and Future

Prospects 2
.
Drives Control Loops, Basic Control System Concepts & Models, Control System Analysis,
Robot Activation & Feedback Components, Position & Velocity Sensors, Actuators and
Power Transmission system.
2 Robot & its Peripherals 10
.
End Effecters: Type mechanical and other grippers, Tool as end effecter.
Sensors: Sensors in Robotics, Tactile Sensors, Proximity & Range Sensors, Sensor Based
Systems, Vision systems and Equipment
Machine vision Introduction, Low level & High level Vision, Sensing & Digitizing, Image
Processing & analysis, Segmentation, Edge detection, Object Description & recognition,
3 interpretationand Applications.
Programming for Robots Method, Robot Programme as a path in space, Motion 10
.
interpolation, motion & task level Languages, Robot languages, Programming in suitable
languages and characteristics ofrobot.
Robot Kinematics Forward, reverse & Homogeneous Transformations, Manipulator
4
Path control and Robot Dynamics. 10
.
Introduction to wheeled and legged robots including humanoids
5 Robot Intelligence & Task Planning Introduction, State space search, Problem
reduction, use of predictive logic, Means. Ends 10
.
Analysis, Problem solving, Robot learning and Robot task planning.

253
 6 Robot application in manufacturing Material transfer, machine loading & un
loading, processing operation, Assembly & inspectors, robotic Cell design & control, 10
.
Social issues & Economics of Robotics.

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination:

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the numberof
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
5. Only four questions need to be solved

Text/References

1. Industrial Robotics, Technology, Programming & Applications, Grover, Weiss, Nagel, Ordey,Mc Graw
Hill.
2. Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision & Intelligence, Fu, Gonzalex, Lee, Mc Graw Hill.
3. Robotic technology & Flexible Automation, S R Deb. TMH.
4. Robotics for Engineers, Yoram Koren , Mc Graw hill.
5. Fundamentals of Robotics, Larry Health.
6. Robot Analysis & Control, H Asada, JJE Slotine.
7.Robot Technology, Ed. A Pugh, Peter Peregrinus Ltd. IEE, UK. 8. Handbook of IndustrialRobotics, Ed.
Shimon. John Wiley
8. Roland Siegwart, Illah Reza Nourbakhsh, and Davide Scaramuzza, “Introduction to AutonomousMobile
Robots”, Bradford Company Scituate, USA

254
 Robotics - SEM-VI
Course Code Course Name Credits
HRC601 Mechatronics & IoT 4

Course Objectives:

1. To associate a mechatronic System with IOT

2. To relate data analytics with IOT
3. To understand Cloud Computing in IOT

Course Outcomes: Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to

1. Describe a Mechatronic System

2. Demonstrate the use of a Micro-controller
3. Understand an IOT System
4. Identify Wireless Technologies Supporting IOT
5. Use Data Analytics in conjunction with IOT &Cloud

Module Details Hours

1. Introduction to Mechatronics: Traditional and Mechatronics Design, Mechatronics Key 6
Elements, Basic Components of Mechatronic Systems , Integrated Design issues in
Mechatronics, Mechatronics Design Process, Mechatronics System in Factory, Home and
Business Applications, Objectives, Advantages and Disadvantages of Mechatronics

2. Overview of Micro-processor ad Micro-controller: 8051 Micro-controllers, Functional Block 10

Diagram and Architecture, Instruction set and Assembly Language Programming, Analog
and Data Acquisition , Digital I/O interfacing, Special Function interfacing, Signal
Conditioning, Special Utility Support hardware Interfacing of HEX – Keyboards, LCD Display,
ADC, DAC andStepper Motor with 8051 Micro-controller

3. Introduction and application to Internet of Things: Need of IoT, history of IOT, Objects of 10
IOT, Level of IOT, Technologies in IOT, Introduction to Arduino and Raspberry Pi,
understanding its components, recognizing the Input/Output, GPIO Connectivity

4. Wireless Technologies Supporting IoT: Protocol Standardization for IoT, Machine to

machine (M2M) and WSN protocols, Basics of RFID , RFID Protocols, Issues with IOT
10
Saudization, Protocols – IEEE 802.15.4, Zigbee, IPv6 Technologies for IOT

5. Data Analytics for IOT: Introduction Apache Hadoop, Using Hadoop MapReduce for Batch 10
Data Analysis, Apache Oozie, Apache Spark, Apache Storm, Using Apache Storm for Real
Tie Data Analysis, Structural Health Monitoring, Case Study: Chef Case Study, puppet Case
Study

6. Introduction to Cloud Computing, Difference between Cloud Computing and FOG 8

Computing: The Next Evolution of Cloud Computing, Role of Cloud Computing in IOT,
Connecting IoT to Cloud, Cloud Storage for IoT Challenge in Integration of IoT with Cloud

255
 Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination:

1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the numberof
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
5. Only four questions need to be solved

Text/Reference Books:

1. Bolton, William. Mechatronics: electronic control systems in mechanical and electricalengineering.

Pearson Education, 2003.
2. De Silva, Clarence W. Mechatronics: an integrated approach. CRC press, 2004.
3. Ayala, Kenneth J. The 8051 microcontrollers. Thomson Delmar Learning, 2005.
4. Zhang, Dan, and Bin Wei, eds. Mechatronics and Robotics Engineering for Advanced andIntelligent
Manufacturing. Springer International Publishing, 2017.
5. Greengard, Samuel. The internet of things. MIT press, 2021.
6. Chaouchi, Hakima, ed. The internet of things: Connecting objects to the web. John Wiley &Sons,
2013.
7. Hintz, Kenneth, and Daniel Tabak. Microcontrollers: architecture, implementation, andprogramming.
McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1992.

256
 Robotics - SEM-VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HRC701 Artificial Intelligence andData Analytics 04

Course Objectives:

1. To gain perspective of AI, its foundations, agent architectures and properties of theenvironment.
2. To understand the basic principles of AI towards problem solving, inference, perception,knowledge
representation, and learning.
3. To investigate probabilistic reasoning under uncertain and incomplete information.
4. To gain the perspective of the concepts of data Mining, modelling and visualization, data
warehousing.
5. To understand various machine learning algorithms.

Course Outcomes: Upon successfully completion of this course, learner will able to...

1. Demonstrate knowledge of the building blocks of AI, intelligent agents and knowledgepresentation
systems.
2. Explain artificial intelligence planning, reasoning, uncertainty handing and expert systems.
3. Describe the concept of data mining, big data, data analytics, business intelligence.
4. Comprehend and implement data mining and machine learning algorithms.

Module Contents Hours.

Introduction to Artificial Intelligence (AI): A. I. Representation, Representation of
knowledge, knowledge base systems, state space search, production systems,
problem characteristics, types of production systems, Intelligent Agents and
01 Environments, nature of environments, structure of agents
6
Knowledge and Reasoning: Knowledge Representation Systems, Properties of Knowledge
Representation Systems, Propositional Logic (PL), First Order Logic: Syntax and
Semantic, Inference in FOL, Forward v/s Backward Chaining

Planning: Introduction to Planning, Planning with State Space Search, Partial Ordered
planning, Hierarchical Planning, Conditional Planning, Brief introduction to single layer and
multiplayer networks Reasoning Under Uncertainty: Handling Uncertain Knowledge,
Random Variables, Prior and Posterior Probability, Inference using Full Joint Distribution,
02 Bayes' Rule and its use, Bayesian Belief Networks, Reasoning in Belief Networks 10
Introduction to Expert Systems: Components of Expert System: Knowledge base, Inference
engine, user interface, workingmemory, Development of Expert Systems

257
 Introduction to Data Mining: What is Data Mining; Kind of patterns to be mined;
Technologies used; Major issues in Data Mining, associative Rule Mining

Introduction to Big Data: Big Data characteristics, types of Big Data, Traditional vs.
Big Data business approach, Case Studies ofBig Data Solutions, Introduction to
03 parallel Processing (MPP) architecture, Hadoop/HDFS and cloud based 8
solutions

Introduction to Business Intelligence: Business intelligence (BI): Managers and

Decision Making, BI for Data analysis and Presenting Results

Data Pre-processing: Notion of data quality. Typical pre-processing operations:

combining values into one, handling incomplete/ incorrect / missing values,
recoding values, sub setting, sorting, transforming scale, determining
percentiles, removing noise, removing inconsistencies, transformations,
standardizing, normalizing - min-max normalization, z-score standardization.
04 10
Data Modeling and visualization: Logic driven modeling, data driven modeling,
basic what-if spreadsheet models

Data Warehousing: What is a data warehouse, need for a data warehouse,

architecture, data marts, OLTP vs OLAP

Machine Learning: Supervised and Unsupervised Learning,

Concepts of Classification, Clustering and prediction
05 8
Performance Measures: Measuring Quality of model- ConfusionMatrix, Accuracy,
Recall, Precision, Specificity, F1 Score, RMSE

Classification: Rule based classification, classification by BayesianBelief

networks, Hidden Markov Models.

Clustering: Hebbian Learning rule, Expectation -Maximizationalgorithm for

clustering
06 10
Dimensionality Reduction: Principal Component Analysis FeatureSelection and
Feature Extraction

Time Series Analysis and Forecasting: Time series patterns,forecast accuracy,

moving averages and exponential smoothing

Assessment:

Internal Assessment for 20 marks:

Consisting Two Compulsory Class Tests

First test based on approximately 40% of contents and second test based on remaining contents
(approximately 40% but excluding contents covered in Test I)

End Semester Examination:

258
 1. Weightage of each module in end semester examination will be proportional to the numberof
respective lecture hours mentioned in the curriculum.
2. Question paper will comprise of total six questions, each carrying 20 marks
3. Question 1 will be compulsory and should cover maximum contents of the curriculum
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature (for example if Q.2 has part (a) from module 3then
part (b) will be from any module other than module 3)
5. Only four questions need to be solved

Text Books:

1. Stuart J. Russell and Peter Norvig, "Artificial Intelligence A Modern Approach ―SecondEdition" Pearson
Education.
2. Elaine Rich and Kevin Knight ―Artificial Intelligenceǁ Third Edition, Tata McGraw-HillEducation Pvt.
Ltd., 2008.
3. George F Luger “Artificial Intelligence” Low Price Edition, Pearson Education, Fourth edition.
4. Deepak Khemani, A first course in Artificial Intelligence, Mc GrawHill
5. P. N. Tan, M. Steinbach, Vipin Kumar, “Introduction to Data Mining”, Pearson Education.
6. G. Shmueli, N.R. Patel, P.C. Bruce, “Data Mining for Business Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and
Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner”, 2nd Edition, Wiley India.
7. Ethem Alpaydın, “Introduction to Machine Learning”, MIT Press
8. Peter Flach, “Machine Learning”, Cambridge University Press

Reference Books:

1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw Hill

2. Kevin P. Murphy, “Machine Learning ― A Probabilistic Perspective”, MIT Press
3. Stephen Marsland, “Machine Learning an Algorithmic Perspective”, CRC Press
4. Shai Shalev-Shwartz, Shai Ben-David, “Understanding Machine Learning”, CambridgeUniversity Press
5. Peter Harrington, “Machine Learning in Action”, DreamTech Press
6. D. W. Patterson, Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems, Prentice Hall.
7. Saroj Kaushik “Artificial Intelligence”, Cengage Learning.

Links for online NPTEL/SWAYAM courses:

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_me71/previewhttps://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs56/preview
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs29/preview https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs08/preview

259
 Robotics - SEM-VII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HRSBL701 Robotics and Automation Lab 2

Course Objectives:

1. To learn the implementation of image processing algorithms.

2. To acquaint with programming of robots.
3. To acquaint with data acquisition over cloud environment
4. To demonstrate the working of machine learning algorithms for data prediction.

Course Outcomes: learner will able to...

1. Develop simple image processing algorithms.

2. Program robots for simple and inverse kinematics and trajectory planning.
3. Acquire sensor data over cloud using microcontroller.
4. Perform predictive data analysis using clustering, classification and regression models.

List of Experiments:

1. Edge detection / segmentation using image processing

2. programming the robots to solve direct and inverse kinematics problems
3. Trajectory planning for Robots
4. Acquisition of sensor data over cloud using microcontroller
5. Implementation of Clustering algorithm (K-means / K-medoids)
6. Data Classification using data prediction tool (classification tree / artificial neural networks,Support
Vector Machines etc.) (Any One)
7. Linear Regression using data predictive tool (multiple regression / artificial neural networksetc.)
(Any One)
8. PLC to operate actuators for automation application

Assessment:

Term Work

Term work shall consist of the experiments as mentioned above.The

distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:

1. Laboratory work (Experiments): 20 marks

2. Attendance: 05 marks

260
 Robotics - SEM-VIII
Course Code Course Name Credits
HRC801 Autonomous Vehicle Systems 4

Course Objectives:

1. To comprehend fundamental aspects of Autonomous Vehicles.

2. To Acquire knowledge of levels of automation of autonomous systems.
3. To Understand the Connectivity Aspects of autonomous automobiles

Course Outcomes: The student will be able to

1. Gain perspective of autonomous systems

2. Understand Automotive Electronics and the operation of ECUs.
3. Discuss about the use of computer vision and learning algorithms in vehicles.
4. Learn Localization, Perception, Prediction planning and control.
5. Summarize the aspects of connectivity
6. Understand cloud platform and ROS.

Module Details Hours

An over view of autonomous driving technologies: Algorithms, client systems,
1 cloud Platforms 6

Overview of Automotive Electronics: Control Systems for

Autonomous vehicles, Electronic Engine control, Chassis and
2 8
Powertrain Electronics, Vehicle motion control, Instrumentation andTelematics &
ADAS
Sensing Technologies
3 Radar & Sonar, Camera, Lidar, GNSS.GPS/IMU 8
Use of Sensor Data, Sensor Fusion and Kalman Filters
Computer Vision and Deep Learning
4 Computer Vision Fundamentals -Advanced Computer Vision , Neural Networks for 10
Image Processing , TensorFlow ,Convolutional Neural Networks
Levels of Automation
Localization - GNSS, LiDAR, Wheel and Visual Odometry, sensorfusion Perception –
Detection and Tracking, DrivingPerception and deeplearning
5 12
Prediction and Routing- Trffic prediction and Lane level routing Decision,
Planning and Control- Motion Planning,Feed back control Cloud System-
Operating systems-ROS, Cloud Platforms
Connected Car Technology:
Connectivity Fundamentals - DSRC (Direct Short Range
6 Communication), Connectivity types -Vehicle-to-Vehicle, Vehicle-to-Roadside and 8
Vehicle-to-Infrastructure, Vehicle-to-pedestrian, Vehicle- to-clous, Vehicle-to-
everything, Applications -Security Issues Technical Issues, Security Issues, Moral and
Legal Issues.

261
Text Books:

1. Shaoshan Liu, Liyun Li, “Creating Autonomous Vehicle Systems”, Morgan and Claypool
Publishers,2017.
2. Liu, Shaoshan. Engineering autonomous vehicles and robots: the DragonFly modular-based
approach. John Wiley & Sons, 2020.
3. Hong Cheng, “Autonomous Intelligent Vehicles: Theory, Algorithms and
Implementation”, Springer,2011.
4. Williams. B. Ribbens: “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 7th Edition, Elsevier Inc,2012.

Reference Books:

1. Marcus Maurer, J.Christian Gerdes, “Autonomous Driving: Technical, Legal andSocial

Aspects”Springer, 2016.
2. Ronald.K.Jurgen, “Autonomous Vehicles for Safer Driving”, SAE International, 2013.
3. James Anderson, KalraNidhi, Karlyn Stanly, “Autonomous Vehicle Technology:A Guide
forPolicymakers”, Rand Co, 2014.
4. Lawrence. D. Burns, Chrostopher Shulgan, “Autonomy – The quest to build thedriverless car
andhow it will reshape our world”, Harper Collins Publishers, 2018

262
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
3D Printing

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

263
 University of Mumbai
Honours* in 3D Printing
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Examination Scheme and Marks Credit
Year & Course Code Scheme Hours / Week Scheme
Sem and Course Seminar/ Internal End Term Oral/
Title Theory Tutorial Pract Assess Sem Work Pract Total Credits
ment Exam
HC3DP501:
Introduction to
TE 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
CAD
Sem V Total 04 - -- 100 - - 100 04

Total Credits = 04

HC3DP601:
3D Printing:
Introduction & 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
TE
Processes
Sem. VI Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HC3DP701:
BE Applications of 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Sem. VII 3D Printing
Total 04 - - 100 - - 100 04
Total Credits = 04

HC3DP801:
3D Printing in
Medical 04 - -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
Technology
BE H3DPSBL801:
Sem. VIII Skill Based Lab
– Digital -- -- 04 -- -- 50 50 100 02
Fabrication
Total 04 - 04 100 50 50 200 06

Total Credits = 06

Total Credits for Semesters V, VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+04+06 = 18

264
 ‘3D Printing’ :SEM-V

Course Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned

Course Name
Code
Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
HC3DP501 Introduction to CAD 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Theory
Course
Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
code
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HC3DP501 Introduction to CAD 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

1. To impart the 3D modelling skills for development of 3D models of basic engineering

components.
Course
Objectives 2. To familiarize with basic concepts of computer graphics.
3. To familiarize with basic concepts of additive and subtractive manufacturing process.
Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able:
1. Illustrate basic understanding of design.

Course 2. Create the CAM Toolpath for specific given operations.

Outcomes
3. Illustrate basic understanding of types of CAD model creation.

4. Generate assembly models of given objects using assembly tools of a modelling software.

5. Identify suitable computer graphics techniques for 3D modelling.

6. Transform, manipulate objects & store and manage data.

Module Contents Hours

Design thinking:
1. 5
Identification of need, Embodiment of design, Generation of ideas and research topics
Subtractive Manufacturing:
Introduction to NC/CNC/DNC machines
2. Additive Manufacturing: 8
Introduction to 3D Printing, Limitations of Subtractive manufacturing, Digital
fabrication
CAD Introduction:
3. History & Scope of CAD, CAD hardware and software, Advantages, Disadvantages and
7
Applications of CAD

265
 Introduction to 2D modelling:
CAD models Creation, Types and uses of models from different perspectives
4. Introduction to assembly drawing: 12
Types of assembly drawings, part drawings, drawings for catalogues and instruction
manuals, patent drawings, drawing standards
Computer Graphics:
Overview of 2D and 3D Computer Graphics, Parametric representation of curves:
Synthetic Curves - Bezier curves, Hermite Curves, B-spline curves
5. Geometric Modelling: 12
Wire Frame Modelling, Solid Modelling, Surface Modelling, Parametric Modelling,
Feature based Modelling, Constraint Based Modelling.
Geometric Transformation:
6. 2D & 3D Transformations (Translation, Rotation, & Scaling & Reflection), 8
Concatenations

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.

2. A textbook of Machine Drawing by Laxminarayan and M.L.Mathur, Jain brothers Delhi
3. CAD/ CAM, Theory & Practice, Ibrahim Zeid, R. Sivasubramanian, Tata McGraw Hill
Publications
4. CAD/CAM Principles and Applications, P. N. Rao, Tata McGraw Hill Publications
5. CAD/CAM Computer Aided and Manufacturing, Mikell P. Groover and Emory W. Zimmers, Jr.,
Eastern Economy Edition
6. CNC Technology and Programming, Krar, S., and Gill, A., McGraw Hill Publishers.
7. Medical Modelling The Application of Advanced Design and Rapid Prototyping Techniques in
Medicine, Richard Bibb, Dominic Eggbeer and Abby Paterson, Woodhead Publishing Series in
Biomaterials: Number 91, Elsevier Ltd.
8. Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, I.
Gibson l D. W. Rosen l B. Stucker, Springer Publication.

Website Reference / Video Courses:

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102101/
2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102065/
3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106/102/106102065/
4. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102103/
5. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/105/112105211/
6. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/104/112104265/
7. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2cCMty9v3Tg
8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2zPh26Q1BT8

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project

Theory Examination:
266
1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.
2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will
be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

267
 ‘3D Printing’ - SEM-VI
Teaching Scheme
Course Course Name (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Code Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
3D Printing: Introduction
HC3DP601 04 - 04 - 04
&
Processes

Examination Scheme
Theory
Course Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam
Term
code Sem. Duration Total
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Exam Work
(Hrs.)
3D Printing: Introduction
HC3DP601 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
&
Processes

Course 1. To familiarise with importance of Rapid Prototyping.

Objectives 2. To study programming aspects of subtractive manufacturing process.
3. To familiarize with basic process of additive manufacturing in particularly 3D printing.
Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:
1. Illustrate understanding of various cost-effective alternatives for manufacturing
productsand select the feasible RP process for specific technical applications
2. Build and create data for 3D printing of any given object using liquid based rapid
prototypingand tooling processes
3. Build and create data for 3D printing of any given object using solid based rapid
prototypingand tooling processes
4. Build and create data for 3D printing of any given object using powder based rapid
prototyping and tooling processes
Course 5. Select an appropriate material and tools to develop a given product using rapid
Outcomes prototypingmachine
6. Select proper rapid prototyping and reverse engineering techniques for specific technical
applications.
7. Demonstrate basics of virtual reality

Module Contents Hours

Additive Manufacturing:

Introduction to AM, Classification of AM Processes, Advantages & disadvantages, AM

1. Applications; in Design, Concept Models, Form & fit checking, Functional testing, CAD 9
data verification, Rapid Tooling, and bio fabrication.

268
 Liquid based systems:

Stereo lithography apparatus (SLA): Models and specifications, process, working

principle, photopolymers, photo polymerization, layering technology, laser and laser
scanning, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.
2. 9
Solid ground curing (SGC): Models and specifications, process, working, principle,
applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

Solid based systems:

Laminated object manufacturing (LOM): Models and specifications, Process, Working
principle, Applications, Advantages and disadvantages, Case studies.
3. 8
Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM): Models and specifications, Process, Working
principle, Applications, Advantages and disadvantages, Case studies.

Powder Based Systems:

Selective laser sintering (SLS): Models and specifications, process, working principle,
applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

Three-dimensional printing (3DP): Models and specification, process, working

4. principle, applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies. 8
Electron Beam Melting (EBM): Models and specification, process, working principle,
applications, advantages and disadvantages, case studies.

Materials for Additive manufacturing

Types of material: polymers, metals, ceramics and composites, liquid-based materials,

photo polymer development, solid based materials, powder-based materials.

5. Material properties 10
Colour, dimensional accuracy, stability, surface finish, machinability, environmental
resistance, operational properties.

Reverse Engineering
Introduction to Digitizing Methods, Contact type and Non-contact type, Brief
introduction to the types of medical imaging.
6. 8
Virtual reality: Definition, features of VR, Technologies used in VR, Introduction to
Augmented reality

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Rapid Prototyping, Principles and Applications by Rafiq I. Noorani, Wiley & Sons
2. Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications by Chua C.K, Leong K.F and Lim C.S, 2nd Edition,
World Scientific
3. Rapid Manufacturing – An Industrial revolution for the digital age by N.Hopkinson, R.J. M. Hauge,
P M, Dickens, Wiley

269
 4. Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Medical applications: Reverse Engineering, Software
conversion and Rapid Prototyping by Ian Gibson, Wiley
5. Rapid Prototyping and Manufacturing: Fundamentals of Stereolithography by Paul F. Jacobs,
McGraw Hill
6. Rapid Manufacturing by Pham D T and Dimov S S, Springer Verlog
7. “Rapid Prototyping” Chee Kai Chua, World Scientific Publishing

Website Reference / Video Courses:

NPTEL Web Course:

1. Rapid Manufacturing, By Prof. J. Ramkumar, Prof. Amandeep Singh, IIT Kanpur,

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_me50/preview
2. Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing Technologies, By Prof. Sajan Kapil, IIT Guwahati,
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me115/preview

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will
be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

270
 ‘3D Printing’ - SEM-VII
Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned
(Contact Hours)
Course Course Name
Code Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total

HC3DP701 Applications of 3D Printing 04 - 04 - 04

Examination Scheme
Theory
Course
Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
code
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
HC3DP701 Applications of 3D Printing 20 20 20 80 03 - 100

Course 1. To familiarise with applications of 3D Printing technologies.

Objectives 2. To acquaint with the process of using biomedical data for 3D modelling.
3. To familiarize with basic process of additive manufacturing in different industries.
Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able:
1. To understand the perspectives for 3D printing in Jewellery industries for selection of an
appropriate material and tools to develop a given product using rapid prototyping
techniques.
2. Develop 3D model using various types of available biomedical data.
3. To understand the perspectives for 3D printing in Aerospace industries for selection of an
appropriate material and tools to develop a given product using rapid prototyping
techniques.
Course 4. Illustrate understanding of various cost-effective alternatives for manufacturing products.
Outcomes 5. Use rapid prototyping and tooling concepts in any real-life applications.
6. Contribute towards the Product Development at the respective domain in the industry

Module Contents Hours

Applications in Jewellery Industries

Introduction to 3D Printing Jewellery: Steps Involved in Jewellery 3D Printing, Why

3D Printing for Jewellery Making, Techniques Involved in Jewellery 3D Printing, 3D
Printing Processes for Jewellery Designing, Challenges with Jewellery 3D Printing, 3D
1. Printing vs Traditional Methods, Types of Jewellery can be 3D Printed, 10

3D Printers for Jewellery Making – How They Work & Which to Choose
Medical Applications in Additive manufacturing
2. 8
Presurgical Planning Models, Mechanical Bone Replicas, Teaching Aids and
Simulators, Customized Surgical Implants, Prosthetics and Orthotics’, Anthropology,
Forensics

271
 Applications in Aerospace Industries

3. Use of AM in Aerospace, Metal AM in Aerospace, Super alloys, Non-Destructive 8

Evaluation, Space technology

Applications in Tooling

4. Methods of Rapid tooling: Direct Soft Tooling, Indirect Soft Tooling, Direct Hard 9
Tooling, Indirect Hard Tooling.

Applications in various industries

5. Automotive, Défense, Coin industries, Household appliance, Toy industry, Ship 9

building, Un-manned Aerial Vehicles (UAV), Furniture, Construction and food

Applications in Design

6. Design for Additive Manufacturing (DFAM), Topology optimization for AM, Generative 8
design

Applications in Engineering, Analysis and Planning

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Makers: The New Industrial Revolution (Telord 1403), by Chris Anderson

2. Medical Modelling The Application of Advanced Design and Rapid Prototyping Techniques in
Medicine, Richard Bibb, Dominic Eggbeer and Abby Paterson, Woodhead Publishing Series in
Biomaterials: Number 91, Elsevier Ltd.
3. 3D Printing in Aerospace and Defense Standard Requirements, by Gerardus Blokdyk
4. Additive Manufacturing for the Aerospace Industry, by Francis Froes, Rodney Boyer
5. 3D Printing in Medicine, 1st Edition - April 1, 2017, by Deepak Kalaskar
6. An Update on Medical 3D Printing Hardcover – 1 January 2019, by Dr Raju Vaishya, Dr Abid
Haleem, Dr Lalit Maini
7. 3D Printing in Medicine: A Practical Guide for Medical Professionals Hardcover – Import, 12
October 2017, by Frank J. Rybicki, Gerald T. Grant
8. Rapid Prototyping, Principles and Applications by Rafiq I. Noorani, Wiley & Sons
9. Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications by Chua C.K, Leong K.F and Lim C.S, 2nd Edition,
World Scientific
10. Rapid Manufacturing – An Industrial revolution for the digital age by N.Hopkinson, R.J. M. Hauge,
P M, Dickens, Wiley
11. Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Medical applications: Reverse Engineering, Software
conversion and Rapid Prototyping by Ian Gibson, Wiley

Website Reference / Video Courses:

NPTEL Web Course:

1. Rapid Manufacturing, By Prof. J. Ramkumar, Prof. Amandeep Singh, IIT Kanpur,

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_me50/preview
2. Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing Technologies, By Prof. Sajan Kapil, IIT Guwahati,
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me115/preview

Assessment:
272
 Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will
be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

273
 ‘3D Printing’ - SEM-VIII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Course Course Name
Code Theory Tutorial Theory Tutorial Total
3D Printing in Medical
HC3DP801 04 - 04 - 04
Technology

Examination Scheme
Theory
Course
Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam Term Total
code
Sem. Duration Work
Test 1 Test 2 Avg.
Exam (Hrs.)
3D Printing in Medical
HC3DP801 20 20 20 80 03 - 100
Technology

Course 1. To acquaint with the process of using biomedical data for 3D modeling.

Objectives 2. To familiarize with basic process of additive manufacturing in particularly 3D printing

Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:

1. Describe the creation of highly accurate physical models of human anatomy

2. Identify medical imaging for human body

Course 3. Understand the modelling based on Biomedical data
Outcomes
4. Build and create data for 3D printing of any given object using rapid prototyping and tooling
processes.

5. Illustrate the understanding of different manufacturing processes

6. To Identify the processes and tooling concepts in Biomedical

Module Contents Hours

Introduction
1. Stages of the medical modelling process, The human form, Basic anatomical 8
terminology, technical terminology

Introduction to medical imaging

2. Computed tomography (CT), Cone beam CT (CBCT), Magnetic resonance (MR), 10
Noncontact surface scanning, Medical scan data, Point cloud data
Working with medical scan data
Pixel data operations, Using CT data: a worked example, Point cloud data operations,
3. 12
Two-dimensional formats, Pseudo 3D formats, True 3D formats, File management and
exchange
Physical reproduction
4. Basic principles of medical modelling: orientation, sectioning, separating and joining, 8
trapped volumes

274
 Introduction to Additive manufacturing processes used for Bio-Modelling, Computer
5. numerical controlled machining, Cleaning and Sterilizing medical models 8

6. Case Studies based on Bio-Modelling & Future Development 6

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Medical Modelling The Application of Advanced Design and Rapid Prototyping Techniques in
Medicine, Richard Bibb, Dominic Eggbeer and Abby Paterson, Woodhead Publishing Series in
Biomaterials: Number 91, Elsevier Ltd.
2. 3D Printing in Medicine, 1st Edition - April 1, 2017, by Deepak Kalaskar
3. An Update on Medical 3D Printing Hardcover – 1 January 2019, by Dr Raju Vaishya, Dr Abid
Haleem, Dr Lalit Maini
4. 3D Printing in Medicine: A Practical Guide for Medical Professionals Hardcover – Import, 12
October 2017, by Frank J. Rybicki, Gerald T. Grant
5. Rapid Prototyping, Principles and Applications by Rafiq I. Noorani, Wiley & Sons
6. Rapid Prototyping: Principles and Applications by Chua C.K, Leong K.F and Lim C.S, 2nd Edition,
World Scientific
7. Advanced Manufacturing Technology for Medical applications: Reverse Engineering, Software
conversion and Rapid Prototyping by Ian Gibson, Wiley

Website Reference / Video Courses:

NPTEL Web Course:

1. Rapid Manufacturing, By Prof. J. Ramkumar, Prof. Amandeep Singh, IIT Kanpur,

https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_me50/preview
2. Fundamentals of Additive Manufacturing Technologies, By Prof. Sajan Kapil, IIT Guwahati,
https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me115/preview

Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which; one should be compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 marks.

2. Total four questions need to be solved.
3. Q.1 will be compulsory, based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 2 to 5 marks will
be asked.
4. Remaining question will be randomly selected from all the modules.

275
 ‘3D Printing’ - SEM-VIII
Teaching Scheme (Contact Hours) Credits Assigned
Course Code Course Name Practical/ Practical/
Theory Theory Total
Tutorial Tutorial
Skill Based Lab –
H3DPSBL701 04 -- 04 04
Digital Fabrication

Examination Scheme

Theory
Course code Course Name Internal Assessment End Exam
Term
Sem. Duration Oral Total
Test 1 Test 2 Avg. Work
Exam (Hrs.)
Skill Based Lab –
H3DPSBL801 - - - - - 50 50 100
Digital Fabrication

1. To impart the geometric modeling skills for development of 3D models of engineering

components.

2. To familiarize with production drawings with important features like GD &T, surface finish,
Course
heat treatments etc.
Objectives
3. To familiarize with additive manufacturing process
4. To acquaint with basic process of 3D modeling using biomedical data.
Upon successful completion of this course, the learner will be able to:

1. Illustrate basic understanding of types of CAD model creation.

2. Build geometric model of a given object using 3D modeling software

Course 3. Generate assembly models of given objects using assembly tools of a modeling software
Outcomes
4. Demonstrate CAM Tool path and prepare NC- G code

5. Develop 3D model using available biomedical data

6. Build any given real life object using 3D printing process

Module Contents Hours

Geometric modeling of an Engineering component, demonstrating skills in sketching

commands of creation (line, arc, circle etc.) modification (Trim, move, rotate etc.) and
1. viewing using (Pan, Zoom, Rotate etc.) 06

Demonstrating modeling skills using commands like Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, Blend,
Loft etc. Mesh of curves, free form surfaces etc. Feature manipulation using Copy,
2. Edit, Pattern, Suppress, History operations etc. 04

276
 Assembly: Constraints, Exploded views, interference check. Drafting (Layouts,
3. 04
Standard & Sectional Views, Detailing & Plotting).

4. Solid modeling of any engineering component using any 3D modeling software. 04

5. Non - Contact Scanning – Generation of CAD model using 3D scanning equipment. 04

Reverse Engineering of a legacy component – Selection of components, 3D scanning,

6. 04
CAD model verification, 3D print of CAD model.
Modeling of a component using 3D modelling software and development of G – Code
7. 06
output using Fractal Software.
Design an object with free form surface using Autodesk Fusion 360 and development
8. 04
of G – Code output using Fractal Software.
9. Segmentation in Slicer’s Segment Editor module for the purpose of 3D printing. 04
Creation of 3D model from 2D images using any image processing software and
printing it. (3D Slicer open source) (Application: Any body organ like Heart,
10. 04
Gallbladder etc. as per available Dicom files)

Development of physical 3D mechanical structure using any one of the Additive

11. 06
manufacturing processes – Material to be used Metal

Development of physical 3D mechanical structure using any one of the Additive

12. 04
manufacturing processes - Material to be used Plastic

Text/Reference Books:-

1. Machine Drawing by N.D. Bhatt.

2. A textbook of Machine Drawing by Laxminarayan and M.L.Mathur, Jain brothers Delhi
3. Machine Drawing by K.I. Narayana, P. Kannaiah, K.Venkata Reddy
4. Medical Modelling - The Application of Advanced Design and Rapid Prototyping Techniques in Medicine,
Richard Bibb, Dominic Eggbeer and Abby Paterson, Woodhead Publishing Series in Biomaterials:
Number 91, Elsevier Ltd
5. Biomaterials, artificial organs and tissue engineering, Edited by Larry L. Hench and Julian R. Jones,
Woodhead Publishing and Maney Publishing, CRC Press 2005
6. Additive Manufacturing Technologies: Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing, I. Gibson l D.
W. Rosen l B. Stucker, Springer Publication.

Website Reference / Video Courses:

1. https://www.autodesk.in/products/fusion-360/learn-support
2. https://knowledge.autodesk.com/support/inventor
277
 3. https://www.slicer.org/wiki/Documentation/4.10/Training

Term work:

Term work shall consist of all twelve experiments.The

distribution of marks shall be as follows:

Experiments Performance : 20 marks

Course Project : 20 marks

Attendance : 10 marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the minimum passing in the term work.

Oral Examination:

Oral examination will be based on entire lab work of H3DPSBL801 - Skill Based Lab – DigitalFabrication

278
 UNIVERSITY OF MUMBAI

Syllabus for

Honours/Minor Degree Program

In
Industrial Automation

FACULTY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

(As per AICTE guidelines with effect from the academic year 2022-2023)

279
 University of Mumbai
Industrial Automation
(With effect from 2022-23)
Teaching Scheme Credit
Hours / Week Examination Scheme and Marks Scheme
Seminar Internal End
Course Code and Pract
Year Assess Sem Term
Course Title /Tutoria . and
& Sem Theory Pract ment Exam Work Total Credits
l Oral

HIAC501:
Fundamentals of 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
TE Industrial
Sem Automation
V Total 04 ‐ ‐‐ 100 ‐ ‐ 100 04
Total Credits = 04

TE HIAC601:
Industrial Internet
Sem. 04 -- -- 20 80 -- -- 100 04
of Thing (IIOT)
VI Total 04 ‐ ‐ 100 ‐ ‐ 100 04

Total Credits = 04

HIAC701:
AI and ML for 04 -- -- 20 80 - - 100 04
BE Automation
Sem HIAL701:
AI and ML for - ‐ 04 ‐ ‐ 50 50 100 02
VII
Automation-Lab
Total 04 ‐ 04 100 100 200 06

Total Credits = 06

BE HIAC801:
Applied Predictive 04 -- -- 20 80 - - 100 04
Sem
Analytics
VIII Total 04 ‐ ‐ 100 ‐ 100 04

Total Credits = 04

Total Credits for Semesters V, VI, VII &VIII = 04+04+06+04 = 18

280
 Industrial Automation : SEM V
Course
Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned
code

Fundamentals of Pract
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Tut. Total
HIAC 501 Industrial Automation
4 - - 4 - - 4

Examination scheme
Course Theory (out of 100)
Pract.
Code Course Name Internal Assessment End Term Oral Total
and
sem work
Test1 Test2 Avg. Oral
Exam
HIAC Fundamentals of
501 Industrial
Automation 20 20 20 80 - - - 100

1. To impart knowledge of Industrial Automation.

2. To make the students learn industrial sensors.
3. To make the students learn various actuators.
Course objective 4. To make the students learn about controller strategy and various automation tools like
PLC.
5. To give the students an overview of DCS and HMI.
6. To give students an overview of communication protocols.
The students will able to

Course Outcome 1. Recognize Industrial automation.

2. Select and configure industrial sensors.
3. Comprehend and work with various actuators.
4. Know various automation tools.
5. Work with DCS and HMI.
6. Select various communication protocols.

281
Pre requisites: Sensors and Transducers basics

Module Contents Hours. CO

1 Introduction
Introduction- Automation in production system, Principles and strategies of automation,
Basic elements of an automated system, types of Automation, Hierarchical level in
automation, Advanced automation functions, Automated flow lines and transfer
mechanisms.

Material handling and identification technologies, Conveyor system, Automated guided 6 CO1
vehicle system, Automated storage systems, Automatic

Identification Methods.

2 Sensors
Introduction to Industrial Measurement, overview of sensors, classification, sensor
characteristics, physical principles of sensing, sensor Materials and Technologies.

Inductive sensors, capacitive sensors, vision sensors, ultrasonic sensors, Electronic

SMART Digital remote sensor , Robotic sensors, Tactile sensing, Proximity sensors, Range
sensor, Position sensors, Fibre optic sensors, Guided microwave sensor, wireless sensors,
8 CO2
Electrical characteristics of sensors,

specifications of sensors, performance testing, selection guidelines.

3 Actuators
Pneumatic and hydraulic-directional and pressure control valves, cylinders, servo
proportional control valves, rotary actuators.

Electrical actuation: A.C and DC motors, stepper motors, mechanical switches and solid
state switches.

Mechanical Actuation: types of motion, kinematic chain, cams, gears, ratchets and pawl, 8 CO3
belt and chain drives, bearings, mechanical aspects of motor selection, piezoelectric
actuators, magneto-strictive actuators, memory metal

actuators. Selection Criteria of Actuators

4 Controller strategy / Automation Tools. PLC
Overview and Features, Types, specifications, PLC Architecture, PLC working, PLC SCAN,
new trends in PLC, PLC programming Languages, PLC instructions set, Development of
Ladder programme, case study Example, PLC Applications, Overview of Motion
control.PLC Installation and wiring.
SCADA
Overview, SCADA Architecture, SCADA-Hardware functions, New trends in scada systems,
applications, case study examples.
10 CO4

282
 5 DCS & HMI
DCS: Overview and Features of DCS, DCS Architecture, Hardware elements, working of
DCS, DCS displays, DCS interfacing with PLC , DCS wiring diagram. Applications and
suppliers. 10
CO5
HMI : Overview, need, Types, wiring practice, Data Handling , configuration and interfacing
with PLC & PC, Communication standards. ASM Graphics

6 Communication protocols
Overview of sensor networks, AS interface,CAN, HART, FF, Profibus, Interbus, Mbus, 6
Wireless sensor network, networks-IEEE, Zigbee, sensor interfaces. CO6

Internal Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be a compulsory class test (on
minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or course
project.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will consist of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub
questions of 4 or 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weight age of each module will be proportional to number of
respective Lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Text Books Recommended:

1. Jacob K Freden; Handbook of Modern sensors, Springer, 5th Edition
2. Tony Kuphaldt; Lessons in industrial instrumentation, version 4
3. Walt Boyes; Instrumentation Reference book , Fourth Edition.
4. William C Dunn; Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and process control, McGraw Hill.
5. C.L.Albert and D.A. Coggan, Fundamentals of Industrial Control, ISA, 1992.
6. Bela G. Liptak, Instrument Engineer’s HandBook – Process Measurement and Analysis, ISA CRC
Press , 4th Edition, 2003.
7. Andrew Williams, Applied instrumentation in the process industries, 2nd Edition, Vol. 1 & 3,
Gulf publishing company.
8. Douglas. M.Considine; Process Instruments & Control Handbook, McGraw-Hill
9. S C Mukhopadhyay; Intelligent sensing, Instrumentation and Measurement, Springer.

283
 Industrial Automation : Sem. VI
Course Course Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned
code
Industrial Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
HIAC601 Internet of
Thing (IIOT) 4 - - 4 - - 4

Examination scheme

Course Course Name Theory (out of 100)

Pract.
Code Internal Assessment End Term
and Oral Total
sem work
Test1 Test2 Avg. Oral
Exam
HIAC601 Industrial 20 20 20 80 - - - 100
Internet of Thing
(IIOT)

1. Introduce how IoT has become a game changer in the new economy where the
customers are looking for integrated value
Course
2. Bring the IoT perspective in thinking and building solutions
objective
3. Introduce the tools and techniques that enable IoT solution and
Security aspects.

The students will able to

1. Describe IOT, IIOT

2. Design and develop the real-life IoT applications using off the shelf hardware and software
Course 3. Know various IoT Layers and their relative importance
Outcome 4. Recognize various IoT platforms and Security
5. Realize the importance of Data Analytics in IoT
6. Design and thinking concepts of IIoT

284
Prerequisites: Microcontroller based Architecture and Programming

Module Content Hours CO

Introduction:
Introduction of Industry 4.0, Elements of industry 4.0, Introduction to IOT, what is
IIOT? IOT Vs. IIOT, History of IIOT, Components of IIOT - Sensors, Interface,
1 Networks, People &Process, Hype cycle, IOT Market, Trends& future Real-life CO1
examples, Key terms – IOT Platform, Interfaces, API, clouds, Role of IIOT in
Manufacturing Processes 6

Use of IIOT in plant maintenance practices, Sustainability through Business

excellence tools Challenges & Benefits in implementing IIOT

Architectures:
Overview of IOT components; Various Architectures of IOT and IIOT, Advantages &
disadvantages, Industrial Internet - Reference Architecture; IIOT System
2 components: Sensors, Gateways, Routers, Modem, Cloud brokers, servers and its 8 CO2
integration, WSN,
WSN network design for IOT

Sensor and Interfacing:

Introduction to sensors, Transducers, Classification, Roles of sensors in IIOT,
3 Various types of sensors, Design of sensors, sensor architecture, special 10 CO3
requirements for IIOT sensors, Role of actuators, types of actuators, IT and OT
Integration.
Protocols and Cloud:
Need of protocols; Types of Protocols, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi direct, Zigbee, Z wave, BACnet,
BLE, Modbus, SPI , I2C, IIOT protocols –COAP, MQTT,6lowpan, lwm2m, AMPQ CO4
4 IIOT cloud platforms: Overview of cots cloud platforms, Predix, thingworks, azure 8
etc. Data analytics, cloud services, Business models: Saas, Paas, Iaas.

Cyber security for industry, Privacy, and Governance

Cyber physical system, cyber security life cycle, cyber security guidelines, standard
IEC 62443
Introduction to web security, Conventional web technology and relationship with CO5

5 IIOT, Vulnerabilities of IoT, Privacy, Security requirements, Threat analysis, Trust, 8

IoT security tomography and layered attacker model, Identity establishment,
Access control, Message integrity, non-repudiation and
availability, Security model for IoT.
IOT Analytics and CASE study:
Role of Analytics in IOT, Data visualization Techniques, Introduction to R
Programming, Statistical Methods.
Internet of Things Applications: Smart Metering, e-Health Body Area Networks, City CO6
6 Automation, Automotive Applications, Home Automation, Smart Cards, Plant 8
Automation,

285
Real life examples of IIOT in Manufacturing Sector.

286
Internal Assessment:
Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be a compulsory class test
(on minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or
course project.

Theory Examination:
1. Question paper will consist of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.
2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4
or 5 marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weight age of each module will be proportional to number of
respective Lecture hours as mentioned in the syllabus.

Text Books:
1. Daniel Minoli, Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving
World of M2M Communications, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications 2.
Bernd Scholz-Reiter,Florian
2. Michahelles, Architecting the Internet of Things, ISBN 978-3- 642-19156-5 e-ISBN
978-3-642-19157-2,Springer

Reference Books:
1. Hakima Chaouchi, The Internet of Things Connecting Objects to the Web, ISBN :
978-1- 84821-140-7, Willy Publications
2. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, Omar Elloumi, The Internet of Things: Key
Applications and Protocols, ISBN: 978-1-119-99435-0, 2nd Edition, Willy Publications
3. Inside the Internet of Things (IoT), Deloitte University Press
4. Internet of Things- From Research and Innovation to Market Deployment; By Ovidiu &
Peter; River Publishers Series
5. Five thoughts from the Father of the Internet of Things; by ByPhil Wainewright - Kevin
Ashton
6. How Protocol Conversion Addresses IIoT Challenges: White Paper By Red Lion.
 Industrial Automation: Sem. VII
Subject Subject Name Teaching Scheme Credit Assigned
Code Th Pract. Tut. Th Pract. Tut. Total
Artificial Intelligence and
HIAC701 Machine Learning for 4 - - 4 - - 4
Automation

Examination scheme
Sub Theory
Subject Name Pract.
Code Internal Assessment End Term
and Oral Total
sem work
Test1 Test2 Avg. Oral
Exam
Artificial Intelligence
HIAC701 and Machine Learning 20 20 20 80 - - - 100
for Automation

Course 1. To familiarize student with basic concepts of Artificial Intelligence and Machine learning.
Objectives 2. To provide understanding of the concepts of regression, classification, clustering and
deep learning algorithms.
3. To introduce the students to various applications of Artificial Intelligence and Machine
learning for industrial automation
Course Students will be able to:
Outcomes
1. Introduce concepts of Artificial Intelligence and Machine learning
2. Explicate statistical tools and development of database for AI/ML.
3. Analyze the various algorithms for Regression, Classification and Clustering.
4. Evaluate metrics for ML/AI algorithms.
5. Examine the algorithms for deep learning.
6. Explain examples of ML/AI algorithms for industrial automation.

Details of Syllabus:

CO
Module Contents Hrs.
Mapping
Introduction to Artificial Intelligence:
1. Evolution, definition, types, application examples, benefits/advantages, 06 CO1
limitations/issues, comparison.
Review of statistical concepts:
Mean, variance, covariance, standard deviation, random variable, probability
distribution, probability distribution function, normal distribution, binomial
2. 08 CO2
distribution, poisson distribution, central limit theorem, vector norms, principal
component analysis.
Data collection and preparation:
 Collecting, cleaning, normalization, standardization, missing data, underfitting
and overfitting, neglecting outliers, annotation, labelling. Data Splitting: Training,
Validation, and Test Datasets. Public datasets for machine learning.
Regression:
Simple Linear regression, Multiple Linear Regression, Polynomial Regression,
Logistic regression.
Classifiers:
3. 10 CO3
k-Nearest Neighbours, Decision trees, naïve Bayes, SVM for Linearly separable
data, Kernel SVM for Non-Linearly separable data.
Clustering:
k-means clustering.
Evaluation Metrics:
True Positive, True Negative, False Positive, False Negative, accuracy, precision,
4. 04 CO4
recall or True Positive Rate, False Positive Rate, Receiver Operating
Characteristic, Area Under the Curve, Confusion matrix, F-score.
Deep Learning:
5. Multilayer Perceptron (MLP), Convolutional Neural Network (CNN), Recurrent 08 CO5
Neural Network (RNN)
Application in Industrial Automation: Robotics, Factory automation, Process
control, Electrical Engineering
6. 12 CO6
Challenges, Data Screening, Feature Engineering, Projected improvement, Model
Design, Limitations, Future scope, References.

Internal Assessment:

Internal Assessment consists of two tests out of which, one should be compulsory class test (on
Minimum 02 Modules) and the other is either a class test or assignment on live problems or Course
project.

Theory Examination:

1. Question paper will comprise of 6 questions, each carrying 20 Marks.

2. Total 4 questions need to be solved.
3. Question No. 1 will be compulsory and based on entire syllabus wherein sub questions of 4 or 5
marks will be asked.
4. Remaining questions will be mixed in nature.
5. In question paper weightage of each module will be proportional to number of respective lecture
hours as mentioned in the syllabus.
Text Books:

1. Harrington, Peter. Machine learning in action. Simon and Schuster, 2012.

2. Zheng, Alice, and Amanda Casari. Feature engineering for machine learning: principles and techniques
for data scientists. " O'Reilly Media, Inc.", 2018.
3. Jiang, Hui. Machine Learning Fundamentals: A Concise Introduction. Cambridge University Press,
2021.
4. Huyen, C. “Designing Machine Learning Systems: An Iterative Process for Production-Ready
Applications”, O'Reilly Media, 2022.
5. Gupta, Itisha, and Garima Nagpal. Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems. Stylus Publishing, LLC,
2020.
Reference Books:

1. Pandey, Yogendra Narayan, et al. Machine Learning in the Oil and Gas Industry. apress, Texas, 2020.
2. Bangert, Patrick, ed. Machine learning and data science in the oil and gas industry: Best practices,
tools, and case studies. Gulf Professional Publishing, 2021.
3. Das, Santosh Kumar, et al., eds. Machine learning algorithms for industrial applications. Cham:
Springer, 2021.
 Industrial Automation: SEM VII

Teaching Scheme Credits Assigned

(Contact Hours)
Course Code Course Name
Th Pract. Tut. Th Pract. Tut. Total
Artificial Intelligence
and Machine
HIAL701 - 4 - - 4 - 2
Learning for
Automation Lab

Examination scheme

Theory (out of 100)

Subject Pract.
Subject Name Term
Code Internal Assessment End and Oral Total
sem work
Oral
Test1 Test2 Avg. Exam

Artificial Intelligence
and Machine
HIAL701 -- -- -- -- 50 50 100
Learning for
Automation Lab

Course 1. To familiarize student with basic concepts of Artificial Intelligence and Machine
Objectives learning.
2. To provide understanding of the concepts of regression, classification, clustering
and deep learning algorithms.
3. To introduce the students to various applications of Artificial Intelligence and
Machine learning for industrial automation
Course Students will be able to
Outcomes
1. Write programs based on data compression and dimensionality reduction.
2. Write programs for regression, classification and clustering.
3. Calculate evaluation metrics for various algorithms.
4. Write programs based on deep learning algorithms.
5. Demonstrate working of AI/ML in Robotics and Factory automation.
6. Validate working of AI/ML in Process control and Electrical Engineering.

Syllabus: Same as that of Subject HIAC701.

List of the Laboratory Experiments:

 Sr. Contents CO
No. Mapping
Write a python program to perform PCA for dimension reduction or data CO1
1.
compression.
Develop/download database of any industrial machine/system. Explain hardware
2. system used for data collection. Explain specifications/characteristics of collected CO2
data.
Write a python program to implement linear regression with one variable, two CO2
3.
variables for given dataset.
4. Demonstrate the working of SVM classifier for a linearly separable data set. CO2
Demonstrate the working of Kernel SVM classifier for a non-linearly separable data CO2
5.
set.
Demonstrate the working of the decision tree based ID3 algorithm. Use an CO2
6. appropriate data set for building the decision tree and apply this knowledge to
classify a new sample.
Calculate evaluation metrics such as accuracy, precision, recall, confusion matrix, F- CO3
7.
score, etc for regression, classification and clustering algorithms.
Calculate evaluation metrics such as Receiver Operating Characteristic, Area Under CO3
8.
the Curve, etc for regression, classification and clustering algorithms.
Implement multilayer Perceptron (MLP) for predicting stock price. Time series CO4
9.
forecasting.
Implement Convolutional Neural Network (CNN) to recognize hand-written digits CO4
10.
dataset.
11. Implement Recurrent Neural Network (RNN) for speech recognition. CO4
12. Case study or mini project on application of AI/ML in Robotics. CO5
13. Case study or mini project on application of AI/ML in Factory automation. CO5
14. Case study or mini project on application of AI/ML in Process control. CO6
15. Case study or mini project on application of AI/ML in Electrical Engineering. CO6

Any other experiment based on syllabus which will help students to understand topic/concept.

Practical and Oral Examination:

Practical and Oral examination will be based on entire syllabus.

Term Work:
Term work shall consist of minimum 12 experiments.
The distribution of marks for term work shall be as follows:
Laboratory work (Experiments): 20 Marks
Laboratory work (programs / journal): 20 Marks
Attendance: 10 Marks

The final certification and acceptance of term work ensures the satisfactory performance of laboratory work and
minimum passing in the term work.
 Industrial Automation: SEM VIII
Subject
Subject Name Teaching scheme Credit assigned
code
Theory Pract. Tut. Theory Pract. Tut. Total
Applied
HIAC801 Predictive
4 - - 4 - - 4
Analytics

Examination scheme
Sub Subject Name Theory (out of 100) Pract.
Internal Assessment Term
Code End sem and Oral Total
Test1 Test2 Avg. work
Exam Oral
Applied
HIAC801 Predictive 20 20 20 80 - - - 100
Analytics

Course 1. To deliver Knowledge of core operations in Energy Vertical Solving complex issues
objective analyzing available data in Operations, Maintenance, Reliability, Safety, Procurement,
Inventory etc.,
2. To introduce forecasting and predictive techniques.
Course The students will able to
Outcome
1. Identify the use of analytics and its tools
2. Interpret data and preparation of data
3. Use descriptive modeling techniques
4. Practice predictive modeling techniques such as decision tree, logistic regression and
neural network
5. Apply and build models using clustering, regression and classification techniques and its
corresponding algorithms
6. Discuss the case studies of Predictive Analytics and Predictive Maintenance

Pre requisites: Data Science concepts

Module Content Hours. CO

Overview of Predictive Analytics:
What and Why Analytics, Predictive Analytics? Supervised vs. Unsupervised
Learning, Parametric vs. Non-Parametric Models, Business Intelligence,
1
Predictive Analytics vs. Business Intelligence, Predictive Analytics vs. Statistics, 06 CO1

Statistics and Analytics, Predictive Analytics and Statistics Contrasted, Predictive

Analytics vs. Data Mining, Challenges in Using Predictive Analytics. Concept of
hb

2 Data Understanding and Data Preparation: 08 CO2

 Single Variable Summaries, Applying Simple Statistics in Data Understanding,
Categorical Variable Assessment, Data Visualization in One Dimension, Two or
Higher Dimensions.

Data Preparation, Fixing Missing Data, Feature Creation, Simple Variable

Transformations, Fixing Skew, Binning Continuous Variables, Numeric Variable
Scaling, Nominal Variable Transformation, Ordinal Variable Transformations,
Date and Time Variable Features, Multidimensional Features

Descriptive Modeling:

Data Preparation, Issues with Descriptive Modeling, Principal Component

3 Analysis, The PCA Algorithm, Applying PCA to New Data, PCA for Data 07 CO3
Interpretation, Additional Considerations before Using PCA, The Effect of
Variable Magnitude on PCA Models, Clustering Algorithms, The K-Means
Algorithm, Data Preparation for K-Means

Predictive Modeling: Decision Trees, The Decision Tree Landscape, Building

Decision Trees, Logistic Regression, Interpreting Logistic Regression Models,
Other Practical Considerations for Logistic Regression, Neural Networks,
4 Building Blocks: The Neuron, Neural Network Training, The Flexibility of Neural 9 CO4
Networks, Neural Network Settings, Neural Network Pruning, Interpreting
Neural Networks, Neural Network Decision Boundaries, Other Practical
Considerations for Neural Networks

Predictive Modeling: K-Nearest Neighbor, the k-NN Learning Algorithm,

Distance Metrics for k-NN, Other Practical Considerations for k-NN,

Naïve Bayes, Bayes’ Theorem, The Naïve Bayes Classifier Interpreting Naïve
5 9 CO5
Bayes Classifiers, Other Practical Considerations for Naïve Bayes, Regression
Models, Linear Regression, Linear Regression Assumptions, Variable Selection
in Linear Regression, Interpreting Linear Regression Models, Using Linear
Regression for Classification, Other Regression Algorithms

Assessing Predictive Models: Batch Approach to Model Assessment, Percent

Correct Classification, Rank-Ordered Approach to Model Assessment, Assessing
Regression Models.

Case studies: Quality Prediction in a Mining Process, predicting the consumption

6 of electricity in the coming future (refer Kaggle data set) 9 CO6
Predictive Maintenance: Find a defect in the production, Sensor Fault
Detection(refer Kaggle data set), Boiler Fault Detection ((refer https://ieee-
dataport.org/ )

Text Books:

1. Dean Abbott, “Applied Predictive Analytics: Principles and Techniques for the Professional Data Analyst” ,

ISBN: 978-1-118-72796-6
 2. P. Kaliraj, T. Devi, “Big Data Applications in Industry 4.0”, ISBN 9781032008110, Published February 10, 2022
by Auerbach Publications
3. Mahir Oner, Sultan Ceren Oner, “Data Analytics in Industry 4.0: In the Perspective of Big Data”.

Reference Books:

1. Gareth James, Daniela Witten, Trevor Hastie Robert Tibshirani. “An Introduction to Statistical Learning with
Applications in R”
2. Joel Grus, “Data science from scratch”, Orielly publication, ISBN: 9781492041139, May 2019
3. David Roi Hardoon, Galit Shmueli, “Getting Started with Business Analytics: Insightful Decision-Making”, CRC
Press,SBN 9781498787413
4. James R Evans, “Business Analytics”, Pearson publication, ISBN: 9780135231678